Home

Codecs & wrappers / cont

1. a 214 439 pnotpsf a a 214 7 3 Clip manager A 0 0 215 440 pagetabs a 216 441 disk list len 216 442 folder 216 Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Table of Contents 22 of 304 7 4 Playlist manager 469 folder clip list 34 334 292 sortcontrols scroll columns play selected play all in folder find media manage disk manage folder manage clips select all pagetabS disk list aaa a a a folders playlists list sort controls manage playlists list view toggle Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 ora 217 TT 224 Table of Contents 23 of 304 ar o D O C O ct D 2 ct UN 410 MACK soba o s s en EEE 224 7 4 1 Playlist editor 225 471 editor view 222222 226 472 previene 226 473 clip position timecode 226 474 clpname 2 2 len 226 475 clip thumbnail se 226 m 476 clip timecode 22 ooo eee 226 G 477 clip thumbnail scroll 226 e 478 playlist timecode ooo 226 S 479 manage assets o 227 5 480 playlist settings
2. rl 56 53 loop ping pong lll 56 E 54 back tee 56 E 999 DaUS6 sees a 56 O 56 forward Tast aaa a a a 57 J 9 9 DIQV E E AA S s S e S E 57 3 58 frame 1 loadpl a 57 59 nextel 57 00 Set OUl uu s XR h 2 2 k o S w Piu 54 3595 57 opo MM 58 3 7 MX Back panel 0 59 61 Videoin3 amp 4 2 ee 60 62 Video out 3 amp 4 2 o o llle 60 63 Super out 3 amp 4 2 2 a e 60 64 Aux out 3 4 llle es 60 65 Referencein3 amp 4 llle 60 66 Videol O1 amp 2 llle 60 67 RS 422 ports aaa a 60 68 Monitorout a 60 69 Redundant power aaa a ts 60 70 Power supply alarm ignore 60 71 Master timecode in amp Out 0 61 72 USB2porfS oll 61 Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Table of Contents 6 of 304 73 GbEthernet 2 22 L 61 74 USB3 ports 61 75 AES in amp 0Uut7 16 61 76 Analog line in 2l 61 77 Optional network a 61 78 AES in amp out 17 32 lll 61 79 LTC 1 amp 2 in loop 61 m 80 LTC3 amp 4in loo
3. o 227 481 edit selected clip 44s 227 482 duplicate selected lll lll 227 483 move Selected 227 484 timecode display 0 ee 228 485 export a 228 486 cancel 0 1 228 487 saveandclose 0 2222 llle 228 488 output 23 98 as 3991 aaa aaa 228 489 playlist settings overview 228 7 4 2 Playlist settings llle 229 490 playlist timecode type o 230 491 playlist timecode settings 230 492 frame rate oto ROC ON dag d 230 493 D DST cosacos nos sa a aras 230 494 cancel leL 230 495 save and Close 230 Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Table of Contents 24 of 304 r Sara a ARA 231 8 0 Remote Control 232 8 1 Device Manager 233 8 2 RS 422 COM port setup ee 234 8 3 RS 422 Cables amp pin outs auaa aaa a 238 m 8 4 Avid Digital Cut llle 239 D 8 4 1 General Settings llle 239 S 8 4 3 Insert Edit Settings _ __ ee 240 E 8 4 2 Settings for New File 240 D 8 4 4 Media Composer settings o 241 zi 8 5 AMP protocol laaa illl oll ls 242 AAN 242 8 6 VDCP ee 243 8 7 Using V
4. lol ll RSS 305 11 2 Codecs amp wrappers 312 11 3 Data rates lll RR 339 11 4 Storage calculator ee 350 12 0 Index 391 Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Table of Contents 26 of 304 1 0 Introduction 1 1 About This Manual uononpodiu Note This manual primarily reflects the state of Cinedeck hardware and software as of the date and version number noted on the cover and in the page footers however because of the many customer specific customizations and minor updates some sections will vary slightly from your system and the stated version This manual will be updated as new features are implemented and will not necessarily reflect legacy information What s in the manual This user manual describes the functions available in the Cinedeck software as well as relevant information regarding upgrades hardware information such as pin definitions for connectors interaction with 3rd party software such as NLEs and further technical information of interest to users For a good initial understanding there are several overview sections which should be reviewed 1 5 Cinedeck Product Overview on page 30 3 0 Installation on page 37 5 1 Ul Introduction on page 74 gt O O et gt UN lt Q How to use this manual The manual is di
5. suoneoii edsg 1080P 1080P 1080P 1080P 1080P l nR TRR 1080P E 5 OX CO ICO ICO vee O 1080P 5 e o os 1080P os e mr vom og j 1080P VC 5 how 23 98 Cineform 1080P VC 5 E 1080P VC 5 High 23 98 Cineform 9 DOT oe Filmscan 1 23 98 Cineform s dris Filmscan 2 23 98 Cineform 1080P VC 5 Kevin 23 98 Cineform ying 1080P I Cinedeck August 27 2015 14 28 Page 317 of 350 C O Qu D O UN 2 z CU oO 5 D UN Codecs amp wrappers cont UN 4 D O Em O OU cr O ES T 1080P 24 JUncompesed W M W Fed JEJ JEJ 18002 DwHD M N N 3 M _ _ M j j 1080P 24 DwxHD M N N us E 8 180022 pwHD M M N vus j gy F 1080022 pNx44a N N yg R 9o 1080022 PoRs H M M Proy JE C124 etes K K K r E 8 1924 mets K 3 wma Y J mans Pores K K vo e J ooa mos 3 3X X e 1090024 xocammo K N n m 3 w 3X 3 E wei xxmmo K N N amp TK X J 190024 xocammo K N n 3 3 K maas T H24 K N N wawam ioo 264 R N N pa X 3 iwora n24 R N N px H E C124 H24 E N N oco X
6. lle 157 316 It 2 2 2 u 2 RR RAT ww rsrs e w s s s K 2 s w Q h Q S Q 5299 5 158 317 saveandclose lll 158 318 copy to other channels ll 158 319 generate Xm 159 320 use record tc offset eee ee 159 321 encoder name n 159 322 vbrenable 0 a 159 323 endian type 0 0 a 160 324 use mxf clip folders 160 325 encoder enable lll 160 5 23 Audio routing ee 161 326 source and encode display Ln 162 Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Table of Contents 17 of 304 327 input meters 0 0 0000 a a a 162 328 source to destination selector 162 329 delay 162 330 presets oll 162 331 copy settings a 163 332 undo all ee 163 333 save back s 163 m 334 additional channels toggle 164 G 335 channel toggle a 164 e 336 switchto ls 164 S 5 24 Video Burn Settings 165 5 337 inputid tab ss 166 i 338 video DUO len n 166 339 position a a a a 166 340 safe Za ee 166 341 SIZE _
7. CS lt JjSetimpoint AtA Clearinspoint uid OT jJGotoimpont O Setoutepoint tO Yoo Clearoutpoint iO DpJGotoowpont Ho Play in reverse Multiple presses increases speed U Ko Pause playback 4 4 4 8 L Play forward Multiple presses increases speed U I T 1 Enable disable touch transport 93 1934 Jes A D lt C O o o UN 3 O 5 et O et UN Right Arrow 1 Mowe selected cliptoright W Add clip asset before selected clip _ I 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 E Add clip asset after selected lip 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 y Switch to playlist preview screen S Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 81 of 304 5 4 Powering on For the location of the power button on your specific Cinedeck please refer to the appropriate front panel description in chapter 3 0 Installation on page 37 Current Cinedecks run a Windows 7 embedded operating system installed on a separate SSD set as drive CX After pressing the power button the Cinedeck will go through several internal BIOS and hardware related checks and then boot into Windows From the factory most Cinedecks boot to the Windows desktop however RX3G may boot directly into the Cinedeck application If your system has for example been setup to operate in your facilities domain you may need a passwo
8. fay wo 59 94 Cineform S mp E s faf faf Cinedeck August 27 2015 14 28 Page 323 of 350 C O Qu D O UN 2 z CU oO 5 D UN Codecs amp wrappers cont suoneoii edsg 1080P VC 5 59 94 Cineform 1080P VC 5 59 94 Cineform 1080P VC 5 59 94 Cineform 1080P VC 5 59 94 Cineform oe mcm ee eee eee j y 1860 Pos H BH H Normal H _losoP 60 Potes R M M ba R losoP60 Pos M E M SES ws sss rrr al al EI s s fal L we oss jaa fal al LIPS r s i fal e e oss OO a EC fal a Deos rre om fal Pr AE Cinedeck August 27 2015 14 28 Page 324 of 350 High ru C O Qu D O UN 2 z CU oO 5 D UN Codecs amp wrappers cont suoneoii edsg esp me gummi me o esp me umm v eo me rum mw o eo me mam e a Pores gom rise Sef UHDTV 1 VC 5 TN 24 Cineform UHDTV 1 VC 5 UN 24 Cineform UHDTV 1 VC 5 High 24 Cineform 9 UHDTV 1 VC 5 Eden 24 Cineform UHDTV 1 VC 5 Filmscan 2 24 Cineform C O Qu D O UN 2 z CU oO 5 D UN CE N a Y lt I x ln AJ D WN RAIN ProRes Normal 25 Ae ruri rg e Je f Cinedeck August 27 2015 14 28 Page 325 of 350 Codecs amp wrappers cont suoneoii edsg
9. 0 a a e 166 342 E a e 166 343 block 167 344 encoder burn timecode source aaa 167 345 usertext llle 167 346 properties panel area 0 00 eee ees 167 347 cancel 0 E A im ES 167 348 saveandclose 0 oll lll 167 5 25 TC amp Automationtab 168 349 pagetabs 2 22222 169 350 record CONntrOl a 169 351 external device via SDI 169 O92 EDL 222 227 2 x2225 5353 29324 2 ma e Q e Q d 170 Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Table of Contents 18 of 304 353 input rec run TC o2 ee 170 354 preroll _ aa OHS ORG E RE GE x cx s 171 355 master clock mode o 171 356 genfcmode n 171 357 gen fc SOUrCe aaa a a 172 358 Special timecode modes 173 359 channel toggle 173 m 360 trofeos 174 G 361 df ndf cc 174 e 362 saveandclose 0 000 a oll 174 S 9 29 Ree cuac ero sor 175 5 5 25 2 EDL editor s 176 363 edlname 0 lll n 177 364 filename 177 365 proxy name a 177 002 ID iC rea dee eh eG SUP S Q S QU 9 b 0 333 3 Eee deb
10. 106 169 edit pointdisplay 106 170 edit point ContrOlS 106 171 editmode llle 106 172 preview ee pb 2222 leen 106 173 preview edit 107 174 edit start tG 107 175 file tc display 22e 107 176 create blank lape eee a 107 177 trim Hie ros oras o aaa 107 178 targetfileinfo llle 107 179 open file to edit rn 107 180 audio Src aaah aaa a 107 181 disable remote frackarm 0 107 182 setup source gt file mapping 107 Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Table of Contents 11 of 304 5 11 6 Insert Audio Matrix llle 108 y iwi wx REEAESESeSRSG SESSREGMRSPIURRRERREREREREE REB RS s 108 5 12 Create Black File lllo ll llle 109 5 13 Confidence Monitoring 110 5 14 Character Out Customization i i o 111 5 15 Overlay Customization 00000000000 cc 112 m 5 16 Video Analysis Tools llle 113 G 5 17 Setup tabs explained _ 114 e 5 18 Overview tab 115 S 184 channel toggle ee 116 5 185 page fabs a ren 116 18
11. Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 257 of 304 Reinitializing SSDs cont 8 C Windows system32 diskpart exe Microsoft DiskPart version 5 1 7601 Copyright C 1999 2008 Microsoft Corporation On computer CINEDECK PC DISKPART gt list disk Disk HHH Status Online Online Disk 3 Online DISKPART gt select disk 2 8 C Windows system32 diskpart exe Disk 2 Online Disk 3 Online DISKPART gt select disk 2 Disk 2 is now the selected disk DISKPART gt list disk Status Online Online Online Online DIS KPH RT Z Dun Gpt Online Online Online Online DISKPART gt clean DiskPart succeeded in cleaning the DISKPART m Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 As noted previously Disk 2 will be used in this example Find the drive needing maintenance in the list and type select disk n where n is the number of the disk you want to clean and press Enter A message should be displayed indicating the currently selected disk Just for safety type list disk again and press enter to confirm that the selected disk is the disk you want to clean An asterisk is used to indicate which disk is selected Type clean at the command line to remove the partition from the selected disk DiskPart should display a message saying DiskPart succeeded in cleaning this disk Type exit and press Enter to close Disk
12. System Restore can help Fix problems that might be making your computer run slowly ar stop responding System Restore does not affect any of your documents pictures or other personal data Recently installed programs and drivers might be uninstalled Is this process reversible Select Choose a different restore to view all of a pupa the available restore points Select this option to undo the most recent update driver or software installation iF you think it is causing problems Time 12 30 2014 1 58 36 PM Description Install Installed Directs Current time zone Eastern Standard Time Scan For affected programs Cancel Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 278 of 304 Using a Restore Point cont Next Haw do I choose a restore point Un D lt x D Restore your computer to Ehe state it was in before the selected event K j o gt 8 Select the restore point you want to use and press E O o D Current time zone Eastern Standard Time Date and Time 7 12 30 2014 1 58 36 PM Installed Directx Install 12 30 2014 1 55 05 PM Installed Directx Install 12 29 2014 6 48 14 PM Cinedeck_Update Show more restore points Scan For affected programs Back Cancel xi Confirm your restore point Ag E O CU A D UN O D v O E ct Your computer will be restored to the skate it was
13. CONTROLS on page 105 Click clear and the respective in or out to delete that point To manually set edit points click keypad Select use src tc to optionally write the source timecode into the destination file Use the edit mode controls to select between inserting video audio or video plus audio Unlike a tape machine assemble in this context 171 2 112 Insert simply simultaneously selects both video and audio to be inserted The EDIT MODE Baseband Master on page 105 only tape like assemble edit function with files is pause and pause amp seek See 5 11 2 Pause on page 99 and 5 11 3 Pause amp Seek in File on page 101 3 115 Insert The preview button toggles the master preview display between the playback target 172 PREVIEW EE PB Baseband Master T I I I onpage105 file view to the incoming source video and audio EtoE electronics to electronics J91se A pueq seg 1Jesuj Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 106 of 304 Record Modes Insert Baseband Master cont 3 115 Insert Select preview edit to disable file write mode and view a simulation of the proposed 173 PREVIEW EDIT Baseband Master on page 105 edit Select edit start TC tape reel ID to rewrite re stripe the target file timecode based 2 115 Insert on a user entered timecode or back timed based on the position of the playhead For 93 1934 Jes a Baseband Master l UE
14. a 89 S 117 timecode e 89 5 118 timecode Source 89 119 redundant master space time 90 120 start amp elapsed tiMe 90 121 redundant proxy space time s 90 122 record button 0 lll 90 123 gang but amp flon __ a a a 90 124 RS 422 button lll 90 125 SDI charbutfon len 90 126 Ul overlays LUT button 91 127 setup Dutton 00 000 aa 91 128 stop button 2n 91 129 encode Overview 91 130 play button 2 2 91 131 error log button o 91 132 audio meters a 91 133 background bg button _ 91 134 Pbutton 0 0 0 0 0 aaa a e 92 Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Table of Contents 9 of 304 135 Mbutffon ago bs be oe RE Be ee ee ee EERE HS 92 5 9 Single channel view lll lll llle 93 136 multi view toggle 94 137 JOCK e 2959xv9g95 5 5 5 444 4 9343 94 138 tcp remote 94 139 elapsed time 00000 2 94 140 start es 94 m 141 file TC source onnaa 94 G 142 timecode 94 e TT 94 S 144 recordmode aaa 94 5 TIT 95 146 record
15. 215 PAGE TABS path amp filename p 125 templates 216 CURRENT project 228 PRIMARY p PATH P 127 scene scene1 Demo input2 master P l E 227 REDUNDANT LM PATH P 127 Sub Demo input2 master P I E scene SYP 226 FILE NAME P 127 Demo input2 master 001 225 TAPE REEL PROJECT DISPLAY p 125 Jobeueuu pelold x Demo input2 O ID P 127 AAA R 224 RESET TO ses 223 SHOW TAKE P 125 ROLL p 125 WILDCARDS P 126 WILDCARDS P 126 219 CHANNEL 220 CANCEL 221 sAvE amp CLOSE ASSIGNMENTS P 126 BUTTON P 126 BUTTON P 126 UU CU ct 2 go D J CU j D ct D pel CU c D WY Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 124 of 304 Project manager Path amp file name templates cont 2 19 2 Path amp tile The page selector tabs are always visible in the main setup area These can be clicked 215 PAGE TABS name templates l p 124 to provide direct access to each setup section D E nt 5192 path amp fie he current project display indicates the selected project for which you would be name templates changing folder and file naming Although they may not be included in the current PROJECT DISPLAY p 124 ea er naming structure this display also indicates the current selected scene and sub scene 93 1934 Jes By default Cinedeck file names leverage an auto
16. 28 60 92 69 20 6 16 76 52 6 2 17 76 64 5 5 0 Data rates cont 1080P 24 H 264 iPad Uncompressed VC 5 1080P 24 H 264 PIX T a 1080P 25 eee 1080P 24 H 264 DAX 1080P 25 DNxHD 36 SON H 264 1080P 25 DNxHD 120 TM oe Uus DAX 2800 1080P 25 DNxHD 185 Ue igh 1080P 24 H264FulHD 3 1080P25 DNx444 vum 1080P 25 Cineform Filmscan 1 1080P 24 AVC I 50 0 1080P 25 ProRes 4444 Medium 1080P 24 H 264 350kbs 1080P 25 ProRes Proxy VC 5 1080P 25 Cineform Filmscan 2 1080P 24 AVC I 100 100 Dee AC ERECTUS 1080P 24 1080P 25 H 264 iPad 1080P 24 Cineform 1080P 25 H 264 PIX UN D O Em O o cr O ES T 3 1 1 3 3 8 1 1 27 3 3 5 2 0 2 5 So 8J eje 6 21 84 67 8 5 22 84 5 5 5 0 8 7 8 3 0 00 1080P 24 DPX Fixed 1080P 25 ProRes HQ JPEG 2000 VL nom neun 1080P 25 XDcam HD 50 didi 220Mbit Cineform 1080P 25 H 264 iPod 035 1080P Uncompressed 2 3 1080P 24 H 264 Main 1080P 25 ProRes LT Proxy 1080P 25 ProRes Normal 5 S VC 5 1080P 25 Cineform I ying Cineform Low 1080P 25 XDcam HD EX 29 97 Fixed High 1080P 25 H 264 DAX 1080P DNxHD 45 EN 29 97 VC 5 mm H 264 1080P 24 Cineform DAX 2800 1080P DNxHD 145 ETE Filmscan 1 1080P 25 H 264 Full HD 29 3 EE 45 145 VC 5 1080P 1080P 25 H 264 350kbs 035 DNxHD 220 220 1080P 24 Cineform TV 29 97 VC 5 y 29 97 45 102 UJ Ul 1080P 24 Cineform 1080P 2
17. cont 28 LCD CONTROL 36 wx front panel The MX LCD control panel has a LCD dimmer control and three pushbuttons display PANEL 40 34 off on toggle menu access selection and adjustment for size etc 1024 x 600 Touch Screen Display for user interface manipulation and video preview of record and playback signals This screen can be tilted to allow better viewing at 29 LCD DISPLAY Ecco low angles The same signals see on this screen can simultaneously be displayed on a monitor connected to any one of the GUI display ports You may need to access the Windows Screen Resolution settings to properly configure your external display Sony SxS Panasonic P2 and Compact flash cards may be inserted for direct playback 30 Caro reapers 3 NR front panel and file management tasks such as copying data to local Or network storage The dp32 Cinedeck will not write data to these cards with compatible file and folder structures seen on natively written camera cards 9 22 system from the USB system key dp52 See MX control panel for more information The image shown may not match your unit Most MX systems have two mini and two pez 1 4 headphone jacks and two volume controls for audio monitoring Cinedecks are configured by default with twist lock drive retainers but key lock retainers are available upon request with your initial order See 3 10 Inserting amp ejecting drives on page 69 MX can hold four removable drive trays
18. Actions D El ffs System Tools Ca LC Simple Basic NTFS Healthy Boot Page File Primary Partition 27 34 GB 7 93 GB d Disk Management Y 2 Task Scheduler a System Reserved Simple Basic NTFS Healthy System Active Primary Partition 100MB 74 MB El Event Viewer More Actions El s Shared Folders ES d Local Users and Groups El Sa Performance Calisk 0 LL en Basic system Res E uU 4 28 55 GB 100 MB NTFS 27 34 GB NTFS 1 1068 online Healthy Syst Healthy Boot Page File Primary F eo Ma a uu OPE EE EEE a A FI giDisk 1 Unknown uu c UI 476 94 GB 470 94 GB Mat Initialized Unallocated A Unallocated Primary partition Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 251 of 304 Initializing new drives cont The first time a new drive is detected Windows may request that the disk be initialized Some drives will not require this step and this dialog will not display If this is the case proceed from the next figure Initialize Disk E X ou must initialize a disk before Logical Disk Manager can access it When initializing a disk for use with a Cinedeck the default MBR partition type should be used 9 qnoJ 79 31AJ9S Press OK 5n style for the selected disks MBR Master Boot Record C GPT GUID Partition Table Note The GPT partition style is not recognized by all previous versions of Windows bis recomme
19. FKT EB PRT E WARNING un this file from your portable USB device ONLY unning this file from your hard drive may overwrite your current aster Hoot Record NBR and render your Windows Operating System in bootable YOU HAVE BEEN WARNED his batch file is offered in hopes that it will be useful and omes with absolutely no warranty USE AT YOUR OWN RISK C D Co et D E UN UJ D n et O D D lt Press any key to make drive F hootable or close this window to abort Press any key and follow the instructions to make the USB bootable nn LN LN LN LN nm unu dy TV TR e ions The hidden file Idlinux sys has been installed l Your F drive should now be bootable Once the procedure is done close the command prompt window and safely eject the USB from the Fress any key to exit this window system Continue to 9 17 Restore factory image on page 282 to restore your Cinedeck with the new restore key Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 287 of 304 9 20 Create system image The Cinedeck USB key can also be used to create an image of your system as you have set it up and save it to the USB This can be quite useful if you have for example installed SAN software or made other permanent changes to the system which you would like restored if a system restore is required 9 qnoJ 79 31AJ9S The procedure is essentially the same as restoring
20. The COM port number is not important at this point as it can be changed in the next steps USB Serial Port COM5 Properties i x General Port Settings Driver Details 7 it DN N N l AO O lt O Uu D et c Bits per second Click on the Port Settings tab and confirm that all of the settings Data bits 8 E are as shown Pay gi E Stop bits Bits per second Flow control None Data bits Pa rity Advanced Restore Defaults Stop bits Flow control TN Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 235 of 304 RS 422 COM port setup cont el Click on Advanced to open the 2 Advanced Settings for the selected D COM port and confirm that the Advanced Settings for COMS O settings match the screen on the right and those itemized below POMONA e USB Transfer Sizes Cancel Referring to the Serial Converter Select lower settings to correct performance problems at low baud rates APEE letter from the previous step set Select higher settings for faster performangs the appropriate COM port number Receive Bytes For RX3G Transmit Bytes e A COM 5 RX3G CH 1 e B COM 6 RX3G CH 2 BM Options Miscellaneous Options Select lower settings to correct response problems Serial Enumerator For MX and ZX e noa eT Serial Printer e A COM 9 MX ZX CH 1 Cancel If Power Off e B COM 10 MX ZX CH 2
21. oo we uj jo jog e tat USA ee E 8 Wo ow fay fa 59 E Cineform MS eee E RF W mcm Til jj Cinedeck August 27 2015 14 28 Page 337 of 350 C O Qu D O UN 2 z CU oO 5 D UN Codecs amp wrappers cont suoneoii edsg NTSC SD VC 5 i NTSC SD VC 5 Filmscan 1 59 9i Cineform NTSC SD VC 5 NOS cemas E V Y fese O 0 NTSC SD VC 5 Kevin 59 9j Cineform eying T Jj j j J J J j o o C O Qu D O UN Qo CU oO 5 D UN Cinedeck August 27 2015 14 28 Page 338 of 350 11 3 Data rates Primarily based on the bit rate different encodes require significantly different amounts of storage and the same codec can use different amounts of storage space depending on the image format frame rate and whether it uses a variable or constant bit rate In general codecs such as DNx or XDCAMHD specifically note their data rate as Mbit s megabits per second like DNx 220 or XDCAMHD 50 though in conversation MB s megabytes per second has become fairly common To convert from Mbit s to MB s divide by 8 so for example 220Mbit 8 27 5 MB s To convert from MB s to Mbit s reverse that so 27 5 MB s 8 220Mbit UN D O Em O o cr O ES T Use the data rate shown below with the data rate calculator to determine the estimated required storage See 11 4 Storage calculator on page 350 So 8J eje 10801 50 H 264 DA
22. Cinedeck RX3G ZX 4 49 MX USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 cinedeck Contacting Cinedeck General Information For non support general inquiries please contact us at info cinedeck com You can also call 1 888 390 4460 Some international locations do not allow dialing a US toll free number in that case call 1 646 642 6985 Additionally the Cinedeck website has a significant array of resources including brochures where to buy video tutorials and technical documents Support Technical Support office hours are 9am 6pm US Eastern Time but we generally respond to support requests from 8am to midnight 7 days a week and at odd hours of the night Response time is generally within minutes during business hours To initiate a support request it is preferred that you fill out the support form on the Cinedeck website http cinedeck com support The direct support email address is supportOcinedeck com Phone support can be reached at 1 888 390 4460 option 2 If you do not reach us please do leave a message indicate your version number and as much relevant informations as possible and use the above noted support form as we do endeavor to respond ASAP within the expanded hours noted above Some international locations do not allow dialing a US toll free number in that case call 1 646 642 6985 Please Note ris generally essential and helpful to have as much information a
23. Codecs amp wrappers cont suoneoii edsg 108005994 DvcProHD_ M M N 10 VC 5 ses ELE ff 10801 59 94 VC Median Cineform VC 5 10805994 eue 8 a om fe a 108015994 imc Cineform 10801 59 94 Sees Cineform VC 5 108015994 cea E B Ro ev f ef fe 108005994 JPEG200 M M ve2zombit E VC 5 OS cua EL R t fa VC 5 1080160 cue E E E em j VC 5 OS cue ELE fe VC 5 ma sir i NR RR ERN VC 5 IP MEREREL INNEN ER ERR RR VC 5 1080160 cuu E ER E ee jJ 1080P l as ommes EY rj a ne rj faf Cinedeck August 27 2015 14 28 Page 315 of 350 C O Qu D O UN 2 z CU oO 5 D UN Codecs amp wrappers cont suoneoii edsg 29 owe gne o A S om afin wq m w a gw 5 25 owe gno P gr go fat m p owe s ow a gw gw 5 2338 a A 23 98 ProRes Proxy a s m ror E OA v og E me m O mom faf j m ome E ww e af pis roe E e TTT P zs pomme a uf s qne a aa na pmo E n a a fafaj zs omo afff o qr w faf ESL co Aus m ome a x s m afa HET E pus gr weg m d 3j Cinedeck August 27 2015 14 28 Page 316 of 350 C O Qu D O UN 2 z CU oO 5 D UN Codecs amp wrappers cont
24. D mj 2 et D i h CU O D Click the current project name to access project and scene management SCENE P 116 SCENE P 116 P 116 TOGGLE P 116 185 PAGE TABS n overview 0 0 O current current current tape reel oP project Scene ee sub scene r ID sync source nput l rann PR 203 DROP amp Loss settings STOP P 118 i512 V3 8 71 ERa P Dal E_ t 186 CURRENT PROJECT P 116 qe M9SIAJ9AQ 190 INPUT SETTINGS P 117 input source resolutio frame rate yt depu audio source rec TC source rec TC offse autore input put s esoiut a ate bit depth idio source SOulrce C iC aut 191 MASTER ENCODER SETTINGS P 117 master encoder 192 MASTER FILE DESTINATIONS P 117 202 SEGMENT alay ali law k 0 0 t MODE P 118 193 PROXY ENCODER SETTINGS P 117 194 PROXY FILE DESTINATIONS P 117 3 name Input me EN preview iis 3 p 195 NAME P 117 196 LABEL P 117 197 PREVIEW 199 Burn LUT P 117 P 117 200 coPv TO 201 SAVE AND OTHER CHANNELS CLOSE P 118 198 preview LUT P 117 P 117 Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 115 of 304 Overview tab cont The channel toggle next ch prev is available on all main setup pages Clicking the E UN D A bedl gt D 184 CHANNEL 5 18 Overview tab right or left arrow allows easy switching to
25. Harmonic Omneon Mediagrid SNS Storage Network Solutions obeJo1S J10MISN Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 45 of 304 3 3 4 DAS Storage If you have a need for local attached removable storage but need higher bandwidth than USB or eSATA and would prefer a system designed for higher performance another option may be DAS Direct Attached Storage uonej ei1sur DAS utilizes a custom PCIe adapter card which connects directly to an external drive system Because the card is tied directly to the PCIe bus the bandwidth can be very high DAS generally utilizes a RAID array leveraging the high bus bandwidth to deliver high I O performance accompanied by excellent file security Additionally some DAS systems such as those from Dulce can also integrate a network adapter so while the Cinedeck may only have one available PCIe slot the installation of the DAS adapter will not necessarily eliminate the addition of a network card The list too will grow however one manufacturer with DAS products known to be used with Cinedecks is Dulce Systems D D O O e O o D Uu m j D a O Uu ebeijo1s SVC Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 46 of 304 3 4 RX3G front panel uone ei1sur LCD SCREEN CAN BE TILTED DOWN FOR HIGH RACKMOUNT POSITIONS 8 LCD DisPLAY P 48 7 DRIVE LOCK amp EJECTOR P 48 CAN BE KEY OR TW
26. Initializing new drives cont After initializing the disk will be listed as Basic and Unallocated Right click the drive to open the new volume context menu and select New Simple Volume to start the New Simple Volume Wizard E Lomputer Management File Action View Help es sio B ss ea E Computer Management Local Volume Layout Type File System a El ifs System Tools ca C Simple Basic NTFS Healthy Boot Page File Primary Partition 27 34 GB 7 393 GB id Event Viewer 257 Shared Folders 2 Local Users and Groups a Performance A Device Manager E 3 Storage E Disk Management E Services and Applications Mew Simple volume New Spanned volume L sDisk D Basic System Res C ew Striped volume 26 55 GB 100 MB NTFS 27 34 GB MT T Online Healthy Bor ieu paros Volume Healthy Syst Properties L uDisk 1 Basic B lt aoe R Help x 476 94 GB 76 04 GB Online New Simple Volume Wizard 3 Welcome to the New Simple Volume Wizard This wizard helps pou create a simple volume on a disk simple volume can only be on a single disk To continue click Next J mar Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Task Scheduler Ca System Reserved Simple Basic NTFS Healthy System Active Primary Partition 100 MB 74 MB I x More Ac
27. Storage Disk Management Services and Applications ib Open Explore C 2 D 5 e E O o gt lt D D et et D s Uu Mark Partition as Active 7 Change Drive Letter and Paths iDisk Extend Volume Basic System Res C Shrink volume 26 559 aB 100 MB NTFS 2 y 34 GB NT Add Mirror Online Healthy Syst Healthy Boc TSE Delete volume L sDisk 1 w Oo amp G 0 Ki 5 Boalt samsung 512 7361V D Hep MH a HH HA 476 94 GB 1475 04 GB NTFS AAAA A dui yl P d a Online Healthy Primary Partition Bg Unallocated fll Primary partition Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 262 of 304 Changing drive letters cont Change Drive Letter and Paths for D Samsung 5 FATE X Allow access to this volume bu using the following drive letter and paths From the first dialog select Change to change the drive letter 9 qnoJ 79 e2lAJ8g Add Remove Change Drive Letter or Path EE Enter a new drive letter or path tor D Samsung B12 7351V From the drop down list select an available letter Assign the following drive letter C 2 D 5 e E O o gt lt D D et et D s Uu Only letters which are currently unassigned will be Meuntin the following empty N TF5 folder available in the list Select OK Cinedeck USER GU
28. iew p 211 2 Playback Whether a single clip multiple clips or a playlist is loaded elapsed time shows the time duration between the start and the current play head position single channe 7 2 Playback The end timecode of the clip or playlist loaded for playback is displayed iew p 211 single channe TM S iew p 211 If multiple clips are loaded the end timecode of the last clip is displayed S em The total remaining playback time of the loaded clip clips or playlist is displayed iew p 211 Although named differently than P amp M on the standby view the file button also toggles the on screen overlay of the audio channels in this case the audio 5 playback channels present in the loaded file single channel When this overlay is active it is possible to select a different channel pair for oe monitoring A long press opens the audio monitor control screen where the headphone level can be adjusted monitored channel pair can be selected and a 428 START i 429 ELAPSED TIME 430 END 431 REM 432 FILE MIA euueup Buis joeqKe d custom monitor mix can be setup The orange inverted triangle play head marker is always located at the currently displayed video frame The play head can be clicked and dragged to scrub the video single channel Note that if play mode is active audio can be heard during scrubbing but scrub oe performance is bett
29. o n 121 5 212 save amp close DU ON o 121 213 apply butffon _ 222r 121 214 project list scroll o o ooo o 121 5 19 1 Path amp file names explained 1 122 5 19 2 Path amp file name templates uaaa aaa a 124 215 pagetabs 0 oll 125 216 current project display lll ll 125 217 start lake 125 218 start roll 125 219 channel assignments cee eee 126 220 cancel button llle 126 221 save amp close button 00 0000 eee ln 126 222 edit user wildcards ll 126 223 show wildcards o 126 224 reset to defaults lll ln 126 225 tape reel id lll 127 226 filename 127 Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Table of Contents 13 of 304 5 19 3 Path editor 5 19 4 File name editor 5 19 5 Edit user amp global wildcards 227 redundant path aaa aa 127 228 primary Dath a 127 229 global wildcards 127 230 all encoders use same templates 127 231 master 2 0 00 a a 127 232 prOXy 2 2 ll slash 127 eran rana EPA aaa 128 233 current project ee a a 129 234 template 129 235 expansion 2 aaa aa a a 129 236 wildcard
30. xemo N n so w e Cinedeck August 27 2015 14 28 Page 312 of 350 Codecs amp wrappers cont UN 4 D O Em O CU cr O ES T Ciooso nza W N N maua 4264 M N N Ciooiso nza W N nN px E i050 H26 4 n N so WT Z Z 108050 H264 M N N f Funo MM O Cio H2 K N N sos a J 8 maua H24 E n N vanr E r Cs m N N mm 3 j J jJ Damaso m y s s 155 g 8 71 95 m RIN N 2a T J imi Jr N N 20a J maua Jr K N ii 3 _ 10050 Avi M M N so E R _ 19050 Acci MW 4 N xo M R j 108050 DvcProHD_ M M N too R M 1 00 MS ome esa rp a O EC EC espe rapa em EC fal LIP fete O EC de s ee rr CI mm EC fa EEE ence Efe r s ERE RUN rs eco DO CIO iat al a 1080050 JPEG200 M M 2 v2zombie amp Cinedeck August 27 2015 14 28 Page 313 of 350 EM Z Z Codecs amp wrappers cont suoneoii edsg A14 lt t m an 108005994 Uncompesed W M W Fixed R 10805994 DwHD M M N 4 J E M F 108059944 DwxHD M N N 1 E M F 108059944 DwHD M M N 20 E E
31. 2 a a 95 147 gang edhe e Soe eee ee bes 95 148 LUT cum uos ua uc 93 Rubus RES YE eee ae 95 149 charout 1 lll ll 95 150 overlays llle 95 151 analysis lt conoser EH EYEE Ee EE SG DES 95 152 100 ee 95 153 full Screen 96 154 setup llle llla 96 155 S O ahaaa a 96 156 encode Overview 96 157 play a a 96 198 CHOMIOG so s s l s a G s s 2 S E 2 ZS S k 034050 94 54 mod Gad Q Q 97 159 audio meters a 97 160 bg s oe ee Hee GEER EERE a 97 ri E ee ete meee Ziana laxa dees NENNEN rS e he ee ee 97 Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Table of Contents 10 of 304 163 remote og 52 393 9 X ERE Ru Pee sas 97 164 SVG o roses rasa 238248534555 97 165 Signal 39 wx ewEaux E REGXRSe44 22 97 5 10 Headphone Monitor ControlS 98 5 11 Record Modes 0 99 5 11 2 Pause EEEE EEEE 99 m 5 41 1Normal 99 G 5 11 3 Pause amp Seek in File _ __ 101 E 5 11 4 Insert Baseband 2l 103 S 5 11 5 Insert Baseband Master ll lesen 105 5 166 device control o oo aoaaa a 106 167 recordmode 106 168 RS 422mode 1
32. 7 it DN N N l AO O lt is O Uu D ect C 8 3 RS 422 Cables amp pin outs All Cinedecks manufactured after December 2014 utilize multi mode RS 422 control boards and can be connected for master or slave RS 422 control using standard straight through male male 9pin RS 422 serial data cables These later boards have their own specific COM port settings See multi mode RS 422 control board on page 237 O J3u02 0W Y Earlier model decks including RX3G and MX decks from before December 2014 utilize single mode RS 422 boards When connected using a standard straight through male gt male RS 422 cable the channels on these Cinedeck models are generally wired to be in slave mode that is to be controlled by the device to which it is connected If it is desired to use the Cinedeck in master mode from a slave port for example if a tape machine should be controlled from the Cinedeck a RS 422 crossover cable is required See the diagrams below for the proper pin connections It is also possible to have the pin outs on the deck changed by Cinedeck support for example to have all ports wired as master ports If any assistance is required contact Cinedeck support See Contacting Cinedeck on page 2 If there is a need to occasionally switch between slave and master modes it is recommended to use a male female crossover adapter cable This will provide slave mode by directly connecting the standard male
33. D go O a o D For Samsung drives go to www samsung com samsungssd to download and install the latest Samsung Magician Software This is a Windows application which includes a utility for creating a bootable version onto a USB drive or CD oSEJo DINIIS Samsung Once installed Samsung Magician Magician 4 Firmware Update may display an error x Disk Drive Before updating the firmware Samsung recommends that you back up your data and close all running applications except Magician Your current resolution is not supported by the Magician application System resolution must be greater than 1024x768 Performance Benchmark Samsung SSD 840 PRO Series Performance Optimization NON OS Disk E Primary Partition firmware update is available DXMO6B0Q Update Firmware Update This error may be Ignored 7 OS Optimization Currently installed firmware DXMOSBOQ LA E Over Provisioning The left portion of the Samsung Magician screen contains the menu SAMSUNG SSD 830 Series suc toe relo bacilos while the right provides drive details amp RAPID Mode 0 Data Security Currently installed firmware CXM0381Q Select Firmware Update from the left and if firmware is available NON OS DO update the drive Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 266 of 304 Secure erase cont is updated select Secure Erase from U
34. O D To select a codec simply touch the one you need If the required codec does not appear to be in the list there may be more that will be visible if you use the arrows or 305 copec 5 22 Proxy tab your mouse scroll wheel to move through the list p 154 Additionally it is important to understand that the input format has an impact on what encoding is available Not all codecs support all input types and frame rates so again it is important to know the full workflow See 10 1 FAQ gt Features on page 289 qe xold It should be noted that Cinedecks support most commonly used codecs but not all Cinedeck systems have all codecs This is especially true for ZX which is a modular system often purchased with a limited set of codecs Additional workflow packages with additional codecs and wrappers are available Once you have selected your desired codec you usually need to select a quality level or bitrate Cinedeck encoders use the most common designations for encode quality so you should find the options familiar Select the appropriate quality setting and move on to 522 Proxy tab Select a wrapper du aT p134 If the only information visible in this column is not available it is because the input you are using is not supported by the selected codec This is because not all codecs and wrappers support all input types and frame rates so again it is important to know the full workflow See 10 4 What is bit
35. R Wf 720P 5994 H264 MW N N jrxoo J Ng j 72005994 H264 M N N ri 7 pm fg _ 720P 5994 H264 MW N N j 3905 EJ j 720P 5994 H264 E N N JjManPoy 2 1 M HWj 2005994 s M N N m M j J ELLE A H UU LU U LS Keying Z Z O O Qu D O UN 2 z CU oO 5 D UN Z Z Z Z Z Z ZZ Z Z Z m Z Z lell lele ll E m A e EIT H N or HH 720P 5994 s EJN N x Mp 720P 5994 AvC1 LN pos J R RR j Cinedeck August 27 2015 14 28 Page 330 of 350 Codecs amp wrappers cont suoneoii edsg 720P 5994 Aci E E N vo E d 720P 59 94 DvcProHD_ M M N 10 W VC 5 meae rra m 720P5994 _ C Medium Cineform VC 5 E 720P 59 94 bon Filmscan 1 Cineform 720P 59 94 Ge Filmscan 2 Cineform VC 5 EEES IEEE Y Y L r ECO 3X T T ue L L L 2222 70P60 JUncompesed W M M Fed E JE 720P60 DwHD M N N Us E NEM 72op60 nw BE E N 20 E H E _ 72 060 PoRs M M E Poy j 720P60 Pos EJ HB B8 jJ j 72060 PoRs M M E j Nom d 72op60 Pos H H E o JE 72 060 PoRs M M M 44 SJS J VC 5 VC 5 VC 5 Cinedeck
36. There are also a number of ways to connect balanced audio sources The best and often lowest cost solution is to use an analog to digital AES adapter There are many on the market but one example is the AJA ADA4 4 Channel A D amp D A Converter In all cases these small converter boxes provide a simple and fairly foolproof direct connection for analog audio sources ett Another excellent but more expensive option would be an analog to SDI embedder These small converter boxes accept analog audio and SDI video sources and merge the audio into the video ancillary data track They are also simple and fairly foolproof and there are also many of these on the market C O 2 D O cr 2 O lt O C s on D O o Lastly a XLR or TRS balanced audio pair can be introduced to the system using a Focusrite 2i2 USB audio adapter T NES scale focusrite Keep in mind that especially when your audio is traveling via a different path from the video audio video timing issues can arise This can generally be managed internally via Cinedeck s the audio delay See 5 20 1 Audio delay on page 144 Suoliy2ouuoo oipnw For additional information on any of these solutions contact Cinedeck support See Contacting Cinedeck on page 2 Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 39 of 304 3 2 2 AES BNC to XLR Cinedecks utilize BNC coaxial connections for AES in and out while
37. There is a reset button to allow easy restarting the timecode to the original preset per take mode functions the same as record run however each time recording is stopped the timecode is automatically reset to the preset starting timecode number Also see 358 Special timecode modes on page 173 Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 171 of 304 5eJi 1l1ul Jes C Ro gt ct O CU ct O ct CU O TC amp Automation tab cont 92e1193UT Jes As noted gen TC mode and genTC source are related In free run mode select local system time to have a free running timecode source based on the internal system clock 35 GEN TC SOURCE e n free run mode select UTC system time to have a free running timecode source based on the internal system clock set to UTC or GMT n free run mode select preset to set the internal generator manually Preset also displays a reset button to allow restarting the free running timecode Note To allow time compensation local and UTC time are offset by the preset time so the preset must be 00 00 00 00 to use actual system local or UTC time To set the rec run starting timecode press the middle highlighted timecode to open a setting panel To reset the rec run timecode to the previously selected time press reset e To set the per take starting timecode press the lower highlighted timecod
38. UJ CU zx O L G D Q p O CU Gr O 7 FUNCTIONALITY REMOTE CONTROL Basic specifications cont Operating 40 to 95 F 40 to 95 F 40 to 95 F 40 to 95 F 40 to 95 F Temperature 5 06 as E 5 to 35 C 5 to 35 C 5 to 35 C 5 to 35 C Recommended 60 80 F 60 80 F 60 80 F 60 80 F 60 80 F operating temp 15 26 C 15 26 C 15 26 C 15 26 C 15 26 C Relative 20 to 80 20 to 80 20 to 80 20 to 80 20 to 80 Humidity non condensing non condensing non condensing non condensing non condensing AC Voltage 100 120 220 240 100 120 220 240 100 120 220 240 100 120 220 240 100 120 220 240 9 50 60Hz 50 60Hz 50 60Hz 50 60Hz 50 60Hz Range 10 36 Volts Power 180 Watts 300 Watts 850 Watts 300 Watts 200 Watts consumption suoneoii edsg lt lt LLI lt O 2 lt Lu UJ CU zx O L G D Q p O CU ar O 7 Cinedeck August 27 2015 14 28 Page 311 of 350 11 2 Codecs amp wrappers Cinedeck codec availability is wrapper workflow based meaning if a system has the wrapper it is licensed for all of the standard codecs available with that wrapper This is particularly true for the modular ZX which can be purchased with a limited wrapper selection Conversely RX and MX are licensed for all workflow packages and as such all wrappers but even so differences in system capability and software version can mean that specific frame rates
39. on page 197 399 START amp 6 1 Recordin ELAPSED TIME see oe 398 MASTER amp PROXY SPACE TIME During recording the start and elapsed time display indicates the timecode the recording started and a running elapsed time of the current recording In normal mode once recording starts the record button disappears however if one of the special record modes is active the record button will be replaced by other record related buttons When increment segment mode or TC break segment mode are active the system will automatically close the current recording segments based on the incoming timecode When break segment mode is active the operator can press this button to close the current recording segment 6 1 Recording u T multi view on When pause is active pressing this button stops the encoding process ES D O O X O e 3 gt p 2 A00 RECORD BUTTON page 197 but the file remains open until stop is pressed For EDL recording the button will change states depending on the current activity load edl means preroll indicates next stop means next start means an EDL is in ready EDL mode is active a file is recording the system is but recording has The system is The system is waiting for the next not been activated waiting for the first waiting for a stop event start time Press to start event trigger Cine
40. 2 D CU et O et CU C Recording specific controls and screen areas are discussed on the next pages Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 196 of 304 6 1 Recording multi view Below is one of the multi view quadrants As in standby mode the selected channel the channel which has the focus in indicated by a yellow border around the video preview the yellow timecode BuIp 1023y The key information items while recording are drive space amp time start amp elapsed time and the frame buffer indicator 398 MASTER amp PROXY SPACE TIME P 198 399 START amp e P 198 TOGGLE P 198 400 RECORD BUTTON P 198 401 GANG BUTTON P 199 ES D O O X O e 3 gt p 2 402 FRAME BUFFER INDICATOR P 199 404 STOP BUTTON 403 ENCODE OVERVIEW P 199 p 199 Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 197 of 304 Recording multi view cont 397 SINGLE VIEW ree The single view toggle which switches the user interface between multi view and uiti VIEW s TOGGLE page 197 single remains active during recording When recording the primary and redundant master and proxy space time displays will auto toggle between approximate remaining space and time based on the selected encode bitrate BuIp 1023y 6 1 Recording multi view
41. 2 5 SSD SATA drives o Cinedeck SSD drives are mounted in removable hot swappable dual drive cartridges or sleds RX and newer o Additional sleds as well as portable and installable receiving chassis are available to enable easy sneaker net workflows Page 300 of 304 seJnjeeJ 9 OVS soJnjeo4 lt OVS Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 FAQ gt Features cont o Currently Cinedeck only recommend and support Samsung 840 850 Pro and EVO series SSD drives o For recording and playback all Cinedecks can also utilize external USB and or eSATA and or network storage including NAS network attached storage and SAN storage area network systems requiring client software Additionally the Cinedeck operating system can be setup to support iSCSI file systems o Cinedecks are Windows 7 Embedded based so fully support SMB shares and client software is often available for SAN installations o Cinedeck MX and ZX have an available PCle slot for 8Gb fiber or 10Gb Ethernet cards as well as direct attached storage such as the drive arrays from Dulce Systems note All external and network recording devices and plans should be extremely well tested before utilizing in a production environ ment Drive assemblies of the same model from the same manufacturer can differ in firmware and internal hardware used so successful tests are drive specific and as such do not guarantee
42. 38 JOG SHUTTLE 3 6 1 MX control 5 61 MX control When playing a clip or playlist and when working in the clip editor in points can be lt 40 SET IN panel on page E age directly set using set In X 3 6 1 MX control When n laylist or multiple clips ar O TRE Sm on page en viewing a playlist or multiple clips are loaded for playback pressing prev clip O 5 moves the playhead to the previous clip e A dual function button Es 42 FRAME 1 3 6 1 MX control n play mode frame 1 moves playback of the current file forward one frame at a panel on page I EL LOAD CLIP 54 time If shift is pressed first clip manager is opened 5 61 MX control Plays the current file in reverse at 1x speed 43 REVERSE PLAY panel on page 5 6 1 MX control Starts recording on the assigned channel It is required to press a channel number on 44 RECORD on page I the top row and then press record to trigger recording on that channel 3 6 1 MX control Rewinds at 20x 45 REWIND panel on page gt lt 3 61 MX control The shift button must be pressed first to access any of the blue shift functions O A6 SHIFT panel on page an age O 54 5 et 5 61 MX contro There are ED lamps positioned above the buttons to indicate which are active O 47 LED INDICATORS panel on page a O C 2 o Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 55 of 304 MX front panel
43. 4 nftoop P 62 5 AES iN amp our 1 16 p 61 81 DVI HDMI ron GUI P 62 76 ANALOG LINE IN P 61 82 ESATA ports P 62 Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 59 of 304 MX Back panel cont 2 UN et 2 Q zur O 3G video inputs Each video input can accept up to 16 channels of SDI embedded dle Wage naga ERE EE EE TES M audio Can be paired and function as dual link input All 4 inputs can be combined as 4K UHD input i 3 7 MX Back panel 3G video outputs Can be paired and function as dual link output k Ue All 4 outputs can be combined as 4K UHD output 63 SUPER OUT 3 amp 4 E HD SD video outputs Can carry video super with machine status etc Sic AU GU BE 37 MX Back panel AUX video out is a secondary output of either channel 1 or channel 2 The signal 0 22 source selection can be defined on the prefs page of some systems For external reference Cinedecks will lock to either standard color burst black burst 65 REFERENCE IN 3 37 wx Back panel Or Tri level sync In Auto mode if no external reference is available the deck will amp 4 p 33 default to internal sync or video input In dual link when referencing to incoming video reference can be selected from the A or B input 66 Vipzo I O 1 3 7 MX Back panel Same layout as Video 3 amp 4 38 42 amp 2 API One port per HD SD channel Each port can be used for remote control between a 67
44. 4 rear Up to 4 Optional Up to 4 Optional Up to 4 Optional up to 3 E cb temet ta 10Gb Ethernet S or 8 16Gb Fiber N Optional Optional Optional Optional Q Channel WiFi support for 3rd party Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional devices In loop out per In loop out per In loop out per In loop out per channel pair and channel pair channel pair channel pair Master LTC In Master LTC In opt Master LTC In opt Master LTC In opt In loop out ecco ce Master LTC In opt IRIG Timecode Master Clock Optional Y Optional Optional Optional Jam Sync Cinedeck August 27 2015 14 28 Page 309 of 350 Basic specifications cont AK UHDTV 1 Playback only Optional Optional Optional Playback only optional optional HD 1080i 1080p 1080PsF M Y Y d Y 720p suoneoii edsg RESOLUTIONS SD PAL NTSC 480p Realtime Upconvert HD UHDTV 1 Optional Optional Optional 2K gt 4K Redundant File Record Segment Burn in for 1024x600 1024x600 1024x600 1024x600 1024x600 Resolution Operating Windows 7 Windows 7 Windows 7 Windows 7 Windows 7 System Embedded Embedded Embedded Embedded Embedded TCP IP Deck AMP API VDCP RS 422 per Y 2x DB 9 female Y 4x DB 9 female 4x DB 9 female 4x DB 9 female 2x DB 9 female channel Optional Optional Optional 3rd party USB Jog shuttle device support 3rd party VNC applications Cinedeck August 27 2015 14 28 Page 310 of 350
45. A 177 40 OU C cocoa 177 368 duration 2 0 0 a a 177 369 keypad 0 a a 177 370 df ndf ee 177 371 cancel enfer _ o 177 372 undo cancel saveandclose 178 S O HO uu 2 ss 22 S 2 2 2 2uata Q Umlaas m s E w S w k Q Q e Q Q Q Q Q CN 178 374 delete current lln 178 375 insert before a 178 376 insert afier oon dx Gens RORE EX RSG 179 377 append 2 22222 179 378 events list scroll 179 Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Table of Contents 19 of 304 379 OUL IC 179 380 in tc x ete he St eee ees ee Ye esu 179 381 edlevents lll 179 5 25 3 Sample EDL een 180 DES cansa a s dee ee wa s S a k k 2 x Z Q S S Q S oe PU P P5 A 503 Q 2 a N 180 5 26 Prefstab olo ll lll ll ls 181 382 page tabs 2929 39 54 54 5 Buh Boh xot e 182 m 383 recording 182 G 384 remote control lll lln 183 e 385 444 output ll 183 S 386 prefs ooo 184 5 387 ui mode a 184 388 application n 184 389 misc oo ow EGS PX Pw d s 185 390 licenses e oso BORA RORCE UR A 185 391 channel toggle 185 392 system oc oso seres across 186 39
46. August 27 2015 14 28 Page 331 of 350 C O Qu D O UN 2 z CU oO 5 D UN E Ul Codecs amp wrappers cont suoneoii edsg VC 5 meae raa mm fa ad VC 5 me see y ra CC fa al VC 5 I meae 1 4 1 vom fay al Pe _ jJ O jJ j PAL SD Uncompressed W M E j Fed W JEJ PAL SD PoRs M M E Proy JE Jr PAL SD PoRs M M M v j f SJES jJ PA SD PoRms E M E noma d Ja PAGD Prores M M M ro j BE j j 5 PAL SD Pos M M H M PA SD H264 M N N Pod E fg j j PAL SD H2 N N ia JEJE _ PALGD H264 M N N f ssor R PAL SD H200 N N px j SEJE 9 ee ES T RH A SHMM MI M AHHMA T PAGD H20 N N Fuso p oj jH Anamorphic mu 3m f s ow mio se E E EX FL e nae a w w uoo r wg Paso HE E NJ N m F NE Paso JH R NJ N gts E v aso JH M N N 21 M yj j Paso JH E N N oc E j j PALO nu BEN j su x Bg j Cinedeck August 27 2015 14 28 Page 332 of 350 C O Qu D O UN 2 z CU oO 5 D UN EM Z Zz Z ZIZ Z2 Z U gt lt Z Z ES n 2 Z Z Z Z2 2 2 2 Z IH zZ Codecs
47. F _ 10805994 PoRs M M M Proy JE J 1080i59 94 PrRs M M M v J _ SJES 108005994 PrRs M M M noma JE J 10805994 PrRs M M M teo SJES J 10805994 PoRs H M M 44 J 108005994 XDcamHD_ W N N exo E ER R 1080059944 XbamHD Y N N EX E y F 10805994 XDcamHD_ M N N 5o J FB R E j j 10805994 H264 pH N N iPod J H yg j j 108005994 H264 M N N j Ped M f J 10805994 H264 HW N N PX J J9gm j j 10805994 H264 M N N px ER 10805994 H264 HE N N prxoo J g 8 m _ 108005994 H264 M N N in p fW _ 1108005994 H264 M N N 3065 M H j 108005994 H264 E N N MainProxy 09m Wf u Ha A AO E A Z2 Z Z Z B Z O O Qu D O UN 2 z CU oO 5 D UN Z ms lt m EN E L NM ES zilziziziziziz 10805994 JAF M N N isis E j _ m9 05994 HF N N 2 H J 10805994 Fr M N N 21 J fW mmoses s Cy N N m Bg j l _ 10805994 avc M M N s J M R j j mooses Acci g H N vo H H Cinedeck August 27 2015 14 28 Page 314 of 350
48. FTP application such as Filezilla e Extract the contents of the zip file to a convenient location such as the desktop You should now have a folder named xpe full containing upwards of 6GB e Insert the Cinedeck restore USB e Navigate to home partimag and delete the folder xpe full on the USB If desired you can first copy the older files to a folder on your computer for safe keeping Copy the new xpe full folder you extracted earlier from the downloaded zip file to homeWpartimag folder on the USB MX and ZX use the same source files e Download the MXRestore zip to the local computer preferably using an FTP application such as Filezilla e Extract the contents of the zip file to a convenient location such as the desktop Delete the MXRestore folder at the root directory of the MX or ZX Restore USB stick If desired you can first copy the older files to a folder on your computer for safe keeping Copy the new MXRestore folder to the root directory of the MX or ZX Restore USB Once the files are copied you can safely eject the USB from the computer and if needed proceed to 9 17 Restore factory image on page 282 Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 283 of 304 9 qnoJ 79 e2lAJ8g C 5 o CU et D CU UN UJ D UN et O m D ES D lt 9 19 Create USB restore key The USB restore key is a Linux boot environment which contains several GB of Clonezil
49. From the Ease of access menu touch y D Press keyboard shortcuts one key at a time Sticky Keys Type without keyboard and select OK The keyboard will open o E FI press keys repeatedly ignore extra presses Filter Keys Touch to select the password field and then use OK Cancel Apply the keyboard to fill in the data Once you are at the Windows desktop O 5 l Uu O D D 5 A D lt O CU o iib This shortcut starts the on screen keyboard which is usable across the Windows environment As noted above for systems with touch screens the keyboard can also be accessed from the Windows log on screen to allow the entering of a password without a USB keyboard attached Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 83 of 304 5 5 2 Touchscreen setup 92e1193UT Jes iE The touchscreen shortcut opens the properties and adjustment application for calibrating the built in user interface touch display available on RX3G and MX systems See 9 2 Touchscreen calibration on page 248 5 5 3 HotSwap 12 58 PM a E RI e cp oe Wa Lorio including access to the SATA drive hot swap system The system Tray located on the Windows Task Bar includes several items sjieyap doyjs q SATA HotSwap allows easy disconnect and removal of SATA drives connected to the Cinedeck system from the Windows desktop Drives can also be ejected from within the
50. If multiple files or a playlist are loaded the display will change to reflect 438 FILE INFO single chanel the file being played vew RAD In and Out reflect the start timecode or in point and end timecode or out point MIA euueup Buis gt 3eq e d Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 214 of 304 7 3 Clip manager Clip manager provides access to clips for playback and file management The view is filtered left to right First select a drive at the left then select folders in the middle and then files can be viewed selected 441 Disk 442 443 444 cup 445 soRT LIST FOLDER FOLDER LIST CONTROLS 2 446 scRoLL P 216 P 216 P 216 p 216 scroll column COLUMNS P 216 440 PAGE TABS P 216 disk folder folder thumbnails list by name list by date R1 master s A ad SSD 226 DA 18 GB start 16 00 00 00 start 16 00 00 00 start 16 00 00 00 start 16 00 00 00 start 16 00 00 00 16 00 00 00 dur 00 00 33 01 dur 00 00 16 11 dur 00 00 14 21 dur 00 00 07 18 dur 00 00 04 14 00 00 06 29 x uL odds ha start 16 00 00 00 start 16 00 00 00 start 13 55 00 10 start 16 45 24 21 start 16 50 36 11 start Gur 00 00 06 11 dur 00 00 03 03 dur 00 01 18 11 dur 00 00 09 01 dur 00 00 09 16 457 LIST list view VIEW TOGGLE P 221 44 7 PLAY SELECTED play playallin find manage manage manage add to 456 BACK lected folder media disk folder clips select all lavli
51. JEJEJ _ 1080025 H264 M N N pied f VEN NEN 108025 H26006 N N PX 1080025 H264 E N N px Ld 1080025 H264 H N N j paxz0 H 1080025 H264 M N N miro BE Hi j Cinedeck August 27 2015 14 28 Page 319 of 350 Codecs amp wrappers cont suoneoii edsg Ciwopzs na y N n 39 C 3X e iosop2s 4264 W N N venero H KE LL Gews wx fe K we T L TL T Tn Piosopas Aci L3 E N so K 3 K aca rl s is r H T ors alilia at rl meses y ao pem LE P fe pesa rr rpm et el mes es ra pm E P Piro pesa rr aem a rl Ges es y ac m P el iop2s spec 2000 X E wem c ri mo emen WOW az me L pal 55 owe Jara ss pos P gr te fat 5s owe atx s os oa a faf 55 owe E d noo A ms ww sls lal T nl gun Cinedeck August 27 2015 14 28 Page 320 of 350 C O Qu D O UN 2 z CU oO 5 D UN Codecs amp wrappers cont suoneoii edsg F ome gr gg mel o og P 5s rors E wg v og s ome Jr gr gel a Es ome E ww e af Esa M0 AC CO ICO ICO IO O EC E o omo Room ow one n o 15 Bs mmo T ow sx a a fafaj m meo aos a a fa E XX SE VN NEN SEND UNE ms ome
52. MX control panel cont A dual function button In normal mode pressing ch 1 assigns that channel to the control panel Once assigned recording can be triggered and all transport controls are active for this 3 6 1 MX control channel l 54 If shift is pressed before pressing ch 1 2 UN et 2 Q zur O 48 cH 1 ON AIR R on air mode can be toggled on and off When on air is active no changes to channel settings are possible except headphone monitoring selections Any other screen or control panel actions will trigger an on air warning message A dual function button In normal mode pressing ch 2 assigns that channel to the control panel Once Z assigned recording can be triggered and all transport controls are active for this gt 49 2 I 3 6 1 MX control channel ED panel on pag SF l ah 2 Lig Sa If shift is pressed before pressing ch 2 the touchscreen interface can be locked or S unlocked If locked touching the screen will trigger an on screen locked warning Sx Lock mode is primarily for use with the MX control panel which allows switching E channels while in lock mode D 5 61 MX contro Pressing ch 3 assigns that channel to the control panel Once assigned recording 5 cH 3 panel on page f 54 can be triggered and all transport controls are active for this channel 5 61 MX control Pressing ch 4 assigns that channel to the control panel Once assigned
53. Manufacturer Standard disk drives p ro pe rt es Location U Device status This device is working proper m Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 260 of 304 Disk caching settings cont For the cache settings click the Policies tab at the top of the dialog For Samsung drives assure Enable write caching on the device is checked For OCZ drives assure Enable write caching on the device is NOT checked 9 qnoJ 79 e2lAJ8g Select OK to confirm your settings and close the dialog SAMSUNG CACHE SETTINGS OCZ CACHE SETTINGS samsung 55D 840 PRO Seri Properties I X OCZ YERTEX3 Properties j E x Improves system performance bu eabling write caching on the device but a power autacessr equipment Failure might result in data Improves system performance bu exabling write caching on the device but a power outages equipment Failure might result in data loss or carpi Y UN C CU O 3 LO Ln D ect O L Tum off Windows write cache buffer flushing on the device uror Windows witecache Bulter flushing on the device To prevent data loss do not select this check box unless the device has a separate power supply that allows the device to Hush its buffer in case of power Failure More information about write caching settings aaah BREI LD V E data lass do natselectths eheck bose unless the E lI d zl a
54. O D qe SjaJg Prefs tab cont The miscellaneous section contains several interface functions Note BIBIBgB indicates an active item UN D mj 2 et D Ty h CU O D Press mouse to toggle mouse cursor visibility on and off This can also be done using the Ctrl Enter keyboard shortcut To place the Cinedeck UI into a Windows frame which can be moved and minimized use window Window mode can also be toggeled using Alt Enter By default use onscreen keyboard is on This setting forces visibility of the on screen keyboard when an appropriate data 5 26 Prefs tab on entry field has the focus A connected USB keyboard can be used page 181 simultaneously with the on screen keyboard however if use onscreen keyboard is off data can only be typed directly into the data fields via a USB keyboard 389 MISC qe SjaJg To maintain the best cross system compatibility using spaces in file and folder names is not recommended as some computer systems do not work well with them When on this setting will replace any space entered with an underscore character so if you require the use of spaces turn this setting off e Press show keyboard shortcuts to bring up an overlay screen with a full list of available shortcuts This overlay can also be accessed from anywhere in the Cinedeck user interface by pressing Ctrl K 5 26 Prefs tab on Additional licenses will be
55. Prefs tab on 386 PREFS page 181 Cinedecks maintain a sql database of all content known to the system See 449 find media on page 217 If you are starting a new session or regularly move or delete content it can be useful to clear the database Content can be reentered into the database by scanning folders or discs from clip manager Cinedecks are multi mode systems making UI mode probably the most important selection on the prefs page as it completely changes the capabilities and operation I of the deck The modes available can differ depending on the hardware and software 387 UI MODE RER tab on installed For example the two channel RX and ZX20 do not have 4K or UHD YUV page 181 f recording however all systems have two or four channel YUV which is the standard mode for multi channel SD HD recording and playback See 5 26 1 UI mode on page 187 for more information The application section allows access to the MS Windows environment by exiting the Cinedeck user interface 5 26 Prefs tab on snnlicatic I S page 181 For extended production sessions for example a reality program which is recording 24 7 it is recommended to occasionally restart the Cinedeck interface Once a day is generally appropriate To quickly do so use restart application 388 APPLICATION Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 184 of 304 UN D m 2 et D Ty h o
56. RS 422 cable to the deck while placing the adapter between the standard cable and the deck will change the connection to master mode J ae I N N O O D Uu e ion 1 O C et Uu RS 422 MALE TO MALE RS 422 MALE TO FEMALE SOLDER CRIMP SIDE SOLDER CRIMP SIDE CROSSOVER CABLE PIN CONNECTIONS CROSSOVER CABLE PIN CONNECTIONS Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 238 of 304 8 4 Avid Digital Cut Much like a tape machine your Cinedeck can be utilized as a Digital Cut destination with Avid Media Composer Nitrus systems There are two methods creating a new file during the Digital Cut and inserting video and audio into a pre striped Black file ProRes DNXHD and AVC Intra files wrapped as MOV MXF Op1A and MXF OpAtom can be created and inserted into Inserting into a blacked file is the recommended procedure for doing a full Digital Cut and is also the same procedure used when performing insert changes to pre recorded files O J3u02 1ouu u For example if you have timeline content which starts at 00 59 30 00 and ends at 01 30 30 00 your blacked file should start at 00 59 24 00 and end at 01 30 35 00 See 5 12 Create Black File on page 109 Once you have an appropriately formatted target file set your Cinedeck system as shown below IND Je11biq piny 8 4 1 General Settings These settings are required for creating new files or using insert to make changes or r
57. Shortcuts eee ll 129 237 on screen keyboard eee eee ne 129 238 cancel Dutton 0 aaa a 129 239 save amp close butftfon 0 000000 ee ln 129 E ET 130 240 current project 0 0 aoaaa aaa a a 131 241 template 131 242 expansion 131 243 wildcard shortcuts o 131 244 on screen keyboard 0 131 245 cancel button 00 a a 131 246 save amp close button 0 0000 eee ees 131 Spee Pe eee he ee eee ee eee ee eaeeease 132 247 title 2 o ee 133 248 expansion 133 249 variable lle 133 250 on screen keyboard 0 0000 cee eee 133 251 cancel Dutton 0 aaa a a 133 Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Table of Contents 14 of 304 ar o D O C O ct D 2 ct UN 252 save amp close button aaa aa a a a a a a 133 5 19 6 Scenes liSt 0 lo lll ee 134 253 pagetabs a ll 135 254 current project display o 135 255 scenes list 22222222 llle 135 256 manage scenes button 000004 135 257 scene Metladata a 135 m 258 channel assignments 0 000 eee eee ene 136 G 259 cancel button s 136 e 260 save amp close button 2 lll ln 136 S 261 scen
58. UHDTV 1 VC 5 59 94 Cineform OW Ce eem E mem o J fef 59 94 Cineform Ceu eem E E 5 fay faf 59 94 Cineform g ss ca E W ea ff 59 94 Cineform sas eme E SI j 59 94 Cineform UHDTV 1 VC 5 E 59 94 Cineform eying O o S Jj j J j j ELENA BE A EE a 72 0P50 BND M N N us E R 7207050 DNxHD E M N 5 H E T 72 050 Prores M M E Poy Mj 700550 Pos M H M tr JEJ 72050 PoRs E M E j noma J 9M J J 70050 Pos M H H vo HI I _ Cinedeck August 27 2015 14 28 Page 328 of 350 C O Qu D O UN 2 z CU oO 5 D UN Ul Codecs amp wrappers cont suoneoii edsg 72 050 PoRs M M M 44 JSE 7 050 xXDcamHD E N N E H H H 720P50_ XDcamHD M N N s E R j 720P50 H264 MW N N j io JEJEJ 720950 H264 M N N Ped BE W j 720P50 H24 HE N N rx Jg jH _ 720pso H264 M N N px R W j 720P50 H264 M N N f paxz0 j Ng j _ 7z 950 H264 M N N Fun MM _ 720P50 H264 M NJ N o jJ HEH HBH 720950 H264 M N N JjManPoy Jm R 72050 s E NJ N j m M j J 72050 JH M N
59. USB flash drive script back to deploy mode 6 Go to the syslinux folder on the USB and rename the syslinux cfg file to syslinux save cfg 7 Rename syslinux deploy cfg to syslinux cfg You now have a custom restore image of the Cinedeck system Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 288 of 304 10 0 FAQ amp Features 10 1 FAQ gt Features Questions are often asked about what certain functions are or do so included as part of the FAQ is an index and description of each feature available on Cinedeck systems 10 2 Whatis a codec 253 10 3 What is a wrapper 254 10 4 Whatis bitrate quality 254 10 5 4K amp RAW 254 10 6 AES Audio 255 10 7 Analog Audio 255 10 8 Analysis Tools 255 10 9 Audio Delay 256 10 10 Audio Mapping 256 10 11 AS 02 AS 11 DPP 256 10 12 BNCs 256 10 13 Channel Overview 256 10 14 Character Overlay 256 10 15 Closed Captioning 257 10 16 Codecs Supported 257 10 17 Color Depth 257 10 18 Color Sampling 257 10 19 Cross Conversion 257 10 2 What is a codec 10 20 Edit While Record 10 21 EDL Auto record 10 22 Embedded Audio 10 23 External Reference 10 24 File Naming 10 25 Formats 10 26 Gang Mode 10 27 GPS 10 28 GrowingFiles 10 29 H 264 10 30 I Frame amp GoP 10 31 Insert Editing 10 32 Interplay Check in 10 33 IRIG Timecode 10 34 IT amp Connectivity 10 35 Jam Sync 10
60. Windows may pop up a warnin y pop P g I Mame twareYRX3GCinedecksetupR x3 4 30 11211 exe message stating that The LE ur eo ani k Publisher Unknown Publisher publisher could not be verified p n Type Application eon Tiru cri SSH From Z cinedeckSofFEwareYR A 21 inedeckSekupR s3G 4 9 qnoJ 79 31AJ9S This file does not have a valid digital signature that verfez its publisher ou should only run software from publishers vou trust How can decide what software ta run lI F 3 Please wait while Setup is loading n verifying installer 81 O D O D O 2 C iS O CU et D gt Uu et Q Gr O gt CinedeckRX3G Setup j xj License Agreement 1 1 You mu St ag ree to the te rms Please review the license terms before installing CinedeckR 3G Fy and conditions to continue the insta latio n Press Page Down En see Ehe rest of the agreement Select I agree to continue and End User License Agreement for the Cinedeck EXTREME software FE follow the prompts IMPORTANT prou SHOULD CAREFULLY READ THE FOLLOWING TERMS AND CONDITIONS BEFORE DOWNLOADING INSTALLING AND USING THE ICIMEDECK EXTREME SOFTWARE PROVIDED BY CIMEDECK LLE ithe Licensar hl IF vou accept Ehe terms of Ehe agreement click I Agree to continue You must accept Ehe agreement to install CinedeckRx36a p asss corea 4 Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Vers
61. XML P 153 encoder enable encoder name record mode 296 ENCODER enabled SEU ef copy to other save and 302 SAVE AND ENABLE P 152 channels cose CLOSE P 153 297 UsE MXF CLIP FOLDERS P 152 SETTING ONLY FOR MXF OPATOM 301 copy To OTHER CHANNELS p 153 300 RECORD MODE P 152 299 USE RECORD TC OFFSET P 152 298 ENCODER NAME P 152 Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 146 of 304 Master tab cont ASTE Sa aan 5 21 Master tab The page selector tabs are always visible in the main setup area These can be clicked p143 to provide direct access to each setup section A great Cinedeck feature is native codec recording and workflow flexibility but selecting the right codec for the workflow is critical There are no defaults and every codec has its advantages and disadvantages If you do not know what edit system will be used or which codec is required a fairly safe bet will be ProRes or DNxHD but really you need to stop and consult with whomever will be editing the files UN D 2 et D h CU O D To select a codec simply touch the one you need If the required codec does not appear to be in the list there may be more that will be visible if you use the arrows or 282 CODEC 521 Master tab your mouse scroll wheel to move through the list p 145 Additionally it is impor
62. a standard USB keyboard with the following exceptions 244 ON SCREEN 5 194 File name The del key functions as backspace deleting characters to the left of the cursor KEYBOARD editor p 130 The clear key deletes all text in the current field The shift key functions as a shift lock toggle On is all caps Off is all lower case Depending on the preference set on the prefs setup page space bar will place a underscore character in place of a space 5 194 File name ncel any chan nd return he previ reen 245 CANCEL BUTTON Ca Cel a y C a ges a d etu tot e p evious SC 246 SAVE amp CLOSE 5 194Filename Pressing save and close confirms any changes closes the project setup screens and BUTTON editor p 130 returns to the main setup area x x S D Q et 3 D gt QD O D 5 JO3Ipe euueu 3J IJ Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 131 of 304 5 19 5 Edit user amp global wildcards The Cinedeck system has many wildcards which can insert real time data into your folder and file names User wildcards answer the need for project specific data which is repeatedly required while the similar global wildcards contain data which would be used across many projects Any text can be added to a these wildcards such as a show ID program number directors name facility or department name or ID etc You can select wildcards with shortcut buttons at the top of the path and file nam
63. amp wrappers cont suoneoii edsg Paso Ix Mo j S s J WR R j Pato wx E o HR j dg J HN _ Paso mx Mp j j so gp R JE j mo fete la s Pi L meless r 4 wm fal a mes efoto om Pi L meless riam fal al mo ou r s L il Pr meme r CO oom fal a OOOO i E I I E E eo ese E me 5 Y l al Eme gg gms daf P Eoo me Row a v 5o o og 5 Moo rors a a gae o E Mr me Y wg vo 5 af Eme gg gg ee 5 o ig P a aw m aja j Cinedeck August 27 2015 14 28 Page 333 of 350 C O Qu D O UN 2 z CU oO 5 D UN Codecs amp wrappers cont suoneoii edsg PAL SD ua i fet gt PAL SD PAL SD ue ua fox eji f PAL SD H 264 N N DAX 2800 25P PAL SD ua fet oj mh PAL SD Anamorphic PAL SD H 264 N N Full SD 3500 25P PAL SD Anamorphic PAL SD VC 5 Low 25P Cineform PAL SD VC 5 i PAL SD VC 5 i PAL SD VC 5 i PAL SD VC 5 i PAL SD VC 5 Keyin 25P Cineform di NTSC SD nap weoma rg rj fe L af faf Cinedeck August 27 2015 14 28 Page 334 of 350 C O Qu D O UN 2 z CU oO 5 D UN Codecs amp wrappers cont suoneoii edsg NTSC SD soap me mr mm fef NTSC SD sop me mmm af J NTSC SD soup me mm om Noms faf NTSC SD so
64. an uole e1su extremely costly production Make a backup recording Even if it s just to the In camera recording card If a shoot is important always have a backup plan For the reasons outlined above and below in this manual SSDs are the only supported warranted recording media and currently Cinedeck only recommend recording internally to the Samsung SSDs listed below The Cinedeck development team can absolutely confirm that not all SSDs are created equal and SSD specifications as advertised by manufacturers can be extremely misleading Real time video recording especially multi stream writing is unlike any other use case and in general most SSD drives are not optimized for best performance in this very specific case Also some drives have appalling failure rates For instance Cinedeck had drives provided from a manufacturer for testing which had a 10096 failure rate within 6 months This does not mean they all necessarily completely stopped working but they could no longer reliably record video D D O O e O o D UN m D a O UN In our very extensive experience as of this writing the only thoroughly reliable SSDs are the Samsung drives noted They are competitively priced and have a very low failure rate even compared to so called enterprise level SSDs which tend to cost 3 10 times as much per GB Some customers have used other drives with success but Cinedeck will not warrant or support issues ari
65. are significant advantages in terms of storage flexibility and the capability to be integrated into larger system environments For a complete overview of the many features available in your Cinedeck please refer to 10 0 FAQ amp Features on page 289 Cinedeck hope your experience with our decks is positive and appreciate any comments you may have so please feel free to contact us See Contacting Cinedeck on page 2 Page 36 of 304 xog y ui S JEUM SsoJnjeoJ 9JeMpJeH 3 0 Installation 3 1 Important E gt n et Q O Sto rage Cinedecks are primarily SOLID STATE recorders recording should always be to Solid State Drives SSDs mounted in the internal removable drive bays Currently Cinedeck support the Samsung 840pro 850pro and EVO SSD drives USB and eSATA are available for media offload but due to the vast number of variables involved in different mechanical hard drives and external enclosures Cinedeck do not recommend recording to these external drives Network connectivity may be used for recording but performance will vary depending on network topology network storage device performance network and server traffic etc It is critical that an IT professional be involved in the configuration and support of any network infrastructure yUeWodwy Performance claims are based upon recording to internal SSD media It is very strongly recommended that any workflow be thoroughly tested before us
66. arrows which appear to the right of the selected fields The keypad at the right can be used to directly enter time data into the selected fields The duration automatically updates to display the duration of the selected or edited event The duration can also be edited Editing duration changes the out TC to make the event match the duration The keypad can be used to enter data into any selected hour minute second or frame time field The highlight automatically moves to the next pair of numbers to the right as you enter each pair The timecode format of the EDL can be toggled between DF drop frame and NDF non drop frame by selecting DF or NDF The keypad cancel button is a local undo for events loaded in the event editor Pressing cancel will revert the loaded event to its original event list data The keypad enter button overwrites the selected event in the events list with the data in the event editor Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 177 of 304 92e1193UT Jes C Ro gt ct O CU ct O ct CU O JOUP3 133 TC amp Automation tab EDL editor cont 93 1934 Jes 3 2 UNDO CANCEL 5 25 2 EDL editor SAVE AND CLOSE on page 176 Undo has a multi level memory to remove changes and additions to EDLs one at a time To undo all changes to the loaded EDL and close it without saving it use cancel Use save and close to save th
67. break break break break break save chi settings CLICK TO APPLY to all SETTINGS TO ALL CHANNELS CLICK TO ADJUST BREAK FREQUENCY Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 195 of 304 6 0 Recording With setup complete you can begin recording by pressing record at the upper right of the appropriate channel If gang mode is active you can press record on any of the ganged channels to start recording on all ganged channels Buipio5z5 uq The RX3G below is redundant recording master and proxy on two channels The red border indicates recording is in progress and note that the red border will flash when a channel is in pre roll before a record Red border flashing pre roll mode is seen when staggered gang is in use and when using auto record modes such as editing Available controls and screen information is generally the same while recording as in standby so for controls and screen information not detailed here see 5 8 Multi view screen on page 88 and 5 9 Single channel view on page 93 In standard SD HD mode there is one quadrant for each channel so depending on your Cinedeck model there will be two or four quadrants like these Surrounding each channel video preview are multiple data areas for immediate access to B 16 00 06 26 BERE SW 16 00 06 26 775 the most important information and buttons for accessing the most important functions EN O gt 2 G D
68. c Lomputer System properties EU x hiai T eA J z Computer Uninstall or change a program Map r a Hard Disk Drives 4 Local Disk C Em 2 66 GB Free of 27 3 GB SSD 226 D 18 0 GB free of 119 GB Buy 10114 new Er 109 GB free of 238 GB Expand Open AuaPlav Open in new window Share with k Restore previous versions Include in library Memo Format Vi Copy Rename Pew h Page 264 of 304 Error Checking cont lt SSD 225 D Properties E x ReadyBoost Previous Versions Quota Customize General _ Tools Hardware Sharing Security Errar checking 3 Select the Tools tab from the Properties dialog This option will check the drive For errors n D O D go O a o D 4 Select Check Now to open the Check Disk dialog r Defragmentation 5 Whether automatically or manually started at the Check Disk dialog assure Automatically fix file system errors is checked and Check Disk 55D 226 D X Check disk options Ey This option will defragment files on the drive Defragment now Backup 4 This option will back up files on the drive Back up now w Automatically Fix File system errors Scan For and attempt recovery of bad sectors assure Scan for and attempt recovery of bad sectors is not checked This set
69. displays can be switched between Y luminance R Red G Green B Blue and full RGB parade modes All of the scopes can be viewed as full screen or 1 4 screen overlay See 5 16 Video Analysis Tools on page 113 10096 toggles the on screen video preview between full image and zoom mode 5 9 Single channel Normally the entire image from the source is displayed however at just 1024 wide the view p 93 Cinedeck on board display is not a native HD panel Zoom mode provides 4x image magnification which allows more accurate visual analysis of image detail focus etc 151 ANALYSIS 152 100 Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 95 of 304 Single channel view cont Full screen toggles between single channel view with controls around the perimeter 5 9 Single channel to a view which allows the preview video to take the entire display The on screen 153 FULL SCREEN 93 1934 Jes view p33 controls switch to a momentary mode and fade out after a few seconds Touching the screen brings the controls into view again eae ees 5 9 Single channel Setup takes you to the initial channel overview page and all setup screens See 5 17 view p33 Setup tabs explained on page 114 Pressing stop ends a current recording Note that by default stopping a recording 155 sroP m s aa US requires a long press of about 3 seconds which helps prevent accidental stops If ga
70. eL REF Analog 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs Color Black or 1 No loop out 1 per channel pair 1 per channel pair 1 per channel pair 1 No loop out Tri Level Sync No loop out No loop out No loop out Waveform AAA Y Histogram J Y Focus assist dipping _ v v v Y T v _ Audio meters v v C v T v J Y CPU Intel I7 Server Class 2x Upgraded Server Server Class 2x Server Class 2x Class 2X Motherboard Mini ITX Video VO Bluefish Bluefish Bluefish Bluefish Bluefish Supernova 1x Supernova 2x Supernova 2x Supernova 2x Supernova 1x RM 8 fo 3960 leo 16 A416 O Cinedeck August 27 2015 14 28 Page 308 of 350 UJ CU zx O L G D Q p O CU Gr O 7 lt lt lt b lt lt z T lt lt E T ANALYSIS REFERENCE N O O l lt lt lt lt lt lt e lt S HARDWARE G U E Basic specifications cont Ln c D O gt Maximum Hot Q swappable SSDs ct Network 2 Recording u 9 support HBAsuppot N v v v v E eSATA drives USB Drives Bem card da dem Builtin readers SxS Optionally built in Optionally built in Optionally built in o support SxS 2x P2 2x CF 2x or via external or via external or via external 7 P2 CF I device device device 2 UN VGA G D OVE a gt HDMI Q Display port 1 2 S TE USB 3 2 rear 1 front 7 eSATA 1 active optionally
71. for the user TANEN screen pes Interface video display and the SDI out Setup opens a setup screen for customizing the character output See 5 14 Character Out Customization on page 111 125 SDI CHAR 5 8 Multi view Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 90 of 304 Multi view screen cont UI overlays amp LUT accesses on off toggle and setup buttons for selecting an on screen color LUT LUT files can be loaded from any connected drive When active this preview LUT has no effect on recorded video This control also accesses on off screen pgs toggle buttons for on screen overlays aspect ratio borders aspect ratio letterbox shading safe area borders grid crosshairs Setup for these on screen overlays can be accessed from single channel view See 111 Single view toggle on page 89 and 5 15 Overlay Customization on page 112 PEN EST 5 8 Multiview Setup takes you to the initial channel overview page and all setup screens See 5 17 screen p 88 Setup tabs explained on page 114 o Pressing stop ends a current recording Note that by default stopping a recording 128 STOP BUTTON a 2 88 requires a long press of about 3 seconds which helps prevent accidental stops If gang is in use all selected channels will stop When touched or clicked the encode overview region shows one of three screens The default view displays current input codec and file name set
72. i Filmscan 1 Page 344 of 350 Data rates cont UHDTV 1 VES UHDTV 1 VC 5 Cineform Cineform 25 29 97 Filmscan 2 UHDTV 1 VC 5 pow 25 Cineform UHDTV 1 50 Ee UHDTV 1 UHDTV 1 ProRes LT 29 97 ProRes Proxy ProRes Proxy UHDTV 1 29 97 ProRes Normal E ProRes HQ 29 97 UHDTV 1 VC 5 UHDTV 1 ProRes 4444 1320 50 Cineform Low 2997 VC 5 UHDTV 1 VC 5 sd E Cineform 29 97 Cineform Low Medium UHDTV 1 K UHDTV 1 beu 29 97 Cineform lt n Cineform Medium High UHDTV 1 So UHDTV 1 bon A Cineform n Cineform 29 97 50 Filmscan 1 Filmscan 2 680 76 9 Q ProRes 4444 2200 UHDTV 1 ProRes Normal P ProRes LT 408 23 97 UHDTV 1 50 ProRes HQ 1472 640 UHDTV 1 UHDTV 1 UHDTV 1 59 94 ProRes Normal 1176 UHDTV 1 59 94 ProRes HQ 1760 UHDTV 1 59 94 ProRes 4444 2640 UHDTV 1 VC 5 59 94 Cineform Low UHDTV 1 59 94 UHDTV 1 59 94 UHDTV 1 59 94 UHDTV 1 59 94 UHDTV 1 59 94 VC 5 Cineform Medium VC 5 Cineform High VC 5 Cineform Filmscan 1 VC 5 Cineform Filmscan 2 VC 5 Cineform UN D O Em O o cr O ES T So 8J eje VC 5 Cineform Filmscan 2 VC 5 Uncompressed ale Cineform onis Fixed 50 Keying 720P 50 DNxHD 115 oM ee 720P 50 DNxHD 175 Cinedeck August 27 2015 14 28 Page 345 of 350 UHDTV 1 29 97 UHDTV 1 ME UHDTV 1 Dic Cineform 616 Cineform 29 97 l 50 l High Films
73. incrementing take number which when no identically named content is in the destination folder will start at 001 An alternative user defined starting number can be specified here Jobeueuu pelold 5 19 2 Path amp file 217 START TAKE name templates 3124 Click the up down arrows to increment or directly enter a number with the keypad Press save and close at the lower right of the screen to confirm and close the keypad Cinedeck file names can leverage an auto incrementing roll number which when no 9 19 2 Path amp file identically named content is in the destination folder will start at 001 An alternative 218 START ROLL name templates l I n p 124 user defined starting roll number can be specified here using the same procedure as for start take See 217 start take on page 125 UU CU ct 2 go D J CU j D c D pel CU c D WY Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 125 of 304 Project manager Path amp file name templates cont The channel assignment display shows which channels are associated to the currently selected project 93 1934 Jes 219 CHANNEL 5 19 2 Path amp file name templates ASSIGNMENTS p 124 BIB indicates the channel is associated to the selected project Bim channels are assigned to other projects 9 19 2 Path file Cancel any changes and return to the previous screen 220 CANCEL BUTTON na
74. interface to access clip manager In clip manager select the drive to be ejected and select from the manage disk menu For additional details see 7 3 Clip manager on page 215 To eject drives from the Windows desktop Click the HotSwap icon in the System Tray and select the drive you want to eject After a few moments a message will appear indicating Safe to Hotswap which means the drive can be removed For additional details see 5 5 3 HotSwap on page 84 IT gt UN D gt ey gt O Qo be D O my O o E lt D UN The lock assembly consists of a twist or key lock and a drive ejector button A twist lock is shown right and a key lock is shown below Your system may have either To remove a drive e f your system has twist locks press the knob in gently turn to the left until the knob clicks into the vertical position and release the knob TWIST OR KEY LOCK DRIVE CARRIER e O DRIVE EJECTOR gramme Y I H D a Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 69 of 304 Inserting amp ejecting drives cont If your system has key locks insert the key with the small pin locater pointing to the right press the key in and gently turn to the left until the key is vertical e Gently press the drive ejector until a click is heard Release the drive ejector allowing it to extend out fully
75. links below in the captions all connect to the single channel record view chapter here 6 2 Recording single channel view on page 200 And for the full single channel view description see 5 9 Single channel view on page 93 UN D mj 2 et D i h CU O D TCP mode file TC src 1 U 1 1 a 5 1 1 recorda mode 405 MULTI VIEW ack m 2 Start End normal TOGGLE P 201 opouu AHN Av 412 FRAME BUFFER INDICATOR P 203 413 ENCODE OvERVIEW P 203 Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 189 of 304 4K UHD mode cont When in playback mode the 4K and single channel views only have one difference Because there is only one channel there is no multi view toggle For full details of single channel playback view see For all of the common features available in single channel view see UN D 2 et D h CU O D 426 MULTI VIEW TOGGLE P 212 90 01 40 03 00 00 36 07 opouu AHN Av char out P not PSF overlays analysis 100 full screen A cc c NN NN m s E KER gt be M sm H ve o W Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 190 of 304 4K UHD mode cont UN D mj 2 et D Ty h CU O D opouu AHN Av Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 191 of 304 5 28 DP
76. master encode page of the user interface timecode fed to the master timecode input is directed to all 4 channels Jam Sync Similar to a camera a timecode source can be momentarily connected to this LTC input and MX will sync the internal generator to that 100 MASTER la timecode 2 UN et 2 Q zur O TIMECODE IN amp OUT Timecode Out MX can generate and send timecode to other connected devices such as cameras eliminating the need to have a separate timecode generator for example in a fly pack type of configuration IRIG B Timecode support Allows MX to receive a IRIG B timecode source from an external IRIG B timecode generator not included and use that timecode data internally as a replacement for standard SMPTE timecode Dual multi voltage AC to DC power supplies Either power supply can be used to operate the deck as they are auto switching It is recommended to always have power supplied to both inputs from separate power sources 102 Power SUPPLY 397x Back panel If the deck is powered up with just one power supply connected or if a power supply ALARM IGNORE 49 92 fails a high pitch alarm will sound Pressing the button will quiet the alarm 103 AES in amp our panel 8 AES channels per channel pair Each BNC connection carries two AES channels 1 16 19 82 104 USB2 ports Standard USB 2 ports 6 6 joued Jpeg XZ 101 REDUNDANT 3 9 ZX Back panel POWER HESS R R
77. me me rre o 25 UHDTV 1 VC 5 how 25 Cineform UHDTV 1 VC 5 leche 255 Cineform UHDTV 1 VC 5 High 25 Cineform g UHDTV 1 VC 5 ST 255 Cineform UHDTV 1 VC 5 Eilnsenmo 25 Cineform UHDTV 1 VC 5 ea 25e Cineform ying UHDTV 1 or me rur ror Jf UHDTV 1 ap me rum rm f af UHDTV 1 or me ru mro Jf UHDTV 1 ap me riri ree Jaf UHDTV 1 VC 5 bow 29 97 Cineform UHDTV 1 VC 5 acho 29 97 Cineform UHDTV 1 VC 5 High 29 97 Cineform g Cinedeck August 27 2015 14 28 Page 326 of 350 C O Qu D O UN 2 z CU oO 5 D UN Codecs amp wrappers cont suoneoii edsg UHDTV 1 VC 5 s 29 97 Cineform UHDTV 1 VC 5 Filmscan 2 29 97 Cineform UHDTV 1 VC 5 ae 97 Cineform ying UHDTV m Up me O n aey UHDTV 1 op me CO CO faf Je j r ProRes Normal 50 UHDTV 1 op me O r fef j Je j j t ProRes 4444 50 UHDTV 1 VC 5 Doo 50 Cineform UHDTV 1 VC 5 Vachon 507 Cineform UHDTV 1 VC 5 High 50 Cineform g UHDTV 1 VC 5 a Ree 50 Cineform UHDTV 1 VC 5 Filmscan 2 50 Cineform UHDTV 1 VC 5 Kevin 507 Cineform ying C O Qu D O UN 2 z CU oO 5 D UN Cinedeck August 27 2015 14 28 Page 327 of 350 Codecs amp wrappers cont suoneoii edsg oor me AT ou Misses me a e wei o rose me fafaj eo Moor rors ata wm fay
78. on page 2 The channel toggle next ch prev is available on all main setup pages Clicking the 359 CHANNEL DA emm n _ right or left arrow allows easy switching to the next or previous channel The input TOGGLE p 168 master and proxy tab names reflect the change displaying the names associated to the selected channel Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 173 of 304 93 1934 Jes C Ro gt ct O CU ct O ct CU O TC amp Automation tab cont 93 1934 Jes Timecode offsets provide frame based fine tuning for each timecode source to compensate for video delay and other latency issues between systems The timecode offsets column shows any active offsets for the 525 TCA current channel 360 TC OFFSETS Automation tab p 168 l f To adjust the offsets click edit offsets For details see 5 25 1 TC offsets on page 175 C Ro gt ct O CU ct O ct CU O Drop frame or non drop frame can be selected for any internally generated timecode H Non drop frame is indicated with all colons 525 C amp 361 DF NDF Automation tab 02 21 13 05 p 168 Hu Drop frame is indicated with a semi colon between the seconds and frames 2 29 E se Save and close saves all changes and returns to the TC amp automation page 362 SAVE AND CLOSE Automation tab p 168 Cinedeck U
79. player to view the edited playlist 473 CLIP POSITION 74 1 Playlist editor This timecode display shows the playlist timecode where the clip starts TIMECODE Hea The clip thumbnail displays the frame of the clip The clip timecode display indicates the current start and end timecode and duration 74 1 Playlist editor Of the clip as determined by the in and out points set for the clip The timecode shown can be actual clip timecode or playlist position timecode based on the timecode display selection See 484 timecode display on page 228 477 CUP THUMBNAIL 7 4 1 Playlist editor When many clips are included in a playlist the left and right thumbnail scroll buttons SCROLL p 223 provide access to additional clips which come before or after the visible clips 74 1 Playlist editor The start timecode end timecode and duration of the loaded playlist are displayed TIMECODE egKe d 476 CLIP TIMECODE RU C lt cr S 5 O O D s 1O1Ip 1s e d Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 226 of 304 Playlist manager Playlist editor cont Use manage assets to perform tasks such as deleting a clip from the loaded playlist Destructive functions will be grayed out and unavailable if disable file delete and disk erase is enabled on the prefs page See 386 prefs on page 184 egKe d Choose delete all to remove all clips from the loaded playlist
80. provides an easy way to adjust or reset the incoming timecode but unlike generating new timecode the recorded timecode remains based on the source timecode keeping all of the breaks and changes For example your 299 USE RECORD TC 521 Master tap source may be arriving with timecode starting at 0 00 but because it is the fourth OFFSET p 145 in a set you want it to start at hour 4 With this setting you can apply a 4 hour offset Another example might be a source which was recorded with time of day in a different timezone and you want the timecode to reflect GMT or your local time zone Record timecode offset can be set independently for master and proxy encodes 300 RECORD Mope 52LMastertab The record mode toggle switches between the various recording modes po See 5 11 Record Modes on page 99 Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 152 of 304 Master tab cont UN D mj 2 et D Ty h CU O D 301 COPY TO OTHER 521 Master tab CHANNELS p145 copy to other channels opens this sub menu which allows copying channel independent settings such as audio channels amp routing from the selected channel to one or more other channels In the above image the highlighted channel settings will be copied to channels 2 3 and 4 If for example you also wanted to copy drive destinations from channel 1 you would press disk assignments to include qe Jo1s
81. required to activate some newly added features Click here 390 LICENSES S U EE to manage your system licenses The channel toggle next ch prev is available on all main setup pages Clicking the 391 CHANNEL 5 26 Prefs tab on right or left arrow allows easy switching to the next or previous channel The input TOGGLE poo master and proxy tab names reflect the change displaying the names associated to the selected channel Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 185 of 304 Prefs tab cont It is recommended to properly close the Cinedeck application before restarting or shutting down your system Pressing restart or shut down provides easy access to closing the Cinedeck application before automatically restarting or shutting down If your system is busy recording or playing most settings on the prefs page will not be available Stop all activity on all channels to restart or shut down First generation MX systems utilize a different drive connection scheme which will result in connected SSDs to be improperly listed in the user interface If you find the position display on your MX of your installed SSD drives does not match their actual position this function should be turned on For additional information contact support See Contacting Cinedeck on page 2 Settings on the prefs page are all independently saved when pressed Click save page 181 and close to
82. select XDCAM HD as the master codec but you find that the quality settings are not available This is because XDCAM HD is an 8bit only codec Had 8bit been selected as the color depth of the input the quality settings would be available Additional tabs not necessarily directly related to a specific project but which certainly effect deck operation are the prefs tab See 5 26 Prefs tab on page 181 and the V1 signal generator See 5 29 Signal Generator tab on page 194 n D ect lt et CU WY D x os 2 5 D G As a final point there are some settings which are not necessarily recalled with the project settings and there are a few settings which are channel specific and so can be changed for each channel independently The most important settings to check are the destination drive selections because drive letters can change at startup Importa nt Microsoft Windows assigns drive letters at system startup based upon what is connected at the time so it is always necessary to confirm the drive destination for each encode Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 114 of 304 5 18 Overview tab The overview page plays two important roles it provides a full overview of the setup for the selected channel there is a channel selector at the top right and it provides access to project management for adjusting folder and file naming and scene sub scene management UN
83. set via the controlling Cinedeck record channel either using a keyboard or the on screen buttons e When in single channel view and you want to look at a local Cinedeck source channel directly it is easiest to use the TAB key on a keyboard to switch screens To some users the on screen master channel indicators for local and remote seen in multi channel view may seem reversed Just remember the text indicates the channel you will view if you click the button not what is currently selected so control remote will switch to the remote device ONLY THE UNIQUE CONTROLS SEEN IN SINGLE CHANNEL VIEW DURING INSERT MODE WILL BE DESCRIBED HERE SEE 5 9 SINGLE CHANNEL VIEW ON PAGE 93 FOR OTHER DESCRIPTIONS EDIT OPERATION IS THE SAME IN MULTI CHANNEL VIEW BUT BECAUSE OF THE REDUCED SCREEN SPACE THERE IS LESS DETAIL 166 DEVICE 167 RECORD 168 RS 422 CONTROL P 106 MODE P 106 MODE P 106 92e1193UT Jes S9PON p402ey 169 EDIT POINT DISPLAY P 106 AAA MLA CTO AEREA NT OVERVIEW P 107 MAPPING P 107 181 DISABLE REMOTE TRACK ARM P 107 170 EDIT POINT CONTROLS P 106 171 EDIT MODE P 106 172 PREVIEW EE PB P 106 173 PREVIEW P 107 EDIT P 107 J91se A pueqaseg 1Jesuj EDIT P 107 INFO P 107 P 107 TAPE P 107 DISPLAY P 107 TC P 107 Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 105 of 304 Record Mo
84. the next or previous channel The input m y O D TOGGLE ip H master and proxy tab names reflect the change displaying the names associated to the selected channel a M 5 18 Overview tab The page selector tabs are always visible in the main setup area These can be clicked pl to provide direct access to each setup section Current project displays the active project for the selected channel and is a variable often used in folder and file names Clicking here provides access to the project manager where projects are assigned to channels new projects can be created and 186 CURRENT 5 18 Overview tab M l n p 115 projects can be imported and exported This is also where folder and file naming is PROJECT pl Ta managed Additionally user lists scenes and sub scenes are accessed via project manager See 5 19 Project manager on page 119 Current scene displays the active scene for the selected channel and is a variable often used in folder and file names Clicking here provides direct access to the scenes 5 18 Overview tab list associated with the active project for the selected channel where scenes can be 0 115 selected and managed new scenes can be created scene lists can be imported and exported etc See 5 19 Project manager on page 119 Current sub scene displays the active sub scene for the selected channel and is a variable often used in folder and file names Clicking here provides direct acce
85. you should have a structure similar to the Info packaqes txt i ih syslinux Fr image at the left 9 qnoJ 79 e2lAJ8g Lj Info saved by cmd txt parts eda L info utils LS sda2 ntfs ptcl img qgz ab sdaz ntfs ptd img gz ac sda chs sf i sda hidden data after mbr sda mbr i sda pt parted C S D Co et D E UN UJ D n et O D D lt sda pt parted compact sda pt sf LA Making the USB bootable After the folders are copied over you need to make the USB bootable using the Command Prompt To open the Command Prompt on a Windows 7 or 8 machine click on the Windows Start button In Windows 7 type cmd in search programs and files Under programs cmd exe will appear In Windows 8 type cmd and Command Prompt should show in the search list Right click cmd exe or Command Prompt and select Run as Administrator This is true even if you are already logged in as an administrator Type D or whatever the USB key drive letter is and press Enter this selects the USB drive Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 286 of 304 Create USB restore key cont Type CD UTILS WIN32 and press Enter this changes the current folder icposoft Windows Version 6 3 9606 fc 2613 Microsoft Corporation ll rights reserved Windows s ystemia gt f 9 qnoJ 79 e2lAJeg ID T utils uin32
86. 0 FUTURE FUNCTIONS PLAYLIST NAME DISPLAY start 00 00 00 00 end 00 04 06 17 select PLAYLIST RESOLUTION DISPLAY duration 00 04 06 18 y C lt cr S 5 O O D 492 FRAME RATE P 230 493 P PSF use clip TC in S P 230 playback PLAYLIST COLOR DEPTH DISPLAY 490 PLAYLIST TIMECODE TYPE p 230 CLOSE P 230 494 sbumnies 1si e d CANCEL P 230 Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 229 of 304 Playlist manager Playlist settings cont egKe d 490 PLAYLIST 7 42 Playlist Select drop or non drop timecode TIMECODE TYPE S Click start to set the starting timecode and automatically calculate the end and duration based on the clips included in the playlist Click end to set the ending timecode and automatically calculate the starting and duration times based on the clips included in the playlist 491 PLAYLIST 7 4 2 Playlist TIMECODE SETTINGS settings p 229 K Select use clip TC in playback to change the timecode which is output from the Cinedeck from the default playlist timecode to clip based timecode Select the appropriate output frame rate from the options 493 p psr 742 Playlist Select P or PSF depending on the content of the playlist and the desired output settings p 229 format Select cancel to undo changes and return to the playlist editor Select save and cl
87. 0 GB 7 88 GB usable System type 64 bit Operating System Pen and Touch Mo Pen or Touch Input is available For this Display Computer name domain and workgroup settings See also EX Ai Computer name Cinedeck PC By Change settings Full computer name Cinedeck PC Windows Update Computer description Performance Information and Tools Workgroup WORKGROUP Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 277 of 304 Using a Restore Point cont System Properties X Computer Name Hardware Advanced System Protection Rernote Use system protection to undo unwanted system changes and 6 Se ect th e ui Syste m Re StO re i b utto n Ae restore previous versions of files What is system protection System Restore 9 qnoJ 79 e2lAJ8g rou can unda system changes by reverting pour computer to a previous restore point Protection Settings Available Drives Protection Local Disk E System n Configure restore settings manage disk space Configure and delete restore points Create a restare point right now for the drives that Crake have system protection turned on System Restore x Restore system files and settings Ag E O CU A D UN O D v O E ct 7 Depending on the circumstances you may see this screen with two options a Recommended restore or Choose a different restore
88. 0 Installation _ 37 lp tan oll ll ol Re 37 3 2 Connecting your deck a 38 3 2 1 Audio connections ol o en 39 3 2z2AES BNCtoXLR 40 e IS S S S SPP cee 40 Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Table of Contents 3 of 304 3 3 Recording destinations aaa 41 3 0 1 SOUS 4 45 e465 6602S REESE ESS S k S S S Q s S s S h S s S Q S EE S s w w es 42 3 322USB amp eSATA es 43 3 3 3 Network Storage __ _ ee 45 3 3 4 DAS Storage 46 K P E P S S P p 46 3 4 RX3G front panel 47 m 1 Headphone 0 0 000 0 a 48 G 2 eSATA port 2222 lee 48 n J USB DOM oe eee S su su s 2 SE S P hoe el SE Q Q Q Q S Eus 48 S 4 Power button os 48 5 5 future use 48 6 Drive tray 22s san 48 7 Drive lock amp ejector llle 48 8 LCD Display 000 0 a 48 3 5 RX3G back panel 49 9 AUX1 2out llle 50 10 DC power llle 50 11 eSATA ports 50 12 USB3 portS RO ho eoe WEE cu 50 13 HDMiforG Ul 00 50 14 RS 232 ports loaa aaa a e 50 15 RS 422 ports 2 0 a 50 16 Monitor Duato 50 17 DVI for GUI ls 50 18 VGA for GOL 50 19 AES In amp Out o len 50 20 Timecod
89. 00 Internal dock Designed to fit a standard 3 5 drive bay in a typical PC workstation has two SATA connections and a power connection e 15002 Drive carrier and internal dock set Includes the above dock plus a drive carrier e 15003 Rugged dock kit Includes a drive carrier power supply and two eSATA cables The docks are all available with twist lock shown or key lock Contact Cinedeck for additional information 15002 Drive DOCK amp CARRIER 15000 Drive Dock Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Y E gt 15001 Drive CARRIER 15001 RUGGED DOCK KIT Page 71 of 304 S lI1OSS 2D2V S 2op SALIG 4 2 Rack mount kits RX3G MX and ZX can all be mounted in standard 19 equipment racks For RX there are two rack kits available a single machine kit with blank panel shown and a dual side by side kit The MX and ZX rack kits come with rack ears and side rack rails Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 72 of 304 S lI1OSS 2D2V Si JUNOW ADE Y 4 3 Control panels Cinedecks can be controlled by an array of remote panels connected by USB and RS 422 Additionally ZX can be optionally equipped with a surface mount version of the MX tactile control panel E e mM sd m TER 4 5 ENTE E F PLAY EPIO Third party controllers include EST I E n Ly n 8 SET X Keys Jog Shuttle XK 12 contr
90. 08 DVVHDMI for GUL 67 S 109 optional network llle 68 5 110 eSATAports LA 68 3 10 Inserting amp ejecting AriVeS a 69 4 0 AccessorieS 71 4 1 Drive dockKkS 71 4 2 Rack mount kits 72 4 3 Control panels 2 0 00 00000 es 73 5 0 User Interface_ _ _ 74 5 1 Ullntroduction 74 5 2Ul explained a 75 5 3 Keyboard Shortcuts 77 5 4 Powering ON sre 82 5 5 Desktop detallS 2 83 5 5 1 On screen keyboard 83 5 5 2 Touchscreen Setup 84 5 5 3 y AS E ra 84 Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Table of Contents 8 of 304 5 6 Settings exporting importing 85 5 7 Multi view screen description 87 5 8 Multi view Screen 0 88 111 Single view toggle ee 89 112 remote indicator a ee 89 113 sync indicator ln 89 m 114 master space time 0 a ee 89 G 115 signal iIndiCaAt0r lll 89 O 116 proxy Space lime
91. 1 md Communications Port COMI e COM 6 RX3G CH2 22 Communications Port COMZ pot S Intel R Active Management Technology SOL COMS FEF USB Serial Port COMI1 The standard RS 422 COM x 127 USB Serial Port COM12 ports for MX and ZX are L3 i i USB Serial Por Update Driver Software 225 USB Serial Porl Disable em Processors Uninstall e COM 9 MX ZX CH 1 TR Ramdisk LE s i Sound video and Scan For hardware changes COM 10 MX ZX CH 2 HA Storage COMED CUE mnn COM 11 MX ZX CH 3 cl System devices O e COM 12 MX ZX CH 4 T 9 Universal Serial Bus controllers Opens property sheet for the current selection f fff Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 234 of 304 O J3u02 0W Y 7 it DN N N l AO O lt is O Uu D ect C RS 422 COM port setup cont JO D USB Serial Port COM5 Properties E x 2 Open the properties for the first COM port General Por Settings Driver Details D O a OSE Serial Port COMMS O There are four tabs across the top a Note the location on this first page Device type Ports COM amp LPT o Manut ES gt I Location USB Serial Converter A The COM port for the first channel should be on Serial Converter A Device status gt gt This device is working properly The COM port for the second channel should be on Serial Converter B and so on
92. 104 USB2 ports P 67 105 GB ETHERNET P 67 106 USB3 ports P 67 109 OPTIONAL NETWORK P 68 110 ESATA ports P 68 Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 65 of 304 ZX Back panel cont 3G video inputs Each video input can accept up to 16 channels of SDI embedded 88 VIDEO IN 3 amp 4 a audio Can be paired and function as dual link input All 4 i can be SA as 4K UHD lal Ss AUX video out is a secondary output of either charme 1 or channel 2 The signal source selection can be defined on the prefs page of some systems LOOP 49 05 timecode signal Signals which are input are passed to the out connector 3G video inputs Each video input can accept up to 16 channels of SDI embedded 2 UN et 2 Q zur O 92 VIDEO IN 1 amp 2 o audio Can be paired and function as dual link input All 4 inputs can be combined as 4K UHD input 93 Vipro our 1 amp 2 32ZX Back panel 3G video outputs Can be paired and function as dual link output ip o All 4 outputs can be combined as 4K UHD output Sb coun ye 39 ZX Back panel AUX video out is a secondary output of either channel 1 or channel 2 The signal 9 65 source selection can be defined on the prefs page of some systems 95 TC 1 amp 2 in 39 ZX Back panel LTC linear time code input to channels 1 and 2 for use with a house supplied LOOP 0 65 timecode signal Signals which are input are passed
93. 1090924 H24 E N N rip 8 3 P124 24 N N 39s 1 i e ip24 H24 W N N vanr 1 1 2 ox e Pe owo Ac E N so 3 3 mane aver E F N LN to H 8 _ VC 5 Dem com UR Wo om o fa a VC 5 memi eee U E n mmm A Cinedeck August 27 2015 14 28 Page 318 of 350 Codecs amp wrappers cont suoneoii edsg ejes 000 prm o up fal rarer Pee CO el epe rr a mm a fa E esp esu rper 1 e 109024 spec 2000 X X wzm NA ee ee ee ae po 1080P 25 JUncompesed M M W j Fixed JEJ 180025 px MH N N 36 E H E 180027 DwHD M N N Uo E R j j 18025 pwHD gy M N 15 M y j 180027 DN44 N N yg HJ M R JE 1080025 PoRs E M E Proy SJES 1080025 PoRs M M M v j _ SJS 1080025 PoRs M M E Nom X J 1080025 PoRs M M NM o SJS J 1080025 PoRs M M M 44 9 j J C O Qu D O UN 2 z CU oO 5 D UN 1080025 XDcamHD M N N xo Mo E Mp 1825 xDcamHD B N N x E E HB 1080025 XDcamHD M N N s J Mo R 1825 H264 N N ied
94. 15 14 28 Page 96 of 304 Single channel view cont Error log opens a sub menu with controls for ci a E CS 93 1934 Jes isea dismissing the most recent warning for the selected channel ELE dismissing all warnings for the selected channel opening the log of recent errors e dismissing all errors on all channels 2 5 9 Single channel The audio meters reflect the average audio levels for the selected channel pair ds we 5 9 Single channel The bg button toggles a dark background on and off to better separate the on screen view p33 audio meters from the underlying video 158 ERROR LOG The P button toggles the on screen overlay of the proxy encode audio channels 5 9 Single channel When this overlay is active it is possible to select a different channel pair for 4ew p 3 monitoring A long press opens the headphone monitor control screen see 5 10 Headphone Monitor Controls on page 98 Lol P The M button toggles the on screen overlay of the master encode audio channels 162 M 5 9 Single channel When this overlay is active it is possible to select a different channel pair for 4ew p93 monitoring A long press opens the headphone monitor control screen see 5 10 Headphone Monitor Controls on page 98 d oce E 5 9 Single channel The remote indicator will light green when the associated channel detects a RS 422 view p 93 connection zi e D O D qu ES p z The sync i
95. 150 288 WIE on beds st Fs He Peas 150 289 primary 22s llla 151 290 Secondary 2l 151 291 channel toggle o 151 292 video burn 2l nn 151 293 closed captions os 151 294 vbrenable 2 2n 151 295 endian type a n 151 296 encoderenable o 152 297 use mxfclipfolders 0000002 152 298 encodername a ee 152 299 use record TC offset ll ee 152 300 recordmode a 152 Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Table of Contents 16 of 304 301 copy to other channels lll ll 153 302 saveandclose 153 303 generafexml _ ____ _ 2l 153 9 22 PTOXV TID L u uu us sanscrito a Ds w W w sls 2 lw kW J Sua an 2 Q a 2 he Q Css 154 304 pagetabs 0 0 0 0 a a 155 305 codec llle 155 306 quality ose 155 m 307 wrapper a a 156 G 308 audio 156 e 309 timecode 0 156 S 510 SCOMOCNE cecus Ed 3 59 ranra a a a w 2 552492 156 5 EMM 157 312 primary 0 n 157 313 secondary ln 157 314 channel toggle ee 157 315 videoburn
96. 170 of 304 93 1934 Jes C Ro gt ct O CU ct O ct CU O TC amp Automation tab cont 25 oss The global preroll setting used in edit modes when the session is controlled by the 354 PREROLL Automation tab p 168 Cinedeck This an optional section for systems with a multi function master timecode input in addition to the standard LTC input e In LTC reader mode the master timecode input is a basic LTC input which drives all channels vs the standard LTC inputs which Ji Cs EEE 525 TC amp drive pairs of channels Automation tab e In IRIG mode master timecode input feeds the signal from an IRIG B timecode source to all channels e In LTC jam sync mode the internal timecode clock can receive a temporary external timecode source via the master timecode input and regenerate that timecode for one or more channels in the same way a camera might be jam synced to match other cameras The internal timecode generator has several modes all of which depend on the gen TC source selection see 357 gen tc source on page 172 MODE p 168 In free run mode continuous timecode will be sequentially generated local or UTC GMT time based on the internal system 525 TC 6 356 GEN TC MODE Automation tab p 108 In rec run record run mode timecode will be sequentially generated when recording Timecode will start at 0 00 or any other user selected preset time
97. 21 210 PROJECT lt gt CHANNEL 211 CANCEL BUTTON P 120 ASSIGNMENT P 121 BUTTON P 121 Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 119 of 304 Project manager cont 93 1934 Jes gt 19 Project The selector tabs are always visible in the project manager setup area These can be 204 PAGE TABS manager l l l p 119 clicked to provide direct access to each setup section 9 19 Project j The project list displays all of the currently available projects The selected project is 205 PROJECT LIST manager p 119 colored and bordered orange Manage products provides access to Creating a new project Projects are by default automatically saved in the projects folder located in the Cinedeck install folder This is usually c cinedeck projects T Deleting the selected project Tens ag Renaming the selected project p 119 Exporting the selected project Exporting a project is simply saving the project in a user selected destination with the current name Saving the selected project with a new name Importing a previously saved project 206 MANAGE PROJECTS BUTTON x S D 2 et 3 D gt QD O D 5 Note that projects can not be deleted or renamed if there is content associated with the project 207 PROJECT ped The project metadata button opens a small pop up window for entering editing METADATA BUTTON p 119 project rel
98. 22 Embedded Audio RX3G and newer recorders can accept 16 SDI embedded audio channels per input 10 23 External Reference Cinedeck RX and newer decks accept external house reference Tri Level sync or Black Burst O Cinedeck MX and the 4 channel ZX models are designed to accept external LTC and house reference for each pair of channels so you can optionally dedicate each channel pair to different tasks 10 24 File Naming Cinedeck version 4 and later provides an extremely flexible and powerful project based naming system which allows the integration of user entered text and real time data wildcard variable substitution such as the current time or starting timecode in file names This system allows users to generate virtually any file name and folder structure There are no Cinedeck restrictions on folder locations or the depth of nested folders O o Alternatively an already existing destination folder can be navigated to and selected per encode o The on screen keyboard or a USB keyboard can be used along with copy amp paste o Easy to use template buttons for the real time variables are available via the on screen keyboard o Sixuser created variables can be added to each project 10 25 Formats Cinedeck RX3G and newer decks can record and play the following formats o 1080 1920 X 1080 50 59 94 60 o 1080i 1440 X 1080 50 59 94 60 o 1080p 23 98 24 25 29 97 30 50 59 94 60 RX3G and ZX20 record one channel a
99. 28 Page 91 of 304 Multi view screen cont The P button toggles the on screen overlay of the proxy encode audio channels 134 P BUTTON 5 8 Multiview When this overlay is active it is possible to select a different channel pair for screen p 88 monitoring A long press opens the headphone monitor control screen see 5 10 92e1193UT Jes Headphone Monitor Controls on page 98 The M button toggles the on screen overlay of the master encode audio channels 135 M BUTTON 5 8 Multi view When this overlay is active it is possible to select a different channel pair for screen p 88 monitoring A long press opens the headphone monitor control screen see 5 10 Headphone Monitor Controls on page 98 lt C gt lt D z Uu O Q D D 5 Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 92 of 304 5 9 Single channel view 142 TIMECODE p 94 141 fe TC SOURCE P 94 140 START 145 422 MODE P 94 2 95 139 ELAPSED TIME p 94 p 94 138 TCP REMOTE p 94 p 94 UN D mj et D gt h CU O D 137 LOCK P 94 146 RECORD Un 136 MULTI viEW p 95 TOGGLE P 94 O 147 GANG D P 95 O D 165 SIGNAL P 97 164 sync p 97 E i 163 REMOTE P 97 P 95 D lt 162 M P 97 149 CHAR OUT D 35 2 150 ovERLAYS p 95 Ilo P HEE PROXY METERS 160 586 p 97 151 ANALYSIS
100. 3 use old drive mapping 186 394 saveandclose 0 2l a len 186 395 ipaddress 0 ln 186 396 support info e 186 5 26 1 UNMOJ lt lt oceano ranas AAA 187 e Be asar rra aa Aaa Asa 187 5 2 4K UHDmode 0 000000 llle 188 5 28 DPP metadata ee 192 5 29 Signal Generator ab uaaa aaa 194 6 0 Recording 196 Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Table of Contents 20 of 304 6 1 Recording multi view llle 197 397 single view toggle 2 2 lll 198 398 master amp proxy space time 198 399 start amp elapsed tiMe aa 198 400 record DUELO 198 401 GANMQhU ON 199 402 frame buffer Indicator ll llis 199 m 403 encode Overview 199 G 404 stop button 199 m 6 2 Recording single channel VieW 200 3 405 multi view toggle o 201 E 406 Jock 201 407 elapsed 0 0 201 IES 1 0 lel 201 409 end weBeSSS355545 0 umm EN A 201 410 recordbutfon _ _ lll 202 411 gang button a 202 412 frame buffe
101. 3 9 ZX Back panel TWO standard Gb Ethernet ports Ports can be teamed in networks which support 105 GB ETHERNET NT l teamed connections 106 USB3 ports Pack eane Standard USB3 ports 3 9 ZX Back panel An unbalanced analog line level audio input which can be used for recording stereo 107 ANALOG LINE IN S l 49 92 scratch audio The ZX user interface can be displayed on most DVI or HDMI monitors You may 108 DVI HDMIFoR l I dia need to access the Windows Screen Resolution settings to properly configure your external display 3 9 ZX Back pane GUI Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 67 of 304 ZX Back panel cont 109 OPTIONAL 39 ZX Back panel PCIe slot for installation of a 10Gb Ethernet card 8 or 16Gb Fiber Channel card NETWORK 16 83 or direct attached storage adapter 2 UN et 2 Q zur O 110 ESATA ports ZX can have a total of six rear mounted eSATA ports joued Jpeg XZ Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 68 of 304 3 10 Inserting amp ejecting drives Before removing media drives from a Cinedeck they should first be ejected from the operating system This can be done from the user interface via clip manager or from the Windows desktop via HotSwap uonej ei1sur To eject drives when the Cinedeck application is running Press play on the main multi or single screen view of the user
102. 304 RX3G back panel cont 3 5 RX3G back AUX video out is a secondary output of either channel 1 or channel 2 The signal pene 43 source selection can be defined on the prefs page of some systems RX3G has dual wide range DC inputs via XLR male connectors Either input can be 9 AUX 1 2 our 2 UN et 2 Q zur O 3 5 RX3G back 10 DC power T panel pao USed to operate the deck as they are auto switching It is recommended to always have power supplied to both inputs from separate power sources n the default factory configuration eSATA 2 on the back panel is disabled RX3G has a total of five internal SATA ports the first four of which are by default used for the SSD drive trays The fifth SATA port is connected to eSATA 1 on the rear panel The front eSATA and rear eSATA 2 connectors can be enabled by swapping cables internally Please contact Cinedeck Support for more information D UB corre 3 5 RX3G back Standard USB3 data ports It is recommended to use USB2 ports when restoring a panel p 49 system from the USB restore key The RX3G user interface can simultaneously be displayed on most HDMI monitors T us x You may need to access the Windows Screen Resolution settings to properly configure your external display 3 5 RX3G back 11 ESATA PoRrs O 13 HDMI For GUI pued 1260 DEXY For remote control of most broadcast equipment RS 422 will be used T js WT T
103. 36 LUTSs 10 37 Master amp Proxy 258 258 258 258 258 258 259 259 259 259 260 260 260 260 260 260 260 261 10 38 MOV Flexibility 10 39 Non Cinedeck Clips 10 40 Pause Record 10 41 Play Multiple Clips 10 42 Playback 10 43 Playlisting 10 44 Presets 10 45 Project Locking 10 46 RAID Attached Drives 10 47 Record Time 10 48 Redundant Files 10 49 Redundant Power 10 50 Remote amp Control 10 51 Roll over Recording 10 52 Scene Names 10 53 Scheduling 10 54 Segment Record 10 55 Signal Generator 10 56 Stereo 3D 10 57 Storage Options 10 58 Telecine Control 10 59 Timecode 10 60 Timecode offset 10 61 Touch Display 10 62 Transcoding 10 63 Upcoming Features 10 64 Updates 10 65 UpRez HD to 4K 10 66 VBR CBR encoding 10 67 Warranty 10 68 Wrappers 10 69 XML data Codecs wrappers and bit rate all work hand in hand but they are three distinctly separate things For our purpose in video a codec is generally a compression algorithm with which video is processed to reduce the size of the resulting video file while maintaining a certain quality level Examples of Codecs are Avid DNxHD Apple ProRes and MPEG Quicktime and MXF are not codecs they are wrappers which are discussed in the next paragraph Each codec has its advantages and disadvantages Some like JPEG 2000 maintain very high image quality at relatively low bit rates and file sizes b
104. 47 SSD drives See 3 10 Inserting amp ejecting drives on page 69 and 3 3 1 SSDs on page 42 The trays are also available separately Cinedecks are configured by default with twist lock drive retainers but key lock JO gt lt UJ G gt O 5 et CU 5 D 7 DRIVE Lock amp 3 4 RX3G front MN panel p 47 _ retainers are available upon request with your initial order See 3 10 Inserting amp ejecting drives on page 69 1024 x 600 Touch Screen Display for user interface manipulation and video preview of record and playback signals This screen can be tilted to allow better viewing at 8 LCD DisPLAY aaa Uu i low angles The same signals see on this screen can simultaneously be displayed on a monitor connected to any one of the GUI display ports You may need to access the Windows Screen Resolution settings to properly configure your external display Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 48 of 304 3 5 RX3G back panel 2 UN et Q zur O 10 DC power P 50 11 ESATA ports P 50 ESATA 1 ACTIVE 12 USB3 Ports P 50 13 HDMI ror GUI P 50 14 RS 232 ports P 50 eued x eq DEXY 15 RS 422 ports P 50 16 Monitor Out P 50 22 GB LAN USB2 ports p 51 17 DVI For GUI p 50 Z5 Ana SUD Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 49 of
105. 4SN Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 43 of 304 Recording destinations USB amp eSATA cont Lastly the Windows system can contribute to drive performance or lack thereof In earlier years both USB3 and eSATA were plagued by issues in firmware drivers and controller hardware Most of those early issues have been resolved however in general USB3 is still not as responsive as eSATA Throughput is about the same but latency and multi write capability is still better on eSATA However eSATA can be more easily disturbed by connector and cable issues The eSATA connector design is less than perfect so extreme care must be taken to assure they are well seated and that they are not disturbed while connected uonej ei1sur As a result of the above Cinedeck do not recommend recording to USB and eSATA external drives While many customers use them regularly or even exclusively without issues problems resulting from their use are not covered by warranty or support With these clear warnings in mind Based on customer experience and internal testing The following drives have been found to perform well D D O O e O o D UN m j D a O UN Avastor HDX 1500 CalDigit AVPro AV Drive or VR2 Drive Drobo 5D USB3 Thunderbolt If your workflow requires using these external drive systems Cinedeck suggest reviewing the Spinning Disk Drive Guide available on the Ci
106. 5 AUN KU Cineform Low VC 5 1080i 60 Cineform Medium AVC I 100 259 10801 60 Cineform 1080i High 2 8 0 7 2 8 3 35 35 50 100 00 Cinedeck August 27 2015 14 28 Page 340 of 350 Data rates cont UN 4 D O Em O OU cr O ES T m m giat Koo E 1080i 60 Cineform pid s zs as mea o e 1080P s 23 98 220Mbit 35 1080P bos Cineform 23 98 High L WES 1080P oweDus TORO pm P gt DNxHD 115 H 264 Full HD 3 23 98 23 98 1080p 24 Uncompressed 1097 VC 5 1080P Cineform 23 98 i Filmscan 1 VC 5 1080P Cineform 23 98 Filmscan 2 lt LO Jour hia 23 98 l Keying 1080P JPEG 2000 VL Saig ejeqg 2308 DNxHD 175 2308 H264350kbs 36 116 e DNxHD 36 E m 1080P H 264 Main 36 82 1 17 1080P 24 DNxHD 115 23 98 Proxy ProRes Proxy 1080P 24 DNx444 1080P 23 98 ProRes LT ProRes Normal y 23 98 OS AVC I 100 1080P ProRes HQ 1080P VC 5 23 98 23 98 Cineform Low 1080P 24 XDcam HD EX DUBIE ProRes 4444 264 VC 5 23 98 1080P Cielo 1080P 24 XDcam HD EX 1080P XDcam HD EX gai Medium 1080P 24 XDcam HD 50 23 98 EOM 1080P 24 H 264 iPod Cinedeck August 27 2015 14 28 Page 341 of 350 Josue DPX Fixed 23 98 1080P 24 ProRes Proxy NES 16 v6 352 _ 36 S 82 _ 1080P24 ProRes Normal 117 1 6 ES 35 50 1080P 24 ProRes HQ 1080P 24 ProRes 4444 1 1 1 3 2 3 1 1 3 3 8 1 1 2 3 3 5
107. 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 157 of 304 Proxy tab cont LUT is an on off toggle to record files with or without LUT based color correction S op eb 316 iur 2ed DI a See 5 6 Settings exporting C Dac LUT correction is a permanent part of the video and can not be removed 522 Proxy tab Pressing save and close confirms any changes closes the setup screens and returns 317 SAVE AND CLOSE En s E E to the previous multi or single channel view UN D m 2 et D i h CU O D qe xoJg 318 COPY TO OTHER 5 22 Proxy tab CHANNELS IE copy to other channels opens this sub menu which allows copying channel encode independent settings such as audio channel selection amp routing and file destination drive from the selected channel and encoder to one or more other channels In the above image the orange highlighted channel 1 settings will be copied to channels 2 3 and 4 If for example you also wanted to copy drive destinations from channel 1 you would press disk assignments to include them Master settings are copied to masters and proxy settings are copied to proxy settings Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 158 of 304 Proxy tab cont Each recording session can be accompanied by clip specific xml files The completed xml files contain clip specific metadata which can be imported into asset managements systems and the li
108. 5 DPX Fixed 1080P Keying 1080P 25 AVC I 50 29 97 ProRes Proxy JPEG 2000 VL 1080P 25 AVC I 100 1 1080P 220Mbit 29 97 ProRes LT 1080P 25 i ERES Cineform Low 1080P 24 220 VC 5 Cinedeck August 27 2015 14 28 Page 342 of 350 Data rates cont 1080P 29 97 ProRes Normal 1080P 1080P 29 97 ProRes 4444 1080P XDcam HD EX 35 29 97 1440 1080P 29 97 XDcam HD EX 1080P 29 97 XDcam HD 50 1080P 1080P 1080P 1080P 1080P H 264 28 29 97 DAX 2800 i 1080P 1080P 1080P H 264 Main 0 35 29 97 Proxy AVC I 50 1080P 2907 1080P 29 97 Cinedeck August 27 2015 14 28 1080P 29 97 AVC I 100 1080P VC 5 29 97 Cineform Low foe i s 29 97 1080P 29 97 Cineform High VC 5 Cineform Filmscan 1 VC 5 Cineform 1080P 29 97 Keying 1080P JPEG 2000 VL 29 97 220Mbit 1080P 50 Uncompressed Fixed 1080P 50 ProRes Proxy 1080P 50 ProRes LT 1080P 50 ProRes Normal Medium 1080P 29 97 Filmscan 2 VC 5 1080P 50 ProRes HQ 1080P 50 ProRes 4444 VC 5 1080P 29 97 Cineform VC 5 Hou ae Cineform Low VC 5 Cineform Medium VC 5 Cineform High VC 5 Cineform Filmscan 1 VC 5 Cineform Filmscan 2 VC 5 Cineform ES ES ES E 1080P 50 738 Keying 1080P 50 JPEG 2000 1080P Uncompressed 59 94 Fixed 1080P 50 94 ProRes Proxy 1080P 59 94 ProRes LT 1080P 59 94 ProRes Normal 1080P 59 94 ProRes HQ 1080P 50 94 ProRes 4444 1080P VC 5 5
109. 6 current project aaa a a a 116 187 current scene 116 188 current sub scene ee 116 189 tape reel ID llle 116 190 input SettiNgS 117 191 master encoder settings 117 192 master file destinations 117 193 proxy encoder settings o eens 117 194 proxy file destinations 117 195 name arar a rada 117 196 TADO oo enseres eee Bee ee ede eases 117 197 preview 2 2 lll less 117 198 preview LUT a 117 199 burnLUT eee eben ek bee dee ee eee eae 117 200 copy to other channels 00050004 117 201 save and close 0 00 a 118 Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Table of Contents 12 of 304 202 segment mode a 118 203 drop amp lossstop 2l lll 118 5 19 Project manager ee 119 204 pPagetabsS lll 120 205 project list 22e n 120 206 manage projects button lll ll 120 207 project metadata button o 120 m 208 name 2 ee 120 G 209 label 120 e 210 project lt gt channel assignment 121 S 211 cancel button
110. 71 MODE P 171 MODE P 171 SOURCE P 172 MODES P 173 DENEN UN D mj et D gt h CU O D TOGGLE C p 173 Qo mation C rt 350 RECORD 360 O CONTROL P 169 VERLA 2 et O 351 EXTERNAL DEVICE estara UTC v 2 VIA SDI P 169 device via SDI V 1 2 LTC reader rec run system time ch 1 2 LTC ct O D 2D L master clock LTC jam sync P 170 EDL LTC reader generator per take preset master LTC 353 INPUT REC input telecine amp RUN TC P 170 rec run TC clipster not used 361 pr NDF P 174 362 SAVE AND CLOSE P 174 Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 168 of 304 TC amp Automation tab cont QUE De eru The page selector tabs are always visible in the main setup area These can be clicked s utomation tab y p 168 to provide direct access to each setup section 350 RECORD s In manual mode record control is from the front panel Automation tab Record control has several additional modes which are often linked to rec TC trigger CONTROL p 168 l l Each is described below 93 1934 Jes When set to external device via SDI the deck is set to receive record start stop commands embedded in the SDI ancillary data stream coming from a camera This allows the deck to slave record in sync with the camera recordings 351 EXTERNAL 3 25 IC amp Automation tab DEVICE VIA SDI p 168 I
111. 8P NTSC SD 23 98P NTSC SD 59 91 NTSC SD 59 91 NTSC SD 59 9i NTSC SD 59 91 NTSC 5D 59 91 EA Page 348 of 350 UN 4 D O Em O OU cr O ES T Saig ejeqg Data rates cont NTSC SD NTSC SD 59 9i NTSC SD VC 5 59 9j Cineform Low NTSC SD E H 264 iPod 0 35 NTSC SD S H 264 iPad NTSC SD H264350 FCP 035 59 91 NTSC SD Se H 264 DAX 0 7 2 8 7 UN c D O Em O CU cr O ES T NTSC SD 59 9 Cineform Medium NTSC SD H 264 59 91 DAX 2800 NTSC SD 59 9j H 264 Full SD 0 R a meis Full 59 9i P SD NTSC SD H 264 Full SD 59 9i 3500 MIS EV Full 59 9i P SD 3500 NTSC SD d JFIF 10 1m NTSC SD S JFIF 15 1s EP oem ee Cinedeck August 27 2015 14 28 Page 349 of 350 NTSC SD 59 9 Cineform High VC 5 Cineform Filmscan 1 VC 5 Cineform Filmscan 2 VC 5 Cineform NTSC SD 59 91 Saig ejeqg NTSC SD 59 91 Ul NTSC SD Ln LO O 11 4 Storage calculator Codec data rates are generally measured as Mbps Megabits per second while storage is generally quoted as MB Megabytes GB Gigabytes TB Terabytes and as storage costs decrease Petabytes There are any number of rate and storage calculators available on line but we figured a local one might be handy so while not very advanced the calculator below will give you the basic storage requir
112. 9 4 Installing SSDs Local SSDs are installed in removable sleds or carriers n b zm O D go O a o D Each carrier can hold two drives sqss buipeisug To install the SSDs open the carrier and remove the screws Noting the orientation of the connectors at the back of the carrier carefully fit one or two SSDs into the carrier SATA connectors Secure each SSD at the edges with at least two screws Replace the carrier into the stainless cover and secure with at least one screw Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 250 of 304 9 5 Initializing new drives Install the new disk in a carrier 9 4 Installing SSDs on page 250 Install the drive carrier in the Cinedeck 3 10 Inserting amp ejecting drives on page 69 Power on the Cinedeck and allow to load fully Exit the Cinedeck software application 388 application on page 184 n D y lt O D go s O z eJ D Open Windows Computer Management Press Start Right click Computer Select Manage from the context menu 2 E ct For more info on opening Computer Management see 8 1 Device Manager on page 233 D N From the management console select Disk Management from the list at the left c 2 D alo x File Action View Help 2 Am BTAX eaa Z 32 Computer Management Local volume Layout Type File System Status Capacity Free Space
113. 9 94 Cineform Low Page 343 of 350 UN D O Em O o cr O ES T So 8J eje Data rates cont 1080P 59 94 1080P 59 94 1080P 59 94 1080P 59 94 1080P 59 94 1080P 59 94 1080P 60 1080P 60 ProRes HQ 1080P 60 ProRes 4444 1080P 60 1080P 60 VC 5 Cineform Medium VC 5 Cineform High VC 5 Cineform Filmscan 1 VC 5 Cineform Filmscan 2 VC 5 Cineform Keying JPEG 2000 Uncompressed Fixed ProRes Proxy ProRes LT ProRes Normal VC 5 Cineform Low VC 5 Cineform Medium Cinedeck August 27 2015 14 28 a 39 pese VC 5 Cineform High VC 5 Cineform Filmscan 1 VC 5 Cineform Filmscan 2 VC 5 Cineform Keying UHDTV 1 24 UHDTV 1 UHDTV 1 ProRes Normal UHDTV 1 x ProRes 4444 1056 UHDTV 1 VC 5 1080P 60 1080P 60 1080P 60 1080P 60 ProRes Proxy Cineform Medium VC 5 Cineform High Cineform Low UHDTV 1 x 24 UHDTV 1 24 VC 5 Cineform Filmscan 1 VC 5 Cineform Filmscan 2 VC 5 Cineform UN D O Em O o cr O ES T UHDTV 1 24 UHDTV 1 24 UHDTV 1 24 Keying UHDTV 1 25 ProRes Proxy 152 sicul k ProRes LT 340 25 88 736 So 8J eje E ProRes Normal 4 257 Mdh d ProRes HQ 25 ed l ProRes 4444 1100 UHDTV 1 VC 5 25 Cineform Low UHDTV 1 Ue 255 UHDTV 1 25 Cineform Medium VC 5 Cineform High UHDTV 1 Cineform 25
114. AES XLR pins to BNC 40 SDI channels 39 Audio delay 144 Audio routing 161 AVC Intra 312 Avid Digital Cut 239 Avid MXF 312 B Bitrate quality 290 Data rates 339 Master 147 Proxy 155 Storage calculator 350 Cinedeck August 27 2015 14 28 Blacked File 109 Bluefish update 280 C Changing drive letters 262 Character overlay 90 95 Customizing 111 Cinedeck MCC 232 242 Cineform 312 Clip manager ox 215 Clipping 95 Close application 181 Closed captioning 151 Codec 289 Codecs amp wrappers 312 Master 147 Proxy 155 COM ports 233 COM port setup 234 Confidence 103 Confidence Monitoring 110 Connecting 38 Audio 39 Contact 2 Create Black File 109 110 Create system image 288 Create USB restore key 284 D D 10 312 Delay 144 Delete file 181 Device Manager 233 Digital Cut 239 Disk caching settings 260 DNxHD 312 DPP UK See FAQ amp Features Drives Caching settings 260 Drive letters 262 Ejecting 69 Error Checking 264 Formating 259 Formatting 249 HotSwap 84 Initializing 251 Installing 250 Secure erase 266 DVCPRO HD 312 E Edge Detect 95 Edit user wildcards 132 Edit while record See FAQ amp Features EDL editor 176 EDL sample 180 Ejecting drives 69 HotSwap 84 Error 97 Error Checking 264 Exit to Windows 181 Export settings 85 F FAQ amp Features 289 File name editor 130 File names 122 124 Focus Assist 95 Page 351 of 353 x pul Folder path 128 G Growing f
115. All current Cinedecks utilize these removable 3 6 MX front panel drive trays sometimes called sleds or carriers Each tray can hold two SATA SSD drives t See 3 10 Inserting amp ejecting drives on page 69 and 3 3 1 SSDs on page 42 The trays are also available separately In the default configuration the power button requires a momentary push for turning 2 UN et 2 Q zur O joued 31u0J4J XN 35 DRIVE LOCK AND 36 MX front panel EJECTOR 36 DRIVE TRAY 3 6 MX front panel the RX3G on and off and glows blue when the system is running The systems can SUMMO BOTTON p 52 also manually be placed into Windows sleep mode In this state the power button will blink slowly Pressing the power button will wake the system Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 53 of 304 3 6 1 MX control panel MX is a recording and playback appliance which provides the familiarity of a traditional tape machine by including a full tactile jog shuttle control panel and marries that with all of the unique Cinedeck capabilities The control panel three access methods direct or single button commands such as play and shuttle assignment functions such as first selecting Ch1 and then pressing stop to stop a recording and shift functions labeled in blue like shift loop to activate ping pong playback 2 UN et 2 Q zur O 50 cH 3 p 56 49 cH 2 L
116. BACKGROUND p 95 159 AUDIO METERS ir p 97 153 FULL SCREEN 158 ERROR LOG P 97 P 96 154 SETUP P 96 AAA A A A P 96 156 ENCODE OVERVIEW P 96 P 96 Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 93 of 304 Single channel view cont The multi view toggle switches the user interface between single view and multi 136 MULTI VIEW 59 Single channel channel view Additional information and tools such as waveform and vectorscope are TOGGLE 92eJ193UT Jes view p939 available in single channel view Additionally because of the increased screen space setting up on screen overlays such as aspect ratio is easier in single view 1B ee 5 9 Single channel Locks Unlocks touch screen Primarily for use in conjunction with MX tactile control 4ew p33 panel which provides direct access to other channels whether locked or unlocked 5 9 Single channel j jo e E E ME 59 Single channel Although not labeled this timecode display indicates the elapsed time of the current view p 93 recording Indicates the start timecode of the current or most recent recording view p 93 File TC source indicates where the timecode is coming from which will be written ils pus IG SURE EE to the file Possible sources include SDI serial digital embedded timecode GEN internal generated timecode LTC linear timecode fro external source The primary timecode
117. CANCEL 246 SAVE amp CLOSE Where possible wildcard information IS filled in but some data such as start MET BUTTON p 131 time code is not available until recording starts so will be displayed as the same variable entered in the above template Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 130 of 304 Project manager File name editor cont 240 CURRENT 5194 Filename Displays the project name you are currently editing PROJECT editor p 130 This is an editable field which displays the text template used to form the name you 241 TEMPLATE re 130 are creating Any letter proceeded by the 6 symbol is a wildcard or variable which will be filled in when recording is activated The expansion display shows the full name as described by the template above NETTEN 5194 Filename Where possible wildcard information is filled in but some data such as start time editor p 130 code is not available until recording starts so will be displayed as the same variable entered in the above template 93 1934 Jes The wildcard shortcut buttons provide easy access to the various record time 243 WILDCARD 5 194 File name Su TEE editor pia0 Wildcards Press a button and the appropriate variable is inserted into your template at the current cursor position The on screen keyboard can be used with a mouse or by presses when a touch screen is available It works in a similar fashion to
118. CCESS DOOR 0 63 trays and a USB port 1 3 8 ZX Front panel Key lockable latch Turn to the right to open 2 UN et 2 Q zur O ZX can hold four removable drive trays All current Cinedecks utilize these removable drive trays sometimes called sleds or carriers Each tray can hold two SATA SSD drives 85 DRIVE TRAYS or ES The trays are also available separately See 3 10 Inserting amp ejecting drives on page 69 and 3 3 1 SSDs on page 42 The trays are also available separately In the default configuration the spring loaded power rocker switch requires a 86 Power BUTTON om Pane TE S momentary push down for turning ZX on and off The lamps below the power button glow when the system is running 87 USB port Standard USB2 port joued 1uoJ4 XZ Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 64 of 304 3 9 ZX Back panel ZX has three base models and is a modular system so the back o panel on your ZX may differ from the ZX40 shown however much of the connectivity is the same If there are A questions please contact Cinedeck directly E See Contacting Cinedeck on page 2 ES 98 MONITOR OUT P 66 99 RS 422 PoRTs P 66 joued Jpeg XZ 100 MASTER TIMECODE IN amp OUT P 67 101 REDUNDANT POWER P 67 102 PowER SUPPLY ALARM IGNORE ao E u P 67 103 AES iN amp ovr 1 16 P 67
119. Choose delete selected to remove just selected clips from the loaded playlist ATI res i n e p 225 Select add new to open clip manager and add additional clips after the selected clip If no clip is selected the additional clips will be added to the end of the playlist edit selected clip opens the selected clip in the clip editor and is the same as 481 edit selected clip on page 227 RS SY lt cr S 5 O O D 5 Pressing playlist settings opens the properties screen to adjust settings such as 480 PLAYLIST 7 4 1 Playlist editor L TISSU timeline time code for the loaded playlist SETTINGS 10 422 S Ten See 7 4 2 Playlist settings on page 229 481 EDIT SELECTED 741 Playlist editor Press edit selected clip to change the start and end timecode for that clip CLIP zie If more than one clip is selected this control will be grayed out If you need to add additional sections of an existing clip select the required clip and press duplicate selected The duplicate loaded will be the full length original clip without regard to edit points set in the original 482 DUPLICATE 7 4 1 Playlist editor SELECTED S 1O1Ip 1s e d To move one or more clips earlier or later in the playlist select the clips which should 483 move setecteD Lester be moved Clips can be selected in any order and do not need to be adjacent to each 9 225 other Press the arrows to move the sel
120. Cinedeck user interface See 450 manage disk on page 218 To remove a drive from the system click the HotSwap icon and select the drive you want to eject After a few moments a message will appear indicating Safe to Hotswap which means the drive can be removed When connecting a new SATA drive the system will generally automatically detect it however occasionally it may be necessary to force the system to rescan for new hardware to make the drive accessible To do this right click the HotSwap icon and select Scan for hardware changes Importa nt r you do not see the HotSwap icon in your system tray please contact Cinedeck dnies ueeJ subno support as this is an important background service which should be running on all systems Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 84 of 304 5 6 Settings exporting importing In many areas of the Cinedeck system such as project settings scene names LUT and so on it is possible to save export and or import data While the specifics of the data can change the procedure for saving naming and importing remains the same 93 1934 Jes Some settings are by default saved in a sub folder of the Cinedeck install folder c cinedeck For example project settings are by default saved in c cinedeck projects That is the projects folder under the main Cinedeck folder LUT files are also by default looked for in the LUT folder under
121. D and follow the prompts Once complete shutdown the Cinedeck and remove any drives you do not want to secure erase Assure the new bootable disk is connected and restart the Cinedeck At the BIOS press F7 to activate the boot menu From the list of drives select the disk you previously created If it is a USB and there are two options select the one that does not mention UEFI Once Samsung Magician is running again select Secure Erase and follow the prompts Remember all data on the SSD will be erased Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 267 of 304 Secure erase cont n D ES When you restart your Cinedeck after installing Samsung Magician you may find that it has been setup to run e at startup If so this icon EJ will be visible in the system tray at the lower right of the screen Also on touch 2 screen systems Samsung Magician may display this error at startup xi Generally the program will run and this resolution error can be Your current resolution is not supported by the Magician application System n resolution must be greater than 1024x768 O ignored D Running Samsung Magician at startup is not necessary and if desired you can change this behavior Right click the Samsung Magician icon in the system tray to open UN Open the context menu and select Remove from Startup D Remove From Startup Exit Also note that y
122. DIT 467 MANAGE 468 LIST 469 VIEW TOGGLE EXPORT p 224 p 224 SELECTED PLAYLIST PLAYLISTS p 223 P 224 ALL IN FOLDER 2279 Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 222 of 304 Playlist manager cont egKe d AG NE TELE The page selector tabs are always visible in the clip manager area These can be p 222 clicked to provide direct access to each section The disk listing displays all of the media drives available to the Cinedeck Below the 7 4 Playlist PUES ese BIS E 2 disk list as with most lists are navigation arrows which become active for moving through lists which contain more entries than can be displayed on one screen The folder and sub folder columns work the same way and in conjunction with each other to allow better folder navigation and visibility 7 4 Playlist Press a folder to select it 460 FOLDERS manager Press ES up one level to move to a level higher in the folder hierarchical structure and press a sub folder to navigate down one level in the folder hierarchical structure The playlists list displays all of the Cinedeck accessible playlists within the selected folder The default is thumbs a thumbnail view but the list view as shown above displays more content information See 468 list view toggle on page 224 RU C lt cr S 5 O O D s 7 4 Playlist 461 PLAYLISTS LIST manager s l
123. E p 155 Pe am 315 VIDEO BURN P 157 project path project path 19 05 57 03 override override Windows assigns drive letters EI 00 05 00 00 NOT ALL CINEDECK SYSTEMS HAVE qe xoJg at startup no limit Confirm destination drives before each session ALL PROXY CODECS AND WRAPPERS 316 LUT P 158 325 ENCODER ENABLE copy to de P 160 324 UsE MXF 322 vBR CLIP FOLDERS ENABLE 321 320 USE 319 cENERATE 318 coPY TO 317 SAVE AND P 160 P 159 ENCODER NAME RECORD TC OFFSET XML P 159 OTHER CHANNELS CLOSE P 158 MXF CLIP FOLDERS P 159 p 159 p 158 323 ENDIAN TYPE P 160 ONLY FOR OPATOM ENDIAN AND VBR CBR SETTINGS ONLY FOR MOV Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 154 of 304 Proxy tab cont e METER 522 Proxy tab The page selector tabs are always visible in the main setup area These can be clicked p 154 to provide direct access to each setup section An advantage of Cinedeck is native codec recording and workflow flexibility but selecting the right codec for the proposed workflow is critical There are no defaults and every codec has its advantages and disadvantages If you do not know what edit system will be used or which codec is required a fairly safe bet will be ProRes or DNxHD but really you need to stop and find out what is needed UN D 2 et D h CU
124. EBT START YE METEO F 92105 example if the current file starts at 0 00 00 but you would prefer it to start at 58 30 00 simply change the timecode display and click save 115 Insert Indicates the start and end timecode for the loaded master target file 175 FILE TC DISPLAY Baseband Master on page 105 E E Creating a blank file is analogous to blacking or pre striping a tape Open the dialog 176 CREATE BLANK EE E E E e Baseband Master and select the appropriate settings and number of audio channels required for your edit recording session See 5 12 Create Black File on page 109 5 11 5 Insert F re Function 177 TRIM FILE Baseband Master uture runctio on page 105 178 TARGET FILE S n Displays the name and format details of the loaded target file INFO on page 105 179 OPEN FILE TO E Like the play button this opens clip manager for selecting and opening the target file EDIT on page 105 Only one clip can be opened at a time Provides direct selection to the SDI or AES inputs to be used for the audio portion of any insert edits 180 AUDIO SRC Sepol N p402e8y Some external systems such as Avid Media Composer can independently select which audio channels are active for inserting Disabling Remote Track Arm prevents this external control Similar to the audio matrix on the encode pages this button accesses a control panel 182 SET UP for enabling or disabling independent tracks in the target file
125. Ez Y EH Avid DNx444 mm m mum Cinedeck August 27 2015 14 28 Page 305 of 350 UJ CU zx O L G D Q p O CU ar O 7 d eL V gt I a CODEC SUPPORT Basic specifications cont E Meridien Y v Y Optional Y Y Optional Y Y Optional VC 5 CineForm Filmscan 1 Filmscan2 Y Optional Y Optional Y Optional Keying High Medium Low Uncompressed 422 8 and 10 Y Optional Y Optional Y Optional bit UN D O Em O o cr O ES T CO 444 D k O AVC Intra D U O DVCPRO HD Y Y Optional Y Optional Y Optional m XDCAM HD 50 O H 264 A NU Y Optional Y Optional Y Optional IMX D10 F Y Optional Y Optional Y Optional px poo y Y j Y Optona Y Optional Y Optional JPEG 2000 N Y Optional Y Optional Y cos Y E RAW Record Capable Future Option Future Option Future Option Future Future Option Future Future Option 3G SDI HD SDI SD SDI 9 3G SDI HD d SDI SD SDI 2 Outputs N 1 5G Dual Link Inputs 1 5G Dual Link Cinedeck August 27 2015 14 28 Page 306 of 350 Basic specifications cont outputs outputs 4K UHDTV 1 1 60p 1 30p 4K UHDTV 1 1 O 30p 1030 1 60p 1 30p 1 30p output 4K option P 4K option 4K option 4K option UN D O Em O o cr O ES T UJ CU 4K HDMI o et _ 7 Q UN S Super Out re z available on 2 z Video O
126. FILE NAME 5 252 EDL editor Proxy name is an optional field which can be filled in with a clip specific file name for 365 PROXY NAME on page 176 the proxy encode 366 IN TC 370 pr NDF 371 CANCEL ENTER 5 25 2 EDL editor on page 176 5 25 2 EDL editor on page 176 5 25 2 EDL editor on page 176 5 25 2 EDL editor on page 176 5 25 2 EDL editor on page 176 5 25 2 EDL editor on page 176 5 25 2 EDL editor on page 176 5 25 2 EDL editor on page 176 Displays the name of the EDL loaded into the editor If a new EDL is created the display shows new file until the edl is saved with a name When an EDL has been changed and not saved an is appended to the name like File name is an optional field which can be filled in with a clip specific file name for the master encode The EDL event editor in TC will initially display the starting timecode of the event selected in the event list This time can be adjusted incrementally by highlighting the digits you want to change and using the up down arrows which appear to the right of the selected fields The keypad at the right can be used to directly enter time data into the selected fields The EDL event editor out TC will initially display the ending timecode of the event selected in the event list This time can be adjusted incrementally by highlighting the digits you want to change and using the up down
127. I aU TUC NOQ Press Apply or Save amp Close to assign the selected channel s to the selected project 2 19 Projet Cancel any changes and return to the previous screen 211 CANCEL BUTTON manager p 119 212 save amp CLOSE pum Pressing save and close confirms any changes closes the project setup screens and BUTTON p 119 returns to the main setup area 5 19 Project Confirms any changes and stays on the current screen 213 APPLY BUTTON manager 119 214 PROJECT LIST 5 19 Project The project screen can display thirty projects If more than thirty projects are on a manager SCROLL p 119 system the project list scroll arrows will be available to scroll the list left and right x S D 2 et 3 D gt QD O D 5 Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 121 of 304 5 19 1 Path amp file names explained Folder and file names are made up from a broad selection of wildcards such as project 6P as well as user entered text Some wildcards are maintained and updated by the system such as take number t Others contain project settings based data such as input There are also user and global wildcards hich contain more general user created info such as a show ID See the next page for more detail on wildcards 93 1934 Jes Cinedeck places no restrictions on how or what you name your content however there are some good practices recommendations a
128. IDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 263 of 304 9 10 Error Checking If a drive has been mounted on another machine or file system or has been removed without being properly ejected either from the Cinedeck UI or via Hotswap in the windows task bar corruption of the file indexes can occur which may cause problems with recording including write failures or prevent files from being found n D O D go O a o D Before using the drive it is strongly recommended to format or secure erase the drive to ensure file system integrity e Formatting a SSD makes all space available on a drive and clears any record of previously saved files See 9 7 Formating drives on page 259 Secure erase returns drives to factory new state There is no possible recovery of user files See 9 11 Secure erase on page 266 Organize Libraries Documents al Music Pictures z PE Videos If formatting or secure erase are not options because the disk contains data run Windows error checking En Computer Local Disk C Bum 250 776 D cog new Ev a PB Full Fs Ey Network Z 1 To manually access the Check Disk utility 1 Open Windows Explorer E th Network cos MA r n iri 4 PA a ras x A CINEDEC 2 Right click the disk in question and select Properties Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28
129. IST LOCK 6 DRIVE TRAY P 48 JO gt lt UJ G gt O 5 et CU 5 D DRIVE EJECTOR P 48 P 48 P 48 P 48 P 48 Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 47 of 304 RX3G front panel cont 3 4 RX3G front w Ini BEEN 1 8 mini jack for use with standard stereo headphones In the default factory configuration this front port is disabled RX3G has a total of five internal SATA ports the first four of which are by default used uonej ei1sur 2 ESATA PORT p a i for the SSD drive trays The fifth SATA port is connected to eSATA 1 on the rear panel The front eSATA and rear eSATA 2 connectors can be enabled by swapping cables internally Please contact Cinedeck Support for more information 3 USB PORT Standard USB2 data port In the default configuration the power button requires a momentary push for turning pos sss 34 RX3G front the RX3G on and off and glows blue when the system is running The systems can panel p4 also manually be placed into Windows sleep mode In this state the power button will blink slowly Pressing the power button will wake the system 3 4 RX3G front j D FUTURE USE Six pin Lemo connector for future features RX3G can hold two removable drive trays All current Cinedecks utilize these removable drive trays sometimes called sleds or carriers Each tray can hold two SATA 6 D 3 4 RX3G front RIVE TRAY panel p
130. NC applicati0NS a 244 9 0 Service amp Trouble 245 9 1 Best practices oo o ee 245 9 2 Touchscreen calibration ee 248 9 3 Important drive information 249 9 4 Installing SSDS 0 0 250 9 5 Initializing new drives lllo 251 9 6 Reinitializing SSDs lll 256 9 7 Formating drives 259 9 8 Disk caching settings llle 260 9 9 Changing drive letterS o o 262 9 10 Error Checking e 264 Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Table of Contents 25 of 304 9 11 Secureerase aaa a a a 266 9 12 Updates ee 269 9 13 Create a restore point 269 9 14 Cinedeck Update installation __ 273 9 15 Using a Restore Point aaua aaa aa a 277 9 16 Bluefish Update a 280 9 17 Restore factory Image aaa aa aaa a 202 m 9 18 Update a USB restore key o 283 G 9 19 Create USB restorekey 284 O 9 20 Create system Image 288 gt 2 10 0 FAQ amp Features 289 S 10 1FAQ gt Features 0 00000000 RR 289 MOR 304 11 0 SpecificationSs 305 11 1 Basic SpecifiCati0nS
131. NTFS Healthy Primary Partition 476 9 476 83 GB RI g ht cl IC k a ny d IS k an d se ect d Event viewer C sSystem Reserved Simple Basic NTFS Healthy System Active Primary Partition 100 MB 74MB a Shared Folders u 297 U Properties from the context menu die Local Users and Groups amp 8 Performance Ln y Device Manager E S Storage O 29 Disk Management CU pa Services and Applications e Open DF Explore o ETE gt 2 Mark Partition as Active O Change Drive Letter and Paths Disk 0 u G2 x Basi System Res C dali Y ze 5amsung 512 73b51V G Properties X 28 55 GB 100 MB NTFS 27 34 GB NTFS Extend Volume r Online slEhy Systi Healthy Boot Page Fil tri Val ReadyBoost Previous Versions Quota Customize m Shrink Volume L KDI E T cas General Tools Hardware Sharing Security CENE Pelota Volume a is A A A A es L sas Basic Samsung 512 7361V G PE 476 94 GB 1476 94 GB NTFS Properties 0 Online Healthy Primary Partition PEATATI FICEYCKTCETTKTTE EPITEL Ero Disk drives 5 ameung 550 840 PRO Seri Disk drives 3 I Unallocated fl Primary partition Select the Hardware tab at the top of the dialog and select the disk in question from the list of disks Device Properties Select Properties at the lower right of the dialog to open disk specific
132. P metadata In May 2010 UK broadcasters ITV Channel 4 and the BBC formed the Digital Production Partnership to help smooth and accelerate the move to end to end digital Since that starting date additional broadcasters have joined the partnership including BSkyB BTSport Channel 5 ITV and SAC UN D mj 2 et D i h CU O D A large part of the DPP is the development and maintenance of a set stereo pairs 14 14 13 114 of Technical Standards For Delivery Of Television Programmes which were implemented in the UK in October 2014 Details can be found ILLNM on the DPP website I Part of the DPP standards cover metadata to be included in delivery DVCETOND MONO BEG files and Cinedeck has integrated a user interface for entering all of the DPP specific metadata UNCOMP MXF OP la When an appropriate format codec and wrapper combination is selected on the master encode page such as 10801 50 AVC Intra MXF Op1A DPP access is available to enter DPP metadata CineForm 25 26 27 28 BSB 29 30 31 32 ELIE encoder name ejepejau ddd none AS 11 metadata summary The DPP metadata screens consist of a summary page shown at right and six subsequent data entry pages shown on the next page descriptive e video e timecode e audio e access service e additional info Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 192 of 304 DPP
133. PAL SD 25P PAL SD 25P PAL SD 25P PAL SD 25P H 264 350 FCP H 264 DAX H 264 DAX 2800 H 264 Full SD H 264 Anamorphic Full SD H 264 Full SD 3500 H 264 Anamorphic Full SD 3500 VC 5 Cineform Low VC 5 Cineform Medium VC 5 Cineform High VC 5 Cineform Filmscan 1 VC 5 Cineform Filmscan 2 VC 5 Cineform Keying PAL SD 25P PAL SD 25P PAL SD 25P PAL SD 25P PAL SD 25P PAL SD 25P PAL SD 295P PAL SD 25P PAL SD 25P Cinedeck August 27 2015 14 28 0 7 0 7 5 3 NTSC SD 23 98P NTSC SD 23 98P NTSC SD 23 98P NTSC SD 23 98P NTSC SD 23 98P NTSC SD 23 98P NTSC SD 23 98P NTSC SD 23 98P NTSC SD 23 98P NTSC SD 23 98P NTSC SD 23 98P NTSC SD 23 98P NTSC SD NTSC SD 23 98P Uncompressed Fixed ProRes Proxy ProRes LT ProRes Normal ProRes HQ ProRes 4444 H 264 iPod H 264 iPad H 264 350 FCP H 264 DAX H 264 DAX 2800 H 264 Full SD Anamorphic Full SD H 264 Full SD 3500 Ee 63 94 0 35 0 35 0 7 2 8 T NTSC SD Uncompressed 59 91 Fixed H 264 Anamorphic Full SD 3500 VC 5 Cineform Low VC 5 Cineform Medium VC 5 Cineform High VC 5 Cineform Filmscan 1 VC 5 Cineform Filmscan 2 VC 5 Cineform Keying NTSC SD 23 98P NTSC SD 23 98P NTSC SD 23 98P NTSC SD 23 98P NTSC SD 23 98P NTSC SD 23 9
134. PAL SD ProRes Proxy OMbit PAL SD ProRes LT om PAL SD ProRes Normal 720P 60 PAL SD ProRes HQ PAL SD ProRes 4444 PAL SD Cineform S Medium VC 5 PAL SD Cineform S High m PAL SD H 264 iPod 0 UE DO a PAL SD S 145 va H 264 iPad PAL SD Cineform 3 A PAL SD H 264 350 FCP 0 35 Filmscan 1 720P 60 ProRes LT Gay MASAO VC 5 PAL SD Cineform Filmscan 2 720P 60 ProRes Normal 0264 ES VC 5 PAL SD Cineform EE E UN 4 D O Em O OU cr O ES T Uncompressed Fixed PAL SD PAL SD H 264 Full SD H 264 PAL SD Anamorphic Full SD H 264 Full SD PAL SD 3500 H 264 35 0 7 2 8 720P 60 ProRes 4444 S 07 VC 5 E Cineform Low VC 5 720P 60 Cineform Medium 720P 60 Cineform ES PAL SD Anamorphic Full High SD 3500 7 WS PAL SD JFIF 10 1m E PAL SD JFIF 15 1s Filmscan 1 So 8J eje N 720P 60 ProRes HQ DAX 2800 PAL SD Uncompressed 25P Fixed LH PAL SD 25p ProRes Proxy ProRes LT Em e UJ Ul 1 2 4 6 9 VC 5 PAL SD JFIF 2 1 720P 60 Cineform PAL SD JFIF 20 1 Filmscan 2 VC 5 S PAL SD JFIF 10 1 720P 60 Cineform S PAL SD IMX 30 PAL SD IMX 40 PAL SD IMX 50 VC 5 Cineform Low 2 8 1 1 2 35 PAL SD PAL SD Cinedeck August 27 2015 14 28 Page 347 of 350 30 40 50 PAL SD PAL SD Uncompressed Data rates cont
135. Part Using Disk Management you can now initialize the disk See 9 5 Initializing new drives on page 251 Page 258 of 304 9 qnoJ 79 e2lAJ8g A D ct 2 N 5 UN UN UO UN 9 7 Formating drives The easiest and usually fastest route for clearing a drive is to format it from clip manager See 450 manage disk on page 218 SSDs can also be formatted from Windows using Quick Format however if you are formatting because you feel the SSD is not performing properly use the manufacturers secure erase procedure See 9 11 Secure erase on page 266 and then repartition the drive See 9 5 Initializing new drives on page 251 To use Quick Format open Windows Explorer For info on accessing Windows Explorer see 8 1 Device Manager on page 233 Right click the drive which should be formatted Organize New library 1 Favorites lihrart S EE Desktop m Downloads Open AutoPlay Recent Plac Expand Open in new window icuments Share with p prary piante jos versions Libraries Include in library ES Docug tures 2 Mus wary Picture Videns Rename r1 ES Computer Mew k Er E is Local Disk Properties A Damsung SEITE LN U 1 K Network Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 y Eo see your Files and arran e A and select Format from the context menu All of the default settings should be
136. Press the drive ejector firmly but slowly in to eject the drive from the deck uonej ei1sur To install a drive e If your system has twist locks press the knob in gently and assure it is fully turned to the left and vertical e f your system has key locks assure the locater slots are vertical or insert the key with the locater pin pointing to the right press the key in and gently turn to the left until the key is vertical e Push the drive tray into the slot firmly until it is flush with the front panel of the deck e f your system has twist locks press the knob in gently turn to the right until the knob clicks into the horizontal position and release the knob f your system has key locks insert the key with the small pin locater pointing up press the key in and gently turn to the right until the key is horizontal IT gt UN D Y m gt O Qo De D O my O o E lt D UN TWIST OR KEY LOCK PEE ca DRIVE EJECTOR DRIVE EJECTOR DEPRESSED EXTENDED DRIVE CARRIER Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 70 of 304 4 0 Accessories 4 1 Drive docks For use in sneaker net and other mobile applications all Cinedecks make use of hot swappable drive carriers Each carrier can hold two SSD drives The 15001 carriers are available separately and there are several receiving docs which connect to computer workstations via SATA e 150
137. R IS CORRECTLY COMMUNICATING WITH THE CINEDECK THE REMOTE LAMP WILL BE GREEN 422 MODE SHOULD BE SET TO SLAVE UN D gt ar TI o UN D et m gt O UN Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 240 of 304 Avid Digital Cut Media Composer settings cont In addition to the settings made above on the Cinedeck it is necessary to peice the deck emulation with the appropriate framerate This setting is made in prefs see O43uO2 louu uu SET OUTPUT MODE TO 8 4 4 Media Composer Settings TO E OR AE SET DIGITAL CUT SAFE MODE TO ON SET EDIT MODE TO INSERT EDIT SELECT ENTIRE SEQUENCE AS NEEDED um lud EZ B 9 L4 qo 148 12 IND Jeiibiq play SET TIMECODE OPTION TO SEQUENCE TIME USE AUTO CONFIGURE TO FIND THE APPROPRIATE DECK BE SURE THE CINEDECK Sony SRVWS500 60 DECK EMULATION SETTINGS ARE SET SELECT ADJUST DECK AND ASSURE FAST CUE IS TURNED OFF On the Digital Cut Tool select the appropriate source and destination video and audio tracks and proceed with the Digital Cut as you would with a tape deck lt D CU C O O O n D s n D ect a gt O n Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 241 of 304 8 5 AMP protocol The AMP protocol from Grass Valley is a complete API
138. RS 422 porrs 22 MX Back panel tape deck or other professional device and a Cinedeck channel The ports are bi ps2 directional allowing master mode for the Cinedeck to control attached devices or joued Jpeg XN slave mode allowing external devices to control the Cinedeck 3 pin XLR analog audio monitor output One output per channel Dual multi voltage AC to DC power supplies Either power supply can be used to 69 REDUNDANT 3 7 MX Back panel POWER operate the deck as they are auto switching It is recommended to always have power supplied to both inputs from separate power sources 70 POWER SUPPLY 37 MX Back panel If the deck is powered up with just one power supply connected or if a power supply ALARM IGNORE p29 fails a high pitch alarm will sound Pressing the button will quiet the alarm Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 60 of 304 MX Back panel cont The master timecode input provides four functions Single timecode source When selected on the master encode page of the user interface timecode fed to the master timecode input is directed to all 4 channels Jam Sync Similar to a camera a timecode source can be momentarily connected to this LTC input and MX will sync the internal generator to that 71 MASTER 3T MX Back panel timecode TIMECODE IN amp OUT aa Timecode Out MX can generate and send timecode to other connected device
139. SER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 174 of 304 5 25 1 TC offsets With TC offsets timecode offsets it is possible to fine tune each timecode source connected to each channel of the Cinedeck to compensate for frame based timing errors such as an incoming video signal which is first being passed through a frame synchronizer where the desired timecode is not or where multiple related sources are receiving different amounts of processing taking them out of sync with each other In these cases you can delay or advance the timecode by the required number of frames so the timing issue can be compensated for Select the desired timecode source and enter the offset using a USB keyboard or press the arrows to increment the timecode offset by one frame plus or minus If adjusting IRIG offset you may find the numeric pad easier TIMECODE OFFSETS AS DISPLAYED ON THE SELECT A NUMERIC FIELD AND PRESS THE ASSOCIATED ARROWS UP OR TC amp AUTOMATION DOWN TO INCREMENT THE OFFSET MAIN PAGE 92e1193UT Jes E MES 0 193 ch 1 2 TC offset P RS 422 offset C Ro gt ct O CU ct O ct CU O cM E 4 master LTC Master LTC offset a OR WILL 0 v HIGHLIGHT TO INDICATE THE OFFSET DIRECTION SI9SHO DL Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 175 of 304 5 25 2 EDL editor The EDL edit decision list editor is used to edit or creat
140. SI SOUDIS Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 135 of 304 Project manager Scenes list cont The channel assignment display shows which channels are associated to the currently selected project 93 1934 Jes 258 CHANNEL 5 19 6 Scenes list ASSIGNMENTS puta Orange indicates the channel is associated to the selected project Dim channels are assigned to other projects 259 CANCEL BUTTON Cancel any changes and return to the previous screen 260 SAVE amp CLOSE 5196 scenes list Pressing save and close confirms any changes closes the project setup screens and BUTTON p134 returns to the main setup area 261 SCENE LIST 5 196 Scenes list The scene list can display thirty scenes If more than thirty scenes are on in a project SCROLL TNT the scene list scroll arrows will be available to scroll the list left and right x S D 2 et 3 D gt QD O D 5 SIl SSU9SIS Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 136 of 304 5 19 7 Sub scenes amp User Lists In addition to scenes project manager provides sub scenes and user lists all name elements to optionally use in folder and file names The layout and usage of the user lists and the sub scenes list is identical to the scenes list except that user lists do not have any metadata options Like scenes sub scenes and user lists can be created in advance and then
141. TIME 13 56 00 10 13 56 30 00 SEPARATOR BETWEEN SECONDS PET A AND FRAMES FOR A NON 13 57 00 10 13 57 30 00 DROP FRAME EDL 13 58 00 10 13 58 30 00 13 59 00 10 13 59 30 00 Proxy Name 380 IN TC 379 our 1C 365 PROXY p 179 P 179 P 177 NAME P 177 BLANK LINE 1q3 lduues Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 180 of 304 5 26 Prefs tab Basic system configuration settings are on the preferences page Perhaps most important is UI mode selection which sets the the I O operational mode The modes available can differ depending on the hardware and software installed however all systems have two or four channel YUV which is the standard mode for multi channel SD HD recording and playback UN D mj 2 et D i h CU O D 383 384 REMOTE 385 444 386 387 Ul 388 389 390 RECORDING CONTROL OUTPUT PREFS MODE APPLICATION MISC LICENSES 391 CHANNEL P 182 P 183 P 183 P 184 P 184 184 P 185 P 185 oct P 185 next 382 PAGE TABS ch P 182 prev D recording remote ctrl 444 output prefs UI mode application isc licenses system 392 SYSTEM TA P 186 ui i reset all single link settings to 4 input YUV restart SE ns restart YUV10 defaults application licenses O 4 input 3G rai ade level B em shut down RGB application purge clip au der 7 use onscreen database RGB keyboard single
142. TPUT RGB IMAGES ACROSS TWO BNC CABLES SINGLE INPUT MODE ALLOWS CONNECTION OF A SINGLE 1 5 OR 3G SOURCE TO INPUT 1 THE SOURCE IS AVAILABLE TO ALL MASTER ENCODERS ALLOWING MULTI CODEC ENCODING OF A SINGLE SOURCE FOR EXAMPLE A SINGLE INPUT ON A MX COULD BE SIMULTANEOUSLY ENCODED AS UNCOMPRESSED APPLE ProRes Avip DNxHD AND AVC INTRA In 3D MODE A LOCKED STEREO PAIR OF YUV SIGNALS CAN BE CONNECTED AND ENCODED IN ANY APPROPRIATE CODEC WHEN 4K oR UHD MODE IS SELECTED ALL FOUR INPUTS OF A MX oR ZX ARE COMBINED AND THE INCOMING QUAD IMAGE IS STITCHED TOGETHER BEFORE ENCODING BECAUSE SIGNALS ARE COMING ON FOUR INDEPENDENT LINES IT IS OFTEN EASIER TO TROUBLESHOOT IMAGE ISSUES IN STANDARD YUV MODE AND THEN SWITCHING TO 4K MODE FOR PRODUCTION RAW RECORDING WILL BE SUPPORTED ON MULTIPLE MODELS IN AN UPCOMING RELEASE Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 187 of 304 UN D m 2 et D i h CU O D qe Sjald 9 DOUAU IN 5 27 4K UHD mode There are generally two 4K formats available from production digital sources full 4K and Ultra HD While they can be cropped for various aspect ratios for our purposes 4K is measured as four 2K images 2048x1080 which add up to 4096 pixels x 2160 rows while UHD is measured as four HD images 1920x1080 which add up to 3840 pixels x 2160 rows Not technically 4K but certainly close enough and a more important point is that Ultra HD as the UHD
143. TV 1 specification is recommended by SMPTE the ITU and others to be the international broadcast format while full 4K would be the digital cinema base format UN D mj 2 et D Ty h CU O D 4K and UHD YUV are really just big video images four times the size of HD to be sort of exact There are in fact actually four separate 2K or HD signals coming from the source which are stitched together as part of the recording process to form the full 4K image And because this is standard video post production can be quite straight forward Four channel Cinedeck systems can optionally record full 4K and UHDTV 1 images simply by changing the operation mode opouu AHN Av To set the system mode see 5 26 1 UI mode on page 187 The appearance and operation in 4K mode is virtually identical to single channel mode so only differences are noted in the following descriptions Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 188 of 304 4K UHD mode cont When in standby and record mode the 4K and single channel views only have three differences Because there is only one channel there is no multi view toggle The frame buffer indicator has four lines one each to display the 4K HD Proxy and H 264 file writes The encode overview at the bottom changes from master and proxy to a quad listing with information again about the 4K HD Proxy and H 264 files being written The
144. Touch transport 209 U UHD 4K 188 Uncompressed 312 Update 269 Bluefish 280 Create a restore point Create new USB key Installation EEE Update USB key V V1 Signal Generator VC 5 Cineform Vectorscope 95 W Waveform 95 Wildcards 132 Windows Remote Desktop Wrapper 290 Master 148 Proxy 156 X XDCAMHD 312 Z ZX Back panel 65 Front panel 63 Generalinfo 35 248 269 284 283 194 312 Page 353 of 353 x pul
145. UMNS p 215 See 457 list view toggle on page 221 Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 216 of 304 7 3 Clip manager SORT CONTROLS Clip manager cont 247 PUN SELECTEDE 2 Slipimanager Press play selected to load the selected clip or clips into the channel player and go p 213 back to the previous multi or single channel playback view 448 PLAY ALL IN 73 Clip manager Select play all in folder to load all of the clips in the current folder for playback and FOLDER p 215 return to the previous multi or single channel playback view Cinedecks maintain a sql database of media content New recordings are automatically added to the database while previously recorded content and files generated by other systems can be added to the database so they also are visible in clip manager The find media menu contains several search methods for loading content into the media database Important to note is the database is not aware of content being removed using applications outside the Cinedeck environment so if for example folder content is changed using Windows Explorer performing a scan will refresh the view removing deleted clips to only show content actually available The recommended method for adding or refreshing folder views is add media to database which opens a folder and file viewer Select a disk navigate to the folder containing the required content and press sc
146. When finished you should have a structure similar to the image at the left parts sdal ntfs ptcl img qz aa sda2 ntfs ptcl img qz aa sdaZ ntfs ptcl img gz ah sda2 ntfs ptcl img gz ac sda chs st sda hidden data after mbr sda mbr sda pt parted _ sda pt sf C D Co et D E UN UJ D WY et O D D lt ly disk e Sez de disk Creating the MX ZX USB restore key EFIdmas Ju EFI gt q por wa iig The following should be done on a Windows PC or directly on live Ji ischu the Cinedeck di Ji ive e Extract the contents of the zip file s to a convenient location Jo um MXRestore such as the desktop e syslinux Format the 8GB USB as fat32 Use quick format utils Tf using the full restore zip for MX or ZX you will have 9 folders sa Clonezillative version and 2 or 3 files similar to the image at the left sa GPL Copy these over to the USB stick MX V4 2 Build 8082 txt Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 285 of 304 Create USB restore key cont 323 Full MX Restore Files 72 hs disk x E HI 8 donezilla img If you have separate zip files for the MXRestore folder i E ss disk and the clonezilla boot files copy the boot files folders and ad Info dmi txt files to the USB key live ukana ERE Copy the MXRestore folder to the USB iS When finished
147. X 07 E H 264 Lose 2 O3 Fixed 1080i 50 l XDcam HD EX 10801 50 1440 1080i 50 Cinedeck August 27 2015 14 28 Page 339 of 350 VC 5 10801 50 Cineform Medium VC 5 10801 50 Cineform High VC 5 10801 50 Cineform Filmscan 1 1080150 H 264 Full HD 1080i50 H 264 350kbs 1080056 H 264 Main Proxy 10801 50 JFIF 10 1m 10801 50 JFIF 15 1s 10801 50 JFIF 2 1 VC 5 10801 50 Cineform Filmscan 2 VC 5 10801 50 Cineform pen E ES 1080050 JHF201 1080050 JHF101 e 50 100 100 10801 50 AVC I 100 1080150 DVCProHD 100 1 VC 5 Cineform Low JPEG 2000 VL USE SIS 220Mbit 0 7 2 8 3 10801 50 AVC I 50 50 100 00 10801 50 Data rates cont UN D O Em O o cr O ES T 1080i VC 5 59 94 Cineform Low 1080 bs 59 94 Cineform Medium 1080i o 59 94 Cineform i High VC 5 Cineform 10801 59 94 H 264 PIX 10801 59 94 H 264 DAX 1080i H 264 59 94 DAX_2800 10801 co04 H 264 Full HD 10801 11 264 350kbs 59 94 H 264 350kbs 0 G 1080i H 264 Main 0 Imscan 59 94 Proxy VC 5 1080 Uncompressed 59 94 Fixed 10801 i i 59 94 JFIF 10 1m Filmscan 2 m E E S E E S 59 94 1440 n 7 E S eem So 8J eje I VC 5 1080i f gt 59 94 JFIF 15 1s Cineform e JFIF 2 1 1080i JPEG 2000 VL 220 59 94 220Mbit E JFIF 20 1 RAS sss A 5994 JFIF 10 1 1080i 5994 AVC I 50 1080i VC
148. X D 10 MPEG JPEG 2000 optional XDCamHD Uncompressed 1 ZX supports all codecs but generally ships with only user specified codecs 10 17 Color Depth All Cinedecks support true 8bit and 10bit inputs and recording O O O O O O O O O O O O 10 18 Color Sampling All Cinedecks support 422 sub sampling and in some cases 444 recording 10 19 Cross Conversion All Cinedecks have a wide selection of up and down standards conversion at the input and output which can be combined to provide full cross conversion i e up convert SD to HD on record or down convert HD to SD for monitoring etc 1 Optional on ZX note Active in version 3 re activation in an upcoming release 10 20 Edit While Record See Growing Files 1 on page 295 Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 293 of 304 seJnjeeJ 9 OVS soJnjeo4 lt OVS FAQ gt Features cont 10 21 EDL Auto record Each Cinedeck channel RX and newer supports auto record through the use of a simple ASCII text EDL to control the starting and stopping of recording events based on an incoming timecode Version 4 3 enhanced EDL record with deck control providing tape transport control during auto record from a VTR Included in the Cinedeck interface is an EDL editor for creating and modifying EDLs for each channel Additionally Cinedecks running the latest 4 3 version or later support importing CMX 3600 EDLs 1 Optional on ZX 10
149. X3G back Or Tri level sync In Auto mode if no external reference is available the deck will PORTS panel p 49 25 REFERENCE IN panel 249 default to internal sync or video input In dual link when referencing to incoming video reference can be selected from the A or B input 26 V 3 5 RX3G back Channel 1 and 2 3G video outputs Can be paired and function as dual link output IDEO Our panel p49 Can opti U ptionally carry a video super with transport status etc DT NOIN 3 5 RX3G back Channel 1 and 2 3G video inputs Each video input can accept up to 16 channels of pane 649 SDI embedded audio Can be paired and function as dual link input Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 51 of 304 3 6 MX front panel 28 LCD CONTROL PANEL P 53 NOT SHOWN A lt I F FWD STOP Lia T FRAME 1 29 LCD DISPLAY M FRAME P 53 Y AUTOEDIT LCD SCREEN CAN BE TILTED DOWN FOR HIGH RACKMOUNT POSITIONS 30 CARD READERS p 53 31 ESATA Port p 53 32 USB3 Ports P 53 33 CONTROL PANEL P 53 34 HEADPHONE P 53 Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 37 Power BUTTON P 53 36 DRIVE TRAY p 53 35 DRIVE LOCK AND EJECTOR P 53 CAN BE KEY OR TWIST LOCK c Pd rc E Cz x x 2 UN et 2 Q zur O joued 31u0J4J XN Page 52 of 304 MX front panel
150. Z ziziziziziziziziziz ziziziziziziziziziziz C O Qu D O UN 2 z CU oO 5 D UN Z z EPR UI Ln roes Jr H N a y gt pop _ 72050 HE R N N j ou E j m5 HE M NJ N m E j j j Z 72050 avci M RR N sv RF R j j AA eS 720P50 DvcProHD_ A M N too gW m ese hr LI O E meam Ja a pem Ja rl mes es 0 ac E P Pro meam rr aem rl rl rrr ete 0 Le ome ef ERN Cinedeck August 27 2015 14 28 Page 329 of 350 Z Z Codecs amp wrappers cont suoneoii edsg VC 5 72050 eec200 E Jg wow g J _ j po p j p j p _ 720P 59 94 Uncompressed W M M Fed JE R 2005994 DNxHD M N N u5 B R 2 j 720P 5994 ow g H N 20 H H E J _ 720p5994 PoRs M M E Proy j 8 j _ 720p5994 Pos MH H g v S _ 720p5994 Prores M M E noma J JE 720P 59 94 Prores MW M M o SJS 72005994 Prores M M E 44 SJES J 720p5994 xDcamHD Y N N x E E 10 72095994 xDcamHD E N N s J B R j 720P 5994 H264 HE N N ied 1 _ 720P 5994 H264 M N N Ped BE WW j 720P 5994 H264 N N x J SESS _ 720P 5994 H264 E N N px j
151. a box below the channel 1 meter to select a source track for channel 1 and so on For more detail see 5 23 Audio routing on page 161 Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 148 of 304 Master tab cont There are multiple timecode options for your recording Select SDI if you want to record the timecode coming into the recorder embedded in the source video Select LTC 1 2 linear time code to record a house time code source connected to the LTC 1 2 input BNC connector On 4 channel machines ch 3 and 4 use the LTC 3 4 Input BNC connector Select master LTC to use house timecode on the master LTC BNC connection Note master LTC is optional on ZX and not applicable to RX T i Select RS 422 to record timecode from the RS 422 connection 286 TIMECODE ABMS to a slave device see below Select gen to use internally generated timecode See 5 25 TC amp Automation tab on page 168 for details on setting the timecode generator See 124 RS 422 button on page 90 and 145 422 mode on page 95 for more information about setting RS 422 master and slave mode Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 149 of 304 UN D mj 2 et D Ty h CU O D qe Ja1selA Master tab cont Some workflows especially those with very long recording times can benefit from bre
152. a x s v i 05 s pow m weg em mo ms ome Wo mw o afa o EAN E o euo Joy m ome Wo mw e fa HERI E pus ew E Cinedeck August 27 2015 14 28 Page 321 of 350 C O Qu D O UN 2 z CU oO 5 D UN Codecs amp wrappers cont suoneoii edsg 1080P I 1080P sy Jur rtr meo f 1080P 1080P 1080P VC 5 59 29 97 Cineform 1080P VC 5 1080P VC 5 High 29 97 Cineform 9 muss MES Filmscan 1 29 97 Cineform o ois Filmscan 2 29 97 Cineform 1080P VC 5 Kevin 29 97 Cineform ying 1080P mme apre pee rp A a Cus unas L LLL 5 1 rr DEL 1850 Pos H MN MN Poy JE _ 100050 PoRs M M M v j j j 1080050 Prores H BH MN noma JE J 1080050 PRs M M M ro SJES j J 1080P50 Pons M H H 44 8 C O Qu D O UN 2 z CU oO 5 D UN Cinedeck August 27 2015 14 28 Page 322 of 350 Codecs amp wrappers cont suoneoii edsg CIF O e CIFRADO EI OO CO om fal al LIPS 000 a i fal L s oss rapa fom fal al LIPS a a a om O Pr 1080950 JPEG2000 p s me meme FOR d mes o Sm me fafafa few f faf f m m gm oa gg v faf me m gig gw faf f m m gm oa og ee f faf m m afafa a f Jaf f e criom ER qo
153. a drive and destination path Press project path override at the top of the drive list Navigate to the desired drive and folder Press save to return to the master encode setup page For redundant recording both primary and a secondary destination drives must be selected If your preferred destination is not visible additional drives can be moved TC into view with the selection up down arrows and note that any drive already selected as the primary destination will not be visible project path override is also available for the redundant files UN D m 2 et D Ty h o O D 3ll WRITE 312 PRIMARY qe xoJg 313 SECONDARY 314 CHANNEL The channel toggle next ch prev is available on all main setup pages Clicking the 522 Proxy tab right or left arrow allows easy switching to the next or previous channel The input p 159 master and proxy tab names reflect the change displaying the names associated to the selected channel TOGGLE It is possible to apply a character burn in to proxy files during recording The burn in can be timecode system time file name etc To apply a character burn enable burns USA and follow the prompts Press setup to customize the selection and position For additional information see 5 24 Video Burn Settings on Remember a burn in is a permanent part of the video and can not be removed 315 VIDEO BURN Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4
154. accepted The Volume label can be changed to something Format Samsung_512 7361Y G x meaningful for example 850pro512 1234 where 512 is the disk size and 1234 are the last few digits of the disk serial number Select Start and follow the dialogs Capacity 476 GB File system ues Default ki Allocation unit size 4096 bytes Restore device defaults Volume label Samsung 512 7351V Format options vw Quick Format Greate an MS DOS startup disk Page 259 of 304 n D D O D go O a o D samp Puewoy 9 8 Disk caching settings For proper performance on most SSDs Windows Disk Caching should be on A notable exception are the previously supported Vertex drives from OCZ For those Disk Caching should be set to off To check or set Disk Caching access the properties for the disk in question There are several way to get to the disks properties one way is to open Disk Management in Computer Management See 8 1 Device Manager on page 233 EXA File Action View Help cs 2 B Ax E m n D S lt O D go s O z o D Ay Computer Management Local Volume Layout Type File System Status Capacity Free Space Actior El if System Tools C C Simple Basic NTFS Healthy Boot Page File Primary Partition 27 34 GB 7 93 GB EH Task Scheduler C Samsung 512 Simple Basic
155. aders built in 10 40 Pause Record Cinedecks RX and newer support Pause Record where the user can start a long recording session that needs to be encoded as one contiguous file but has breaks in the action During recording the operator can press the Pause Record button whenever needed Recording does not continue but the file remains open When the full event has concluded and the user selects Stop the file is finally closed 10 41 Play Multiple Clips Cinedeck RX and newer decks can play an entire folder of clips with a single click and provide an easy way to select one or more clips to play sequentially in a loop or repeating from start to finish and back to start Ping Pong Page 297 of 304 seJnjeeJ 9 OVS soJnjeo4 lt OVS Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 FAQ gt Features cont 10 42 Playback The I O channels of Cinedeck RXB and newer are full duplex allowing independent control and activities on each channel They support multiple playback record channels which as of version 4 are capable of independently playing or recording any content at its original resolution and frame rate independent of what the other channel s are playing or recording note The previously available RXC is designed for frame synced 3D inputs and does not support full duplex control 10 43 Playlisting The Playlist Manager available from version 4 2 is effectively a non linear
156. age s LOAD pL 54 time If shift is press first playlist manager is opened 3 6 1 MX control When viewi laylist or multiple clips are for pl k pressing n lip SO Narain REISEN en viewing a playlist or multip e clips are oaded for playback pressing next clip 54 moves the playhead to the next clip lt gt lt 3 6 1 MX control When playing a clip or playlist and when working in the clip editor out points can be 60 SET OUT panel on page Pa i E M A a 54 directly set using set out 5 et Q 5 D lt gt lt O O 5 ct o Q 5 D Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 57 of 304 3 6 2 E gt n et Q O This Page intentionally left blank joued 1u0J4J XN Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 58 of 304 3 7 MX Back panel 66 Vipeo I O 1 amp 2 P 60 2 UN et 2 Q zur O j o ma gt Video 3 J 7 KO 67 RS 422 PORTS p 60 o 7 A 5 Video 443 P 60 P 60 70 POWER SUPPLY eued Jpeg XN ALARM IGNORE e o mos P 60 e e ucu m x uses 4 2 AUDIO e 71 MASTER TIMECODE IN amp OUT P 61 m il 77 OPTIONAL NETWORK P 61 72 USB2 ports p 61 78 AES iN amp out 17 32 P 61 73 GB ETHERNET P 61 79 LTC 1 amp 2 IN Loop P 61 ia Ie Hels HOM 80 LTC 3 amp
157. age intentionally left blank Y D lt S D O A C lt D z Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 210 of 304 7 2 Playback single channel view When in playback mode the interface provides most of the same features seen in record mode including access to all of the analysis tools Sm C lt C O a P 212 P 212 TIME P 212 P 212 P 212 2 Dr QD C 426 MULTI VIEW un TOGGLE P 212 D O D gt P 212 5 D 439 P NOT lt PSF ON PAGE 214 438 FILE INFO 433 PLAY HEAD p 214 P 212 437 BACK P 214 434 OPEN CLIP P 212 CONTROLS P 213 P 214 Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 211 of 304 Playback single channel view cont U C 426 MULTI VIEW E The multi view toggle which switches the user interface between multi view and single o Ing i TOGGLE vew p21 remains active during recording and playback a 7 2 Playback The duration of the clip loaded for playback is displayed ingle ch I i j I 427 DUR view p211 If multiple clips or a playlist are loaded the total duration of all clips is displayed 7 2 Playback The start timecode of the clip loaded for playback is displayed single channe e If multiple clips or a playlist are loaded the start timecode of the first clip is displayed
158. age to locate specific controls UN D mj 2 et D Ty ba CU O D 283 284 286 287 289 290 QUALITY WRAPPER TIMECODE SEGMENT PRIMARY SECONDARY P 150 P 151 P 151 291 CHANNEL TOGGLE E em P 147 d Les v BURN P 151 project path project path override override qe 1 Se WN Windows assigns drive letters NOT ALL CINEDECK SYSTEMS HAVE 00 01 00 00 at startup Confirm destination drives before each ALL MASTER CODECS AND WRAPPERS no limit Session 293 CLOSED CAPTIONS P 151 CLOSED CAPTION CAPTURE IS ONLY AVAILABLE FOR MOV WRAPPER copy to other channels 294 vBR ENABLE P 151 295 ENDIAN TYPE P 151 ENDIAN AND VBR CBR SETTINGS See next page for additional controls ONLY FOR MOV Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 145 of 304 Master tab cont The upper portion of the master page contains the key settings for your master encode while the lower half adds several modifiers and utility functions UN D mj 2 et D Ty h CU O D See previous page for additional controls next ch prev wrapper audio TC segment primary secondary video burn SDI burns AVIDMXF BdiSDI 00 00 00 00 off disabled L 2 3 4 HH B El El redundant A 7 HIFI qe Jo1selA DNX220 Network 1 Data PA 15 GB 303 GENERATE
159. ains open like in standard pause mode Then the recently recorded portion of the file is loaded into the special play mode window with active transport controls Multiple channels can be controlled in Pause amp Seek mode making it possible for example to simultaneously build a show master while keeping a few ISO channels in sync with the master or for creating multiple masters with different codec and wrapper combinations Pause amp Seek in File operation is straightforward e Put the channel s in gang record mode and start recording e Pause the recording s e Put the channel s into gang play and cue one of the channels to a starting point in the recorded content Take the channel s out of pause and continue the recording s e After multiple pause and record events stop is pressed to close the file s and recording is complete 93 1934 Jes Sepol N pio35 u Note Currently Pause amp Seek in File is supported with the MOV quicktime wrapper recording ProRes DNxHD and AVC Intra Additional wrappers and codecs will be added in future releases PAUSE amp SEEK IN FILE STANDBY PAUSE amp SEEK IN FILE RECORDING TRANSPORT CONTROLS INACTIVE TRANSPORT CONTROLS INACTIVE 9 I4 u 9935 79 sned Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 101 of 304 Record Modes Pause amp Seek in File cont Once loaded in play mode it is possible to play and scrub the file to selec
160. aking recordings into smaller files UN D m 2 et D Ty h o O D SOME IMPORTANT DETAILS A SEGMENT IS A CLOSED FULLY SELF CONTAINED FILE SEGMENTED FILE NAMING INCLUDES AUTOMATIC NUMBERING TO INDICATE THE RELATION TO OTHER SEGMENTS TIMECODE CONTINUITY IS MAINTAINED BETWEEN SEGMENTS MEANING THE TIMECODE OF EACH SEGMENT STARTS ON THE NEXT FRAME AFTER THE PREVIOUS SEGMENT BREAKING FILES CAN BE USEFUL FOR MAKING CONTENT WHILE RECORDING IS STILL PROCEEDING WHEN FILES ARE EVENTUALLY DESTINED FOR DRIVES WHICH HAVE FILE SIZE LIMITS TO PROTECT CONTENT IN THE CASE OF MAJOR SYSTEM FAILURES 521 M t t b xs me H M s 287 SEGMENT EC E Select increment to break files at pre determined time intervals Click on duration to open the on screen panel and set the clip segment length The shortest interval possible is 30 seconds qe Jo1selA Select manual break to allow manual breaking of files by pressing the break button on the main screen The break button replaces the record button after recording starts Select TC break to have the system automatically generate a new file at any incoming timecode break There are several options for writing media files Single writes the selected encode to a single destination drive e Redundant writes the selected encode to two drives simultaneously e Rollover writes the selected encode to the first selected drive and when that dest
161. al A structure and press a sub folder to navigate down one level in the folder hierarchical O structure gt The folder and sub folder columns work the same way and in conjunction with E each other to allow better folder navigation and visibility LO m Press a folder to select it E 443 FOLDER Press up one level to move a level higher in the folder hierarchical structure and press a sub folder to navigate down one level in the folder hierarchical structure The clip list displays all of the Cinedeck accessible media files within the selected folder The default is thumbs a thumbnail view but there is also a list view available with more content information see 457 list view toggle on page 221 444 cup LIST 7 3 Clip manager Below the clip list are navigation arrows which become active for moving through lists which contain more entries than can be displayed on one screen Note clip manager only shows media files recognized by the Cinedeck It is possible that folders contain other non media files which are not shown There are several list sorting controls located above the clip list in thumbs and list view Press a sort name to sort the list by that data Press the same sorting name p 215 again to sort the list in reverse order The selected sort and sort direction is indicated by the green arrow list by name 446 SCROLL 73 Clip manager This control is only visible when list view is active COL
162. always have the ability to add extra capabilities if your workflow changes Built behind the front panel are Two USB ports e Four removable drive trays each of which can hold two SATA drives ZX is available in three base models ZX is a two channel system ZX is a four channel system which when fully loaded most closely matches MX ZX is a four channel system which in terms of pure processing power is a step above MX Internally ZX provides two or four full duplex 3G channels with an optional selection of master and proxy formats and high bandwidth network capabilities In HD and SD mode ZX records master and proxy for each channel With the appropriate options ZX records 4K files up to 60p along with HD master files HD proxy files and h 264 streamable files with or without LUT applied ZX comes with e Localized power cables e One USB software installation disk Restore disk e Ifyou purchased accessories such as media drives or a rack kit with your Cinedeck they will be included in a separate box Please check to ensure that all expected contents are included In the event something is missing please immediately contact your reseller or Cinedeck Support See Contacting Cinedeck on page 2 Page 35 of 304 xog y ui S JEUM XZ A99P9UI Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 2 4 Features 2 4 1 Hardware The overall design and build of each Cinedeck mod
163. an at 449 FIND MEDIA R EE the lower right of the viewer screen For smaller drives scan folder for media can be used First select a drive and then select scan folder for media Use scan disk for folders to only populate the database with folders containing media Use scan for media disks to force the system to rescan the hardware ports for drives Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 217 of 304 egKe d Jabeuew di 5 Clip manager cont Use manage disk to perform tasks such as drive formatting Destructive functions will be grayed out and unavailable if disable file delete and disk erase is enabled on the prefs page See 386 prefs on page 184 Use format NTFS to format the selected drive using the recommended NTFS file system format Formatting drives is recommended when setting up for a new recording session Use format exFAT to format the selected drive using the exFAT file system exFAT is convenient for Apple computers however better is for the Apple computers to have NTFS read and if needed write capabilities Use erase to delete all of the content from the selected disk This can be a bit faster but formatting is recommended 7 3 Clip manager 450 MANAGE DISK p 215 If you want to remove a drive from the system first select it and then press eject Remember that Cinedeck SSDs are often installed two drives in a sled so b
164. and file names They are particularly useful in that multiple scene names can be created in advance and then during a production the current scene can be quickly selected by toggling through the list using keyboard shortcut keys Projects can effectively have an unlimited number of scenes and sub scenes See Each scene and sub scene can also have metadata associated to it such as day night etc This metadata is primarily meant for slate burn in an upcoming feature for automatically adding a slate at the head of each clip recording for a user defined number of frames scenes list 92eJ193UT Jes P 135 254 CURRENT PROJECT DISPLAY P 135 255 SCENES LIST P 135 x S D 2 et 3 D gt QD O D gt new scene Ctri N Uh rename scene Ctrl R 261 SCENE LIST a SCROLL P 136 5 not conic 7 D 256 MANAGE SCENES manage scene one Ui BUTTON P 1 3 5 scenes metadata a input Ln et 257 SCENE METADATA P 135 258 CHANNEL 259 CANCEL 260 SAVE amp CLOSE ASSIGNMENTS P 136 BUTTON P 136 BUTTON P 136 Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 134 of 304 Project manager Scenes list cont 5 19 6 Scenes list The selector tabs are always visible in the project manager setup area These can be 253 PAGE TABS 134 l l p 134 clicked to provide direct access to each setup section 254 CURRENT 5 196 Scenes list The
165. and remove disconnect any media drives 2 Insert the Cinedeck restore key into a rear USB port and connect a keyboard to a rear USB port 3 Power on the Cinedeck and e For RX3G keep tapping the F7 key until you enter the startup menu For MX or ZX keep tapping the F8 key until you enter the startup menu Select the USB flash drive not the one with UEFI in the name press enter The restore process is fairly automated and takes about 10 minutes Some systems may present additional prompts To confirm the restore type y and press enter When finished the screen will display press enter to continue Press enter Select 0 to power off the system remove the restore USB stick Power on the Cinedeck and the system has been restored ae B Install any recent software update See 9 12 Updates on page 269 Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 282 of 304 9 18 Update a USB restore key Updating a restore key is simply a matter of replacing a few image files however they are several gigabytes in size so should be downloaded with a proper FTP application such as Filezilla when time is not of the essence Ideally the following will be done on a Windows PC or directly on the Cinedeck For the FTP location of the current restore disk updates for your system contact Cinedeck See Contacting Cinedeck on page 2 For RX e Download XPE full zip to the local computer preferably using an
166. and selecting which SOURCE gt FILE MAPPING source channels are directed to which tracks in the target file 181 DISABLE REMOTE TRACK ARM See 5 11 6 Insert Audio Matrix on page 108 for detail This matrix display shows the current audio channel selections Highlighted channels are available to be used highlighted channels are currently active J91se A pueqaseg 1Jesuj 183 FILE AUDIO OVERVIEW Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 107 of 304 5 11 6 Insert Audio Matrix The Insert edit source to file mapping screen is used to route incoming channels to file channels as well as to activate or deactivate file channels controlling whether they are available to be inserted into 92e1193UT Jes SOURCE SELECTOR MATRIX AVAILABLE FOR EACH CHANNEL AUDIO METERS INDICATE LEVELS FOR AUDIO COMING IN VIA SDI OR AES SOURCE TO FILE SELECTORS AVAILABLE FILE CHANNEL INDICATORS Sepol N p402e8y CLICK A SOURCE CHANNEL TO OPEN THE SOURCE SELECTOR MATRIX AND SELECT AN INCOMING CHANNEL CLICK TO DISABLE ENABLE FILE CHANNELS YES ENABLED NO DISABLED Uu D S ct gt C O lt C ct X Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 108 of 304 5 12 Create Black File When you create a blacked file you pre stripe it with format codec timecode audio tracks etc e Wor
167. ansion the data associated to the title which is inserted into a name at record time See 5 19 5 Edit user amp global wildcards on page 132 A ns When this button is active file naming for related slave encodes such as name templates a proxy follow the master file naming template When inactive aqua all related USE SAME TEMPLATES p 124 U l encodes can have their own file naming template 5 192 Path amp file This switches the template overview to display the master file path and name details 231 MASTER name templates a p 124 If all encoders use same templates is active the other tabs are not relevant When all encoders use same templates is these additional tabs are not 5192 path amp file relevant as the master template dictates all path and file names 232 PROXY name templates When all encoders use same templates is not active this and other related encoder p 124 S tabs which are visible in other modes switch the template overview to display and allow editing the proxy and other related encode file path and name details Jobeueuu pelold UU CU ct 2 go D J CU j D c D pol CU c D Uu Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 127 of 304 5 19 3 Path editor You use the path editor to create the folder structure where your files will be written The interface for naming folders and files us
168. ated metadata The name reflects the channel name variable or wild card shown also at the top of the 519 Project Setup screen in the page tab bar The input name variable can also be used in folder 208 NAME manager and file names By default these are sequentially named input 1 input 2 etc Click os here to open an on screen keyboard to change the name This name can also be changed on the project overview page The label is an additional channel specific metadata field which can be used in folder 209 LABEL pori qd and file naming By default these are sequentially named input 1 input 2 etc Click p 119 here to open an on screen keyboard to change the name This name can also be changed on the project overview page Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 120 of 304 Project manager cont This critical section which is visible on all project management related screens is where you can see which channels are associated to the currently selected project and assign one or 210 PROJECT lt gt 5 19 Project more channels to a selected project manager CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT p 119 93 1934 Jes To associate channels to projects Select a project in the project list Select one or more channels by clicking the video preview thumbnail BIBINB indicates a channel is selected BgUaEbBIUe is available but not selected L LII Made Nd U TU C iqne Q LO Me INE orole whi SE CT
169. ation is far out of adjustment you may need a mouse to reach the desktop icon and gain access to the calibration tools n D y lt O D go s O eJ D Linearization Curve Follow the prompts and when the targets appear use a proper screen stylus or similar screen safe pointer to select the mid point of each of the nine targets The edge of a pencil eraser will do in a pinch Navigate to the the touchscreen icon to start the touchscreen tools ARIES Q O Select the Tools tab from the dialog which opens and select Linearization to start the 9 points calibration n This only takes about two minute so is well worth the benefits over the basic 4 points calibration s gt z i LCD screens can be damaged by sharp objects Q Edge Compensation Hardware About v So Q ae O gt m Dod points alignment ta match display 4 Points Calibration Clear linearization parameter and do 4 points alignment A small timer runs next to the targets e PE indicating the time left before the b 3 points linearization for better touchscreen Ikan process self cancels Do draw test to verify the touch accuracy When the last target is done the system will recalibrate and indicate when the process is complete Select OK and the main dialog can be closed Cancel Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 248
170. ayhead to the end of the loaded clip See note below Press to activate continuous looping playback Long press to select continuous ping pong playback Select jog to activate touch transport in jog mode Jog by pressing making rotating movements When multiple clips or a playlist are loaded the mode changes Press cue next to move the playhead to the next clip Page 213 of 304 Sm C lt C O a M IA aUUeYD Buis gt 35eq e d Playback single channel view cont Loaded clips and playlists can be restricted by edit points set directly in JETER the play interface these edit points are not saved with the clip First press the 436 EDIT POINTS single channel command and then the type of point i e press set and then press in The T and O keys on a connected keyboard can also be used to set in and out points 72 Playback Pressing back returns the screen to the multi or single channel standby view 437 BACK single channel Sm C lt C O a for the clip or clips 55 playback Select this for playback if your files contain true progressive frames vs the more 439 P NOT PSF single channel common progressive segmented frames PSF progressive frames divided and ve 2D interlaced for compatibility with a broader range of video equipment The file info region shows format audio file name and path information for the 55 playback current file
171. basic information about your computer gi Device Manager Windows edition Windows Embedded Standard Copyright 2010 Microsoft Corporation All rights reserved n D y lt O D go s O z eJ D Remote settings Bg System protection In the properties dialog select System Protection to open the System T Service Pack 1 i Advanced system settings O Protection tab in the 3 11 is IH a System Properties dialog v System D Rating 5 Windows Experience Index y Processor Intel R Core TM i 3770 CPU im 3 40GH2 3 40 GHz m Installed memory RAM 8 00 GB 7 88 GB usable O System type 64 bit Operating System D Pen and Touch No Pen or Touch Input is available For this Display 5 i Computer name domain and workgroup settings O 3 ee also Ea Computer name Cinedeck PC Change settings J Full computer name Cinedeck PC Windows Update Computer description Performance Information and Tools Workgroup WORKGROUP Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 270 of 304 Create a restore point cont xi Highlight Local Disk C System from the Protection Settings 9 qnoJ 79 e2lAJ8g Computer Name Hardware Advanced System Protection Remote drive list Use system protection to undo unwanted system changes and ey restore previous versions of files what iz system protection 1 Select Configure You can undo s
172. c cinedeck But all of the files you might need to work with can be saved to or retrieved from your preferred media and location such as one of your media drives a network folder or simply a newly inserted USB memory stick Most often you will have access to the various save functions via a menu located at the lower left of the screen As an example these are the functions available from manage projects All options will not be available on every menu but they are all similar Whether you select save as or export the procedure is the same and is made in two steps however save as places the file in the default folder location while export provides full flexibility as to the destination used 1 Atthe next dialog after you select save as or export you must enter a name in the name field This can be any standard name acceptable to Windows but again for word separation it is recommended to use or and not spaces bunJuoduui bunaodxe sSBunieg Once you have entered a name with either the on screen or USB keyboard and selected save and close 2 Select a destination drive and folder at the left and once the file destination drive and folder are determined select save at the bottom right and you are done Importing a file such as a scenes list or opening a file such as a LUT is the same procedure in reverse Select Import or open e Navigate to the source drive and folder and select the r
173. can 1 Data rates cont 720P 50 720P 50 720P 50 720P 50 720P 50 720P 50 720P 50 720P 50 0 35 720P 50 720P 50 720P 50 H 264 720P 50 720P 50 H 264 Full HD UN 4 D O Em O OU cr O ES T H 264 Cineform UP oho DAX_2800 EM High 720P 59 94 H 264 Full HD VC 5 720P 59 94 H 264 350kbs Cineformj H 264 Main Filmscan 1 720P 59 94 Wane Proxy l N 720P 59 94 JFIF10 1m Cineform VC 5 720P 59 94 JFIF 2 1 720P 50 Cineform 720P 59 94 JFIF 20 1 Keyin 720P 59 94 JFIF 10 1 JPEG 2000 VL 720P 59 94 AVC I 50 720P 50 220Mbit ETE 720P 59 94 AVC I 100 720P 59 94 DVCProHD 100 1 4 6 9 1 3 2 0 2 So 8J eje 2 8 3 50 100 00 Uncompressed 720P50 H264350kbs 0 35 HAUS suse Fixed 720P 59 94 720P 59 94 DNxHD 145 Sa ES Sa Sa ESSE E 100 100 _ VC 5 PAY R 720P 59 94 Cineform ES 720P 59 94 Medium VC 5 Cineform Low 720P 50 035 720P 50 720P 50 720P 50 720P 50 720P 50 720P 50 720P 50 1 720P 50 1 VC 5 PAYS S Cineform Low VC 5 720P 50 Cineform Medium 720P 59 94 VC 5 720P 59 94 720P5994 Cineform 720P 59 94 Jis sage fea 720P 59 94 heo m 720P 59 94 Filmscan 1 ELS VC 5 720P 59 94 720P 59 94 Cineform 720P 59 94 Filmscan 2 720P 59 94 VC 5 720P 59 94 H 264 DAX 720P 59 94 Cineform Keying 19 2 1 2 38 5 50 3 7 8 3 50 00 00 Cinedeck August 27 2015 14 28 Page 346 of 350 Data rates cont m xe VL
174. close setup and go back to the main screen page 181 connections are available they will all be listed a 526 Prefs tab on The phone number for Cinedeck support and the current software version are page Lo displayed here Please see Contacting Cinedeck on page 2 before calling 5 26 Prefs tab on 392 SYSTEM Sade UN D m 2 et D Ty h o O D 393 USE OLD DRIVE 5 26 Prefs tab on MAPPING page 181 qe Sjald Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 186 of 304 9 26 1 Ul mode UI mode on the prefs tab sets the basic operation of your Cinedeck The modes available can differ depending on the hardware and software installed however all systems have two or four channel YUV which is the standard mode for multi channel SD HD recording and playback Important When changing modes you will be prompted to allow the Cinedeck application to automatically restart and reconfigure the associated hardware Press No to cancel the mode change Y UV INPUT MODE IS THE STANDARD OPERATIONAL MODE FOR A CINEDECK IT ALLOWS MASTER AND PROXY ENCODING FOR EACH 1 5 oR 3G INPUT FOR OPERATIONAL DETAILS SEE 5 0 USER INTERFACE ON PAGE 7 4 NOT ALL SYSTEMS SUPPORT FULL GOP RECORDING ON ALL 3G INPUTS SIMULTANEOUSLY SEE 11 0 SPECIFICATIONS ON PAGE 305 FOR MORE INFORMATION 3G LeveL B RGB Is AN UPCOMING RGB INPUT MODE DUAL LINK 1 5G RGB Is A SETTING FOR SOURCE DEVICES WHICH OU
175. codecs or master and proxy combinations may not be available on a specific system Additionally some codecs such as Cineform and JPEG2000 are not standard on any systems MOV workflow package includes all MOV wrapped codecs Common for FCP and Adobe environments OpAtom workflow package includes all MXF OpAtom wrapped codecs Normally for Avid environments Opla workflow package includes all MXF Opla wrapped codecs Common for Adobe environments suoneoii edsg The Quality Bit rate noted in this table reflects the common descriptions for the selected codec which is how the codecs are described in the Cinedeck interface For specific target data rates and a storage calculator see 11 3 Data rates on page 339 If there is a specific question feel free to contact us for clarification See Contacting Cinedeck on page 2 C O Qu D O UN 2 z CU oO 5 D UN 1080050 Uncompressed W M W Fed X MH 10050 DwHD M M N o6 E ER j 18050 DwxHD M N N Uo y y j 108050 DwHD M M N 15 E R X j 100550 PoRs M M E Proy SJES Froeoiso Pors 3 E Y Tioeciso PoRs 3 Noma T r I io80iso Pors 3 E X n mis Pors R E 3 e Ti j 108050 xomo n on mua 3 w r 3 j MEE xomo N N m X131 Liwoso
176. common for T frame intra frame encoding INDICATOR view onpage The proxy indicates 10 which is indicative of a long GoP recording in this case 200 H 264 The numbers after the indicate frame buffer usage for file writing Generally the write buffer should be at zero It may bump up occasionally especially when segment mode file break is triggered If the buffer constantly climbs or constantly pulses that is indicative of more serious file write issue This could be a failing drive a drive controller which cannot handle the contrinious data stream bandwidth issues etc OMNE As noted the one difference between standby mode and recording when in single ecoraing Hu HJ 413 ENCODE single channel channel view is that when recording the area between slate and disk opens up to OVERVIEW view onpage reveal a data rate display for each encode 200 MN See 156 encode overview on page 96 for additional details 62 Recording Pressing stop ends a current recording single channel view on pace Note that MIA JaUUeUD Buis Hulpsoday 414 STOP BUTTON 200 Tf gang is in use all selected channels will stop Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 203 of 304 6 3 This Page intentionally left blank Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 204 of 304 Buipio3z5 uq 7 0 Playback Becaus
177. cont On a system that is running properly in a good environment it should not happen but it is possible that during a session a frame of video will be lost Although not common with a clean system dropped frames can be caused by many factors The most common are external such as poor video cables and connections unstable video sources power surges and dirty power unstable sync and so on It is also possible 271 FRAME DROP 520Inputtab that the Cinedeck has a more local issue such as a storage problem failing I O card or BEHAVIOR p 138 a card which has worked itself loose in transport You have an option as to how you want your Cinedeck to respond if a dropped frame is detected it can stop recording or not It is generally recommended to set the system to ignore You will still receive a warning so can always manually stop but in general one dropped frame should not halt a production The channel toggle next ch prev is available on all main setup pages Clicking the 272 CHANNEL 520Inputtab right or left arrow allows easy switching to the next or previous channel The input TOGGLE p 138 master and proxy tab names reflect the change displaying the names associated to the selected channel Cinedecks are capable of using tri level or black burst reference or sync sources When set to auto and no external reference is connected the system will lock to the incoming video source When set to auto and ther
178. cted destination drive folder and CNN MEN ix file naming variables and text related to the master primary and redundant encodes Clicking in this area switches to the master encode page 193 PROXY ENCODER 5 18 Overview tab The proxy encoder region displays all of the settings related to the proxy encode SETTINGS Clicking in this area switches to the proxy encode setup page The proxy file destinations section displays the selected destination drive folder and file naming variables and text related to the proxy primary and redundant encodes Clicking in this area switches to the proxy encode page Name reflects the channel name variable or wild card shown also at the top of the 5 18 Overview tab Setup screen in the page tab bar The input name variable can also be used in folder 40 115 and file names By default these are sequentially named input 1 input 2 etc Click here to open an on screen keyboard to change the name Label is an additional channel specific metadata field which can be used in folder and 196 LABEL a18 Overview tab e file naming By default these are sequentially named input 1 input 2 etc Click here to open an on screen keyboard to change the name Preview is a thumbnail of that channels active video The thumbnails can also be clicked to toggle between channels displayed The orange bordered channels is the selected channel 198 preview LUT 518 Overview tab Preview LUT indicates if a LUT is ac
179. current project display indicates the selected project for which you would be 5196 Scenes listi pro play pro J PROJECT DISPLAY p 134 managing scenes The scenes list displays all of the currently available scenes The selected scene is colored and bordered If you are using the scene wildcard in your folder 5 19 6 Scenes list Or file naming select a scene and then save and close to designate that scene as p 134 the current scene to be used in the name of the next recording Scenes can also be selected using shortcut keys on a USB keyboard from the main multi view and single channels views See 5 3 Keyboard shortcuts on page 77 93 1934 Jes 255 SCENES LIST Manage scenes provides access to Creating new scenes Deleting the selected scene Renaming the selected scene Exporting the current scenes list When 3 19 6 Scenes list exporting a scenes list you can save it in any destination p 134 and you must provide a name Scenes lists use the csl extension Importing scenes list Scenes lists are actually xml files with a csl extension Standard ASCII text files which contain Just scene names one on each line with the txt extension can also be imported Maa C Y list The scene metadata button opens a small pop up window for selecting changing preset scene related metadata such as slate number day night etc x S D 2 et 3 D gt QD O D um 256 MANAGE SCENES BUTTON I
180. cx n Ld Ld era Ds am cuu L w lt LE aao Ll eo d Ld nn emam LI ra mo DR o na CHANNEL PAIR SELECTOR 9 BUTTONS u SELECTED CHANNEL IS HIGHLIGHTED Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 98 of 304 5 11 Record Modes Record mode selects between the different recording capabilities such as pause and insert which should not be confused with UI mode which selects between different basic I O settings such as HD and AK For additional information on UI mode see 5 26 1 UI mode on page 187 normal Used for standard recording e pause Ingest stops but the file is not closed e pause amp seek in file Ingest stops the file is not closed in points can be set e insert baseband Allows inserting audio and video into a flat file UN D mj 2 et D i h CU O D 5 11 1 Normal Normal record mode is used for typical single and multi channel recording and playback tasks JO D O O 9 11 2 Pause a Pause record mode is used in situations where a long recording session will be broken up by periods where lt no useful action is occurring Typically in such situations recording will be stopped but each normal stop start G R D generates a new file which is sometimes undesirable When in pause mode the record button changes to u paus
181. d as EDL csl Cinedeck scenes and sub scenes list XML format e cinedeck db a sql databased used to track content e dmp Crash dump files e prefs ini holds basic system and mode parameters If deleted this file will be rebuilt on restart xml XML formatted project files channel files etc txt Log files are saved as txt files cube Cinedecks currently only recognize cube LUT files bunJuoduui bunaodxe sSBuneg Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 86 of 304 9 Multi view screen description ISS To start the Cinedeck from the desktop locate and double click the Cinedeck short cut This will open the main multi view screen with the channels in standby 92eJ193UJ Jes In standard SD HD mode there is one quadrant for each channel so depending on your Cinedeck model there will be two or four quadrants Below is the dual channel view from a RX3G Surrounding each channel video preview are multiple data areas for immediate access to the most important details and buttons for accessing the most important functions Note the yellow border around the right channel which indicates it is the selected channel the channel with the focus SDI MR R N P SDI MR PR 00 07 19 23 unset ma me 00 07 19 23 aos uodili5s p USSIIS MAIA NIN Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 87 of 304 5 8 Multi view sc
182. d close confirms any changes closes the project setup screens and BUTTON 128 returns to the main setup area JO3Ipa yed Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 129 of 304 5 19 4 File name editor The file name editor is where you create the structure to determine your file names All naming of folders files etc uses the same basic procedure the difference being that some variables or wildcards may not be available The upper template field is where you enter the wildcards and text which forms the name You may select wildcards using the wildcard shortcut buttons or directly type them in along with any other required text using the on screen or an attached USB keyboard You can also utilize Windows copy amp paste in the template field 93 1934 Jes 240 CURRENT PROJECT P 131 template P Wl E vt 241 TEMPLATE P 131 lt T to 242 EXPANSION P 131 Project Scene Sub Input Input Encoder Proxy 8 digit Take Roll user 1 user 2 user 3 user 4 user 5 Scene Name Label start counter counter TC 243 WILDCARD SHORTCUTS P 131 date in date in date in 4 digit 2 digit 2 digit 2 digit 6 digit 2 digit 2 digit 2 digit day of day of Unix US EU year yeat month day time hour minute second week week format format format 0 23 short x x S D Q et 3 D gt QD O D gt 8 244 ON SCREEN KEYBOARD P 131 JO3Ipe euueu 3J IJ A 2 245
183. deck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 198 of 304 Recording multi view cont 61 Recording Gang mode is also in effect for stopping a recording If staggered mode is in use 401 GANG BUTTON multi view on stopping each channel also happens sequentially one by one after the user defined peac time delay The frame buffer indicator provides very useful real time details on recording and drive performance The top row indicates the master encode The second row indicates the proxy encode Buipio3z5 uq The numbers to the left of the indicate frame buffer usage for encoding and will be different for different codecs In this case the counter for the master is zero Low 402 FRAME BUFFER EE numbers like 0 or 1 are common for T frame intra frame encoding INDICATOR page 197 The proxy indicates 10 which is indicative of a long GoP recording in this case H 264 The numbers after the indicate frame buffer usage for file writing Generally the write buffer should be at zero It may bump up occasionally especially when segment mode file break is triggered If the buffer constantly climbs or constantly pulses that is indicative of more serious file write issue This could be a failing drive a drive controller which cannot handle the contrinious data stream bandwidth issues etc ES D O O gt e 3 ct ES p 2 When touched or clicked
184. dently from other channels In the multi view image above channel 1 is in play mode while channel 2 is in standby and could record when needed Below only channel 1 of the multi view is shown 416 start END 417 ELAPSED 418 IN our P 207 TIME P 207 P 207 TRANSPORT P 207 415 MULTI VIEW TOGGLE P 207 P 207 r on au Liv PHN Rn E PS ra Tira P 207 P 207 423 OPEN P 207 CONTROLS P 208 P 208 Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 egKe d Y D lt S D a A C lt D z Page 206 of 304 Playback multi view cont Sm C lt C O a 415 MULTI VIEW E The multi view toggle which switches the user interface between multi view and single TOGGLE page 206 remains active during recording and playback The start and end timecodes of the clip loaded for playback are displayed 1 Playback Tf multiple clips are loaded the start timecode of the first clip and the end timecode 416 srART END multi view on ML page 206 of the last is displayed If a playlist is loaded the start and end timecodes of the loaded playlist are displayed 1 Playback Whether a single clip multiple clips or a playlist is loaded elapsed time shows the 417 ELAPSED TIME multi view on w page 206 time duration between the start and the current play head position enm l a U 71 Playback IN and Out i
185. des Insert Baseband Master cont The device control selector is used to designate whether the user 5 11 5 Insert 92e1193UT Jes BG peace GENTIS 5 E r ciet interface is focused on and controlling the local master recorder or on page 105 the source player The selection is active Selects between recording modes See 5 11 Record Modes on page 99 s115Inset normal Used for standard recording 167 RECORD MODE Baseband Master e pause mode Ingest stops but the file is not closed on page 105 ii e e pause amp seek in file Ingest stops the file is not closed an in point can be set e insert baseband Allows inserting audio and video into a flat file RS 422 selects remote control modes between off master slave and VDCP slave a 5 1151 t _ 1 168 RS 422 MODE TP RA RS 422 modes can be set independently for each channel a onpage 105 Select master mode to control a connected device from the Cinedeck al Slave and VDCP slave allow external systems to control the selected channel z 169 EDIT POINT 115 Insert Shows the in and out points set for the target file O Baseband Master Q DISPLAY on page 105 D UN The on screen edit point controls can be used for setting and clearing the edit points for the target file loaded in the master channel Click set and then in to set the in point lode Click set and out to set the out point Baseband Master 170 EDIT POINT
186. ding production environments Cinedecks Plug amp Play nature supported by an intuitive easy to navigate user inter face with a full array of analysis tools allow you to quickly setup and manage your sessions This is enhanced by the project orientation of your Cinedeck Leveraging the Cinedeck project based design allows you to have as needed full channel flexibility allowing completely separate settings between channels or uniform and simulta neous changes across multiple channels CODECS First and foremost Cinedeck provides native support for the widest variety of codecs and file wrappers in the industry and is continuously adding to the list Of course where appropriate you can optionally select from multiple file wrappers such as true native Avid OP Atom MXF MOV and MXF OP 1A and others C 5 D O D O A x O O C O et O lt b gt lt D 2 Coming in a later release Cinedeck will enhance the product line with ArriRAW and CanonRAW recording Additionally Cinedeck MX and RX3G handle 422 or 444 color sampling and bit depths of 8bit and 10bit to ren der your content as accurately as possible STORAGE Cinedecks offer the ability to write both master and proxy files for each input and when it comes to writing your files no other product comes close to Cinedecks flexibility of recording internally to local attached drives and to network storage For internal recording Cinedeck relies on standard 2 5 SSD
187. display shows the current timecode which will be recorded 5 9 Single channel Indicates the end timecode of the previous or most recent recording view p 93 Selects between recording modes See 5 11 Record Modes on page 99 zi e D O D qu ES p z normal Used for standard recording 5 9 Single channel 144 RECORD MODE Vien 1055 pause Ingest stops but the file is not closed pause amp seek Ingest stops file is not closed in points can be set insert baseband Allows inserting audio and video into a flat file Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 94 of 304 Single channel view cont RS 422 selects remote control modes between off master slave and VDCP slave 5 9 Single channel RS 422 modes can generally be set independently for each channel view p 93 Select master mode to control a connected device from the Cinedeck Slave and VDCP slave allow external systems to control the selected channel 145 422 MODE 92eJ193UT Jes Activates recording 5 9 Single channel In Gang mode recording will be triggered on multiple channels 4ew p 9 e In EDL record mode this button will display and load the first EDL event e Depending on the mode after recording starts the button name can change Besides off Gang record mode has two modes normal which simultaneously triggers 5 9 Single channel all selected cha
188. dules and an advanced scheduling interface will be developed in combination with an upcoming release 1 Optional on ZX 10 54 Segment Record Segment Record also known as user defined chunking allows long recordings to be split into clip segments of shorter duration During recording each time the user specified duration is reached or the manual break button is pressed the current file is closed and the next segment file begins Previous segments can be fully accessed for playing and copying etc Additionally breaking large recordings into smaller pieces allows content to be easily transferred to storage with file size limits such as DVDs or FAT32 drives 10 55 Signal Generator Version 4 5 and later versions of the Cinedeck interface provide a multi purpose signal generator for test image and tone generation Test patterns test pattern sequences tone with breaks and solo tone for each channel can be used between channels as well as fed downstream for testing connected equipment 10 56 Stereo 3D An upcoming release will re activate 3D recording allowing RX3G and newer recorders to use any supported codec Display modes include Anaglyph Flip Flop and vertical horizontal side by side viewing of 3D images 1 Optional on ZX note RXC with version 3 5 currently supports 3D recording 10 57 Storage Options All Cinedecks write video and audio recordings as files to low cost and commonly available non proprietary
189. e the tape or reel ID name associated with each recorded clip Note that tape reel ID 225 TAPE REEL ID name templates 124 93 1934 Jes uses the same procedures and variables available for file names See 5 19 4 File name editor on page 130 Displays the file name and file name template Click here to customize the file name 5 19 2 Path amp file 226 FILE NAME name templates E l ROM 226 eae pp 124 to be used for each recorded clip See 5 19 4 File name editor on page 130 227 REDUNDANT 5192 path amp fie Displays the folder structure path and path template which will be used for We name templates redundant files if redundant file writing is active Click the template area to customize pos the redundant folder structure See 5 19 3 Path editor on page 128 5192 Path amp file Displays the folder structure path and path template which will be used for primary 228 PRIMARY PATH name templates files Click the template area to customize the primary file folder structure See 5 19 3 oe Path editor on page 128 Accompanying the many system and project based wildcards the Cinedeck system also has six global wildcards which are static meaning they are available for regularly 229 GLOBAL S d used data that is common between projects such as a facility or department ID WILDCARDS p 124 Like user wildcards global wildcards have a title which identifies the wildcard in the wildcard list and an exp
190. e 102 of 304 Record Modes Insert Baseband cont 5 11 4 Insert Baseband Insert Baseband mode allows the replacement of content in any selected region of many closed file types The user can open a file on the Cinedeck set an in and out point along with the appropriate video and or audio channels which need replacing and trigger insert recording to fill in the selected area with whatever is coming into the SDI input Inserts can be video audio or audio with video 93 1934 Jes Cinedeck Insert Edit currently supports ProRes DNxHD and AVC Intra in a MOV quicktime MXF Opla or MXF OpAtom wrapper Target files can be Cinedeck generated or come from elsewhere however ProRes files which were generated elsewhere likely need to be re wrapped as ProRes is normally VBR variable bit rate and the insert process requires the content to be CBR constant bit rate This is a fast file copy process which is done from Cinedeck s clip manager See 452 manage clips on page 220 under Clip Manager 61 y 2 o Mei PES Inserting into a prerecorded file is analogous n 4 M as wa to inserting into a prerecorded tape and the HMM Be gt EM t s po p402e8y same analogy of working with a pre blacked or pre striped tape also exists in the file world with Cinedeck s ability to create a blacked file Just like a tape when you create Ly z a blacked file you pre stripe it with
191. e and the system functions much like a traditional analog tape recorder In pause mode before initial recording starts the record button is in its normal condition After recording starts the record button changes to a pause button Zz When pause is pressed ingest is halted the file remains in an open but e static state and the record pause button changes name to resume gt When in resume the record red border indicator will blink on and off indicating that record mode is still active but ingest has been paused Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 99 of 304 Record Modes Pause cont It is also important to understand that when pause is active it is active for all channels associated to the selected project Also pause can be used in conjunction with gang mode so you can control multiple channels in pause mode simultaneously UN D mj 2 et D Ty h CU O D PAUSE RECORD ACTIVE AND PAUSED FOR TWO CHANNELS S9PON p402e8y osneg Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 100 of 304 Record Modes Pause amp Seek in File cont 5 11 3 Pause amp Seek in File Pause amp Seek in File is similar to pause mode but pause amp seek in file also mimics the assemble edit mode commonly used on a tape machine In pause amp seek when pause is pressed ingest is halted and the file rem
192. e to open a setting panel per take timecode resets to the selected time for each recording e See 358 Special timecode modes on page 173 for additional details C Ro gt ct O CU ct O ct CU O Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 172 of 304 TC amp Automation tab cont Cinedecks have some specialized timecode modes for control by Spirit Telecine systems DVS Clipster workstations Avid Media Composer etc The functionality is similar to record run mode however a critical offset is included to fine tune the relation between the Cinedeck and the connected system This offset adjusts the background timecode prerecord countdown to prevent false starts and assure frame accuracy The best way to determine the offset is to edit video that includes a sequence source timecode burn in When you perform inserts the Cinedeck regenerates L S the sequence source timecode for alignment so the decus i piles recorded file timecode should match the burn in timecode If the file timecode is later add that many frames to the offset If its earlier subtract that number of frames from the offset Once set the offset is saved with the project settings MC is further discussed here 8 4 Avid Digital Cut on page 239 a MM If you need specifics about use with Telecine Clipster or other outboard equipment feel free to contact Cinedeck Contacting Cinedeck
193. e EDLs It is made up of two sections the events list left and the event editor right When you select an event in the list its time data is automatically loaded into the event editor To change that events details make the changes and press enter If you want to insert an event into the list first select an event above or below where the new event should go Then edit the data for the new event and press insert before or insert after To add an event to the end of the list set the data in the event editor and press append Cinedeck EDLs contain start and end times and optionally a master and or proxy file name For a sample EDL see 363 EDL NAME 364 FILE NAME 367 our 1C 368 DURATION P 177 P 177 NAME P 177 P 177 P 177 P 177 Edit EDL MyEDL cdl w 13 56 30 00 empty empty M x 381 EDL EVENTS Tem rur l oM PP I 13 58 30 00 empty empty R T P 177 13 59 30 00 Master Name Proxy Name 13 i 55 30 4 f 380 IN TC P 179 Duration Mos f P 177 NDF 371 CANCEL ENTER P 177 SCROLL P 179 p 179 AFTER P 179 BEFORE P 178 CURRENT P 178 P 178 P 178 Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 176 of 304 Hn us E n 92eJ193UJ Jes C Ro gt ct O CU ct O ct CU O JOUP3 133 TC amp Automation tab EDL editor cont 363 EDL NAME 364
194. e Opt 51 Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Table of Contents 4 of 304 21 RS 422out KOE EAS REESE SEES a HE 51 22 Gb lan USB2 portS o 51 23 Analog in 222r 51 24 LTC inloop lees 51 25 Reference In 0 ol o 51 26 Video Out ol a 51 E 27 Video IM ooo 51 s 3 6 MX front panel 52 28 LCD control panal 53 O 29 LCD display a a 53 2 30 Card readers 53 31 eSATA port looa 53 32 USB3 DONS xeu norris area 53 33 Control pal 53 34 Headphones 53 35 Drive lock and ejector 53 36 Drive tray llle 53 37 Power button 53 3 6 1 MX control panel 54 38 jog shuttle knob lll 55 39 select open 55 ZU Seli us ss s k S b eee A AAA 55 41 prev cli 55 42 frame 1 load clip lr 55 43 reverse play 55 44 record J a lala 55 45 rewind 242322646564 240654000 A4 R4 xx WX Ww du 55 46 Shift hee be oe Eos ee eee 55 Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Table of Contents 5 of 304 47 ledindicators 22h 55 48 Chata 56 49 ch2 lockUl ln 56 50 AB 56 OI ONS MEE 56 52 full mini full sern
195. e auto switching redundant power it is preferred to have power coming from two independent sources The use of a UPS uninterruptible power supply is also highly recommended to help prevent data loss Cinedecks use standard professional video and IT interconnects Make any appropriate video audio reference network and control connections assuring that the cables are in good operational condition This is of particular importance as digital signals are very susceptible to intermittent data loss caused by cable issues which can greatly complicate troubleshooting C O 2 D O cr 2 O lt O C s on D O o Refer to the rest of this chapter to learn about the various external parts of your Cinedeck Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 38 of 304 3 2 1 Audio connections Your Cinedeck can utilize several different audio sources Most common is recording embedded audio which is coming into the deck on a SDI BNC connection In this situation the system can accept up to 16 audio channels with each video uonej ei1sur AES is also commonly utilized and each channel pair can accept up to 8 AES channels also on BNC connections It is also possible to use analog audio Analog can be connected via the motherboard rear mounted unbalanced mini jack See the appropriate rear panel description for your deck and 268 audio on page 139 in the user interface input menu setup section
196. e editors 93 1934 Jes The wildcard title field is used to name a wildcard and is shown on the on screen keyboard to identify the wildcard and the expansion is the text you want inserted in your folder or file name 247 TITLE P 133 p 133 iea P 133 none user 3 none aaa ae 59 user 6 Jobeueuu pelold 251 CANCEL BUTTON P 133 250 ON SCREEN KEYBOARD P 133 252 SAVE amp CLOSE BUTTON P 133 User WILDCARD MANAGEMENT SCREEN GLOBAL WILDCARD MANAGEMENT SCREEN T o n D ES L Q O O w g Q O CU E o UN Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 132 of 304 Project manager Edit user amp global wildcards cont The title is the text which will be displayed on the shortcut button in the path and file 19 5 Edit user name editing interfaces These buttons are not terribly large so this text needs to be 247 TITLE global wildcards Short and concise yet still give meaning You might for example use ShowID p 132 TET If you find you dont like the name you have selected you can change this at any 5eJi 1l1ul Jes time 5195 Edit user a he expansion field is where you enter the text you want inserted into your folder 248 EXPANSION global wildcards or file names Using the above example the show ID might be Ep21NY which would d mean Episode 21 New York 9 19 5 Edit user amp The symbol and th
197. e in a mission critical production environment While spinning drives and network recording may be used Cinedeck does not in any way guarantee that performance of such recording media including SANs external RAID arrays etc will be adequate to take advantage of the features of a Cinedeck It is up to the end user to understand the risks and to have the technical expertise on hand to properly take advantage of recording media other than the internal SSDs Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 37 of 304 3 2 Connecting your deck In many respects the initial setup of a Cinedeck is no different than a traditional tape deck and also like a tape deck some care needs to be taken during the installation process uonej ei1sur Cinedecks are not terribly heavy but the physical location is still very important Install the Cinedeck in a protected and stable environment such as in a rack on a table etc where the deck can not fall or be otherwise susceptible to undesirable environmental or hazardous conditions As with any electronic equipment it is important that the area have sufficient ventilation and be a reasonable temperature Use common sense if you are not comfortable because of the temperature or humidity the environment is likely not appropriate for your equipment either so special care should be taken Assure there is a stable and clean power source Because Cinedeck recorders us
198. e is either tri level sync or black burst the system will 273 SYNC ETS lock to the external source and the sync light on the main display will light green indicating a external reference is in use Additionally for using the input a reference when the source is dual link the user UN D mj 2 et D i h CU O D qe indu can manually select whether the A input or B input should be used as the reference source 520Inputtab Pressing save and close confirms any changes closes the setup screens and returns 2 4 SAVE AND CLOSE 138 l U to the previous multi or single channel view Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 141 of 304 Input tab cont copy settings from provides a quick process for duplicating the settings from one channel to the currently selected channel UN D mj 2 et D Ty h CU O D This method is essentially the reverse of the more flexible copy settings to other channels the description of which follows 275 COPY SETTINGS 5 20 Input tab FROM dg qe indu 276 COPY TO OTHER 5 20 Input tab CHANNELS pee copy to other channels opens this sub menu which allows copying or pushing channel independent settings such as audio channel selection amp routing and file destination drive from the selected channel to one or more other channels In the above image the orange highlighted channel 1 settin
199. e list scroll lll 136 5 5 19 7 Sub scenes amp User Lists 137 A 137 5 20 Input tab ilii lll 138 262 pagetabs lll 139 263 res resolution 22222 llle 139 264 fps framerate 2 22 lll ln 139 265 format 2 0 00 a 139 266 transport 139 267 source a lll sls 139 268 audio 22222 a a 139 269 preview 140 270 signal loss behavior cee 0 140 271 frame drop behavior o 141 272 channel toggle lll ln 141 PA Ed e casan ays s as s s S SR GEB 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 G 141 274 saveandclose 0 a 0 141 275 copy settingsfrom a 142 Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Table of Contents 15 of 304 276 copy to other channels sn 142 277 audio delay 2 2222 n 143 278 SVG bee ee eh ee SEES 3499444 452 8 884355 143 279 SIONA Sq 143 280 auto detect lll 143 5 20 1 Audio delay lll ellen 144 520 2 EEEE EEEE 144 m 5 21 Master tab 145 G 281 pagefabs U ler 147 e ATT 147 S 283 qual oa 147 5 284 Wrapper 2 0 0 148 i 285 audio 22484 ee nan arras nsn 148 286 timecode lll n 149 287 segment xb RE RGeEGxGkx4xus
200. e loaded EDL and return to the TC amp automation screen The file menu provides access to saving opening and creating new EDLs Use save as to save the loaded EDL with a new name Use save to save the loaded EDL note a next to the file name at the top left indicates a file which has not been saved C Ro gt ct O CU ct O ct CU O 373 5 25 2 EDL editor n P s HLE on page 176 Use open to open an existing EDL or import a CMX 3600 EDL Use new to create a new EDL EDLs are saved by default in c cinedeck EDL however you can save and open EDLs from any accessible drive i 5 25 2 EDL editor To delete the currently selected event pr del rrent 374 DELETE CURRENT page 176 y ent press delete current New events can be added in several ways insert before will insert a new event before the selected highlighted event using the data in the event editor JOUP3 133 5 25 2 EDL editor on page 176 375 INSERT BEFORE Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 178 of 304 TC amp Automation tab EDL editor cont New events can be added in several ways insert after will insert a new event after the selected highlighted event using the data in the event editor I New events can be added in several ways 377 APPEND MC TT e DR append will add a new event to the end of the list using the data in the event edito
201. e number 1 through 6 are the variables which actually carry the 249 VARIABLE lobal wildcards Ji Hu p 132 expansion text so when you use 961 in a file name the text Ep21NY is inserted The on screen keyboard can be used with a mouse or by presses when a touch screen is available It works in a similar fashion to a standard USB keyboard with the following exceptions 250 ON SCREEN 21a roit usere The del key functions as backspace deleting characters to the left of the cursor global wildcards KEYBOARD p 132 The clear key deletes all text in the current field The shift key functions as a shift lock toggle On is all caps Off is all lower case Depending on the preference set on the prefs setup page space bar will place a underscore character in place of a space 9 19 5 Edit user amp Cancel any changes and return to the previous screen 251 CANCEL BUTTON global wildcards 3192 252 save amp CLOSE TONE eee Pressing save and close confirms any changes closes the project setup screens and opal Wildcards BUTTON p 132 returns to the main _ o e area Jobeueuu pelold T o E UN D Qo Q O w g G C CU E o UN Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 133 of 304 5 19 6 Scenes list The scenes list page is used for creating editing importing and exporting scenes which are name elements which can optionally be used in folder
202. e remote indicator will light green when the associated channel detects a RS 422 INDICATOR screen p 88 connection The sync indicator will light green when an external a black burst or tri level sync 7 reference signal is detected ji SEEKS as psg The sync settings are available on the input page of the setup screen For normal operation sync is set to auto In auto mode internal reference is used unless the external signal is detected See 273 sync on page 141 In standby mode master space time displays the available space on the designated destination drive 114 MASTER SPACE sswutivew When recording the display will auto toggle between remaining space and TIME sqeen P59 approximate remaining time based on the selected encode bitrate Note the system is unaware if other channels are being written to the same destination drive so the available time estimate may need to be divided to accurately reflect remaining time 5 8Multiview The signal indicator will light green when the system detects and is set properly to screen p88 match an incoming signal In standby mode proxy space time displays the available space on the designated destination drive 116 PROXY sPACE 5 8 Multiviw When recording the display will auto toggle between remaining space and TIME screen p 88 approximate remaining time based on the selected encode bitrate Note the system is unaware if other channels are being written to the same de
203. e sure to check and eject both drives Use copy disk content to copy the entire contents of a drive to another disk Use rename to rename the disk to say something other than the default New Volume Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 218 of 304 egKe d Jabeuew di 5 Clip manager cont Y lt Use manage folder to perform tasks such as manually creating new folders O Destructive functions will be grayed out and unavailable if disable file delete and disk al erase is enabled on the prefs page See 386 prefs on page 184 Use delete to delete the selected folder Folders which contain content cannot be deleted unless the content is first removed Use new to create a new folder sub folder under the selected folder Alle n ss re 215 Use copy folder to to copy the selected folder to another location E C 5 O LO D Use rename to rename the selected folder Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 219 of 304 Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Clip manager cont Use manage clips to perform tasks such as deleting or copying clips Destructive functions will be grayed out and unavailable if disable file delete and disk erase is enabled on the prefs page See 386 prefs on page 184 Use delete selected to delete selected clips Use de
204. e the Cinedeck playback engine automatically detects the specifications of a file playing a file requires no special setup meaning content can be played without regard to the settings of the selected channel If recording has just completed and play at the lower left of that channel on the multi or single channel view Is pressed the last recording will be loaded into that channel and playback transport controls are displayed below the video preview If play is pressed on a channel which has not recorded a file clip manager will open where you can navigate between drives and folders to select content to play When a clip is already loaded for playback clip manager can be accessed by pressing open at the lower left of the channel view Below is the two channel view on a RX3G Channel one on the left has a clip loaded for playback The right channel is in standby Most of the controls remain the same between standby and play mode so as with the previous section covering recording only playback specific controls are discussed in this section It should be noted that if a standard USB keyboard is connected the common J K L keyboard controls can ur P Ll EPTC YSTIBUL be used in playback J T Sag mode setup Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 205 of 304 egKe d 7 1 Playback multi view Cinedecks are full duplex I O systems meaning each channel can perform activities indepen
205. e to and select the desired playlist e Press select from the bottom of the screen e Playlist manager opens and you can navigate to the location where the playlist was saved and open it in the playlist editor or play it out 7 3 Clip manager Select back to close clip manager and return the the previous single or multi 456 BACK SAE channel view Press the thumbs list toggle to switch the clip manager view between thumbnail view and the more detailed list view 457 LIST VIEW 7 3 Clip manager TOGGLE p 215 In list view there is a column scroll control at the top right corner to bring additional data into view Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 221 of 304 egKe d Jabeuew di 5 7 4 Playlist manager A playlist is a virtual clip which contains multiple clips and sub clips In fact a playlist is nothing more than an XML file which points to clips and portions of clips to allow various sequential playback and export functions and the playlist manager provides access to opening and managing playlists egKe d 459 DISK 460 461 462 SORT 463 SELECT LIST FOLDERS PLAYLISTS LIST CONTROLS BUTTONS P 223 P 223 P 223 P 223 458 PAGE TABS P 223 L2 New Volume 109 GB v C lt cr S 5 O O D Dual MyProject up one level 470 BACK P 224 464 PLAY SELECTED p 223 465 PLAY 466 E
206. e used if the intention is to offload media on a Mac OSX machine which does not have the preferred NTFS read capability Choose whether you want to format this volume and if so what settings you want to use C Do not format this volume Format this volume with the following settings File system rS j location wt sizes Deiat Rename the drive to something meaningful in the volume label field Volume label Samsung 512 7361 v Perform a quick format for example 850pro512 1234 where 512 is the size and 1234 are the last few digits of the disk serial number Leave all other settings at defaults asuring quick format is checked then select Next Enable file and folder compression CL Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 254 of 304 Initializing new drives cont x Press Finish at the Completing dialog Completing the New Simple Volume Wizard You have successfully completed the New Simple Volume Y ou selected the following settings 9 qnoJ 79 e2lAJ8g Allocation unit size Default Volume label Samsung 512 7361V gt Muick format Yes To close this wizard click Finish pa Formatting a SSD will only take a short time L Disk 1 Basic 476 94 GB Online 5 ct 2 N 5 D a 3 lt D UN When formatting i IS complete the drive should look something like
207. e wrapper and again Cinedecks support those most commonly used in production workflows Again it is best to confirm the requirements with whomever will be editing but some generalizations can be made If you are working in an Avid post environment you would normally select Avid MXF 284 WRAPPER E I DE as these files are wrapped in Avid s native OpAtom MXF If you are working in Final Cut you will normally want MOV wrapped files and MOV mono is generally the most useful for an edit environment If you are working in an Adobe environment you might prefer MXF Op1a but MOV is also very common For more information see 10 2 What is a codec on page 289 UN D mj 2 et D Ty h CU O D This matrix view displays the number of audio channels selected for recording and indicates the source and destination audio channels If the matrix is gray the audio source selection on the input page is off qe Ja1selA While SDI only supports 16 channels some files can support up to 32 audio tracks hence the encode settings give you direct access for creating those tracks These tracks can be inserted into at a later point using Cinedeck s Insert Edit 285 AUDIO e PAS Click the matrix to open and adjust audio track selections and routing Basically the upper meters in the router matrix editor show the incoming audio channels for the selected source The boxes below each channel indicate the destination tracks Click
208. eck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 SETUP TONE OUTPUT TOGGLE BLACK OR SEE NEXT PAGE BARS OUTPUT V1 signal generator a disabled drop frame sequence E SELECT COPY FROM TO COPY SELECT COPY TO TO COPY SETTINGS SETTINGS FROM ANOTHER CHANNEL FROM THIS CHANNEL TO OTHER CHANNELS ENABEL DISABLE DROP FRAME TC SELECT STILL TO TURN ON SINGLE IMAGE MODE TO SELECT AND LOAD A FOLDER OF STILL IMAGES PRESS SELECT SELECT SEQUENCE TO TURN ON SEQUENCE MODE TO SELECT AND LOAD A FOLDER OF STILL IMAGES PRESS SELECT Page 194 of 304 93 1934 Jes EN O gt 2 G D 2 D CU et O et CU C Signal Generator tab cont 93 1934 Jes V1 SDI AES tone setup suence silence silence silence sHence SHENC silence silence silence silence silence sue silence 200 Hz 200 Hz 200 Hz 200 Hz 200Hz 200Hz 200Hz 200Hz 200Hz 200Hz 200Hz 200 Hz SELECT APPROPRIATE 400 Hz 400 Hz 400Hz 400 Hz 400 Hz 400 Hz 400Hz 400Hz 400Hz 400Hz 400Hz 400Hz 400Hz 400Hz 400Hz TONE FREQUENCY AND CHANNEL 600 Hz 600Hz 600Hz 600Hz 600Hz 600Hz 600 Hz 600 Hz 600Hz 600Hz 600Hz 600 600 Hz 600Hz 600 Hz EN O gt 2 G D 2 D CU et O et CU C 800 Hz 800 Hz 800Hz 800 Hz 800 Hz 800 Hz 800 Hz 800Hz 8 1 800 Hz 800 Hz 800Hz 800 Hz 800 Hz 800 Hz 2 KHz CLICK TO ACTIVATE BREAKS IN AUDIO TONE GENERATION Dreak Dreak Dreak Dreak Dreak break break break
209. ecode source can be momentarily connected to this LTC input and RX3G will sync the internal generator to that timecode Timecode Out With the timecode option RX3G can generate and send timecode to other connected devices such as cameras eliminating the need to have a separate timecode generator for example in a fly pack type EN panel p 49 of configuration IRIG B Timecode support Allows RX3G to receive a IRIG B timecode source from an external IRIG B timecode generator not included and use that timecode data internally as a replacement for standard SMPTE timecode You can confirm if your RX3G has the Timecode option if the BNC connectors are included on the back panel and by checking in Windows Device Manager If AEC Time Code device is listed the deck has the option memor num e URED Meere ee Two standard Gb Ethernet ports Ports can be teamed in networks which support 2 UN et 2 Q zur O 20 TIMECODE 3 5 RX3G back eued x eq DEXY 49 teamed connections Four standard USB2 data connections 23 ANALOG IN 35 RX3G back An unbalanced analog line level audio input which can be used for recording stereo pane 049 scratch audio Vis CI 3 5 RX3G back LTC linear time code input for use with a house supplied timecode signal Signals panel 049 T which are input are passed to the out connector For external reference Cinedecks will lock to either standard color burst black burst 3 5 R
210. ecording to a black file GEN SHOULD BE SELECTED AS THE TC SOURCE ON THE ENCODE PAGE THIS ALLOWS THE CINEDECK TO REGENERATE THE TIMELINE TIMECODE SET RECORD TRIGGER TO GEN ON THE TC amp AUTOMATION PAGE SET GEN TC MODE TO AVID WITH AN OFFSET OF 2 AND DROP OR NON DROP AS NEEDED FOR ADDITIONAL DETAIL SEE 5 25 TC amp AUTOMATION TAB ON PAGE 168 Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 239 of 304 G D 5 D s v UN D ct et 5 O UN 8 4 3 Insert Edit Settings For inserting into blacked SET RECORD or pre recorded files dus insert baseband is used WHEN MEDIA COMPOSER EORNM III m IS CORRECTLY for the record mode COMMUNICATING WITH THE 422 MODE O J3u02 0W Y CINEDECK THE REMOTE LAMP WILL BE GREEN SHOULD BE SET TO SLAVE Remember that ProRes files must be CBR to accept inserts See 5 11 4 Insert CONFIRM Lisci REMOTE TRACK ARM IS OFF Baseband on page 103 UN OPEN YOUR TARGET OR PRE BLACKED FILE FROM HERE IND Jeubiq play 8 4 2 Settings for New File SET RECORD MODE TO NORMAL If you prefer to create a new file for record mode select normal instead of insert baseband Assure your project input and encode settings are set for the appropriate format codec and number of audio channels WHEN MEDIA COMPOSE
211. ect and clipping 93 1934 Jes WAVEFORM Y R G B OR PARADE AS SHOWN HISTOGRAM COLOR SELECTOR CHANGE SCALE TO DIGITAL 76 IRE ANALYSIS TOOLS MENU ACCESS BUTTON lt O D O gt 5 gt lt 2 Uu 2 o UN OVERLAY TOGGLE CLIPPING SETUP Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 113 of 304 5 17 Setup tabs explained System setup is managed via a series of tabbed screens accessed via the setup button found on both the multi view and single channel screens When setup is opened settings for the current channel are displayed and the initial screen which appears is the overview tab 93 1934 Jes It bears repeating that Cinedeck setup is project centric so most changes on the various setup screens are saved as part of the current project and effect whichever channels are associated to the current project Additionally setup tends to be a left to right process starting on the Overview page where the project is selected and then stepping through input master codec selection proxy codec selection and possibly some specific timecode and record trigger changes made on the TC amp automation page Lastly it should be noted that previous settings changes you have already made filter what is available for the settings you are currently adjusting An example you have already selected 10801 59 94 10bit as the input and you want to
212. ected clips to the left or right Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 227 of 304 Playlist manager Playlist editor cont egKe d To show playlist position timecode in the clip timecode display with each clip thumbnail at the top of the screen select timeline 484 TIMECODE 7 4 1 Playlist editor DISPLAY p 225 To show actual clip timecode in the clip timecode display with each clip thumbnail at the top of the screen select clip dee cae 74 1 Playlist editor Use export to export the playlist as an EDL Additional capabilities will be added in p 225 future Cinedeck releases OU EM Select cancel to undo any changes made and return to playlist manager Select save and close to confirm any changes and return to playlist manager 488 OUTPUT 23 98 7 4 1 Playlist editor Indicates that a true 23 98 progressive playlist will play out as psf As 591 p 223 489 PLAYLIST 74 1 Playlist editor A complete overview of the playlist settings are displayed here SETTINGS OVERVIEW p 229 RU C lt cr S 5 O O D s 1O1Ip 1s e d Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 228 of 304 7 4 2 Playlist settings Use playlist settings to adjust the properties of your playlist such as timeline time code and the use of drop or non drop timecode egKe d 491 PLAYLIST TIMECODE SETTINGS p 23
213. editing interface built into the Cinedeck environment o Playlisting allows adding clips from any source folder to a new or existing playlist o Clips encoded with different codecs can be mixed but need to be the same format color depth and frame rate for example all 1080p 23 98 10bit note Mixing formats will be added in a future release o Playlists support TV standard sized still images and still image sequences PNG JPG BMP o Single or multiple clips can be reordered o Clips can be used in their entirety or can be trimmed with in and out points to restrict playback to a portion sub clip 10 44 Presets Version 4 and later of the Cinedeck interface includes an expanded capability for saving and restoring user preferences and project settings in an XML format 10 45 Project Locking Version 4 5 and later versions of the Cinedeck interface support project locking A locked project prevents users from accidentally or intentionally changing any operational settings except destination drives A locked project also still allows users to cycle through previously created scene names Projects can be intentionally unlocked to allow full access to all settings 10 46 RAID Attached Drives Cinedeck MX and ZX have an available PCle slot for the addition of network adapter cards as well as custom HBA Host Bus Adapter cards to support high speed local attached RAID storage such as the removable RAID modules from Dulce Systems The Dulce Syst
214. eeJ 9 OVS soJnjeo4 lt OVS Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 FAQ gt Features cont 10 10 Audio Mapping Version 4 added the ability to selectively toggle on amp off and map the destination channels of incoming audio i e a system could be setup to record incoming channels 1 amp 2 and 7 amp 8 to channels 1 2 3 amp 4 Audio mapping will be enhanced in future versions of the system software 10 11 AS 02 AS 11 DPP o AS 02 and AS 11 are MXF Opla file format recommendations from AMWA the Advanced Media Workflow Association o AS 02 is specifically oriented towards addressing the problem of having a common file format in a facility that has to handle many input formats and make many output formats o AS 11 was further developed to specify a vendor neutral subset of the MXF file format to use for delivery of finished programming from program producers and program distributors to broadcast stations while the UK DPP Digital Production Partnership has designed a set of delivery standards procedures and technical requirements which conform to the AS 11 v1 0 specification and are constrained in the UK DPP AS 11 shim Cinedecks running version 4 3 and later software can record AS 02 and AS 11 DPP compliant MXF content and later versions of the software provide more access for creating and editing the included metadata 1 Optional on ZX 10 12 BNCs For traditional infra
215. el is oriented towards professional video production and while the current Cinedeck generation comes in different forms with some hardware differences at their heart they are all very similar Much of the hardware is off the shelf which allows Cinedeck designers to quickly respond as improved technology comes available Starting at the basics there are many options available for video input and output processing but the quality of the actual image which comes through today s cards differers significantly The current Cinedeck generation are all based on Bluefish video I O processing cards which were selected for their clean video I O access to the complete signal path and their responsive and active interest in supplying a quality product There are also some custom hardware elements not so visible electronic components such as the RS 422 board and very visible parts like the tilt displays control panels and the stainless steel back panels 2 4 2 Software The user interface is what really makes a Cinedeck unique The interface has been in development since 2010 and most users agree that it is very effective and easy to navigate making what can be quite a complicated process quick and easy It is also important to note that the Cinedeck application is running on top of a Windows 7 embedded installation The discussion will go on forever as to the plus and minus points of Windows but for the purposes of a versatile system such as a Cinedeck there
216. elA them Master settings are copied to masters proxy settings are copied to proxies 302 save AND close 521 Master tab Pressing save and close confirms any changes closes the setup screens and returns p 145 to the previous multi or single channel view Each recording session can be accompanied by clip specific xml files The completed xml files contain clip specific metadata which can be imported into asset managements systems and the like After selecting an xml type xml path override can be selected to designate a specific destination folder for the xml files 5 21 Master tab MSG xml generates an xml format for use by MSG 303 GENERATE XML p 145 NASA is a format for use at for NASAS Orion launch system AS 11 sidecar generates a AS 11 compatible xml Cinedeck xml generates a full generic xml with all data Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 153 of 304 5 22 Proxy tab UN The proxy page is where you set all of the proxy file encode parameters such as codec and wrapper Note L although visible some of the encode settings made for the master such as timecode control the proxy encode 5 so cannot be changed on this page T CU O 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 P CODEC QUALITY WRAPPER AUDIO TIMECODE SEGMENT WRITE PRIMARY SECONDARY 314 CHANNEL p 155 P 155 P156 156 156 e 156 157 157 p 157 B
217. em from a previous time It is possible especially if you have installed 3rd party applications such as SAN client software or other tools that new drivers installed in a software update may be incompatible with that software and cause issues with startup or operation Restoring a system from a point just before an update can make recovery a relatively painless exercise If you encounter such an issue please contact us with a complete description of the software Pictures hardware involved so we can investigate the cause of the incompatibility MS See Contacting Cinedeck on page 2 prm Pe A Open 9 13 Create a restore point Control Pane Y Manage Map network drive Devices and Disconnect network drive To update and skip creating a restore point goto 9 14 Cinedeck Update installation on page 273 aw on Desktop Default Prog Rename OSS Connect a USB mouse and keyboard Help and 5 Properties Power on the Cinedeck On RX exit the Cinedeck setup gt prefs gt exit application See 388 application on page 184 From the desktop select Start fe Shut down D Right click computer and select properties from the context menu ingManician 02 Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 269 of 304 n D O D go O E o D sajepdn Create a restore point cont ed P Control Panel Home View
218. ements for your data suoneoii edsg To use the calculator refer to the data rate chart for your specific data rate 11 3 Data rates on page 339 Type the rate in the top Mbps field To included the space required for audio enter the number of proposed channels in the Audio channels field Press Enter or click elsewhere on the page The estimated required storage will automatically update Gigabytes and Terabytes hour are based on the number of hours noted in the hours field Any decimal can be used such as 25 Ya hour 6 etc Note that these are just estimates Actual results will vary especially if variable bit rate encoding is employed UN et O EX CU O D O D O Co ar O E Megabits EN Target Data Rate 24 bit 48 kHz O 1152 kbps ESTIMATED STORAGE REQUIREMENTS MBpsec Megabytes per second MBpmin Megabytes per minute GBphr Gigabytes per hour TBphr Terabytes per hour Cinedeck August 27 2015 14 28 Page 350 of 350 12 0 Index For answers to commonly asked questions and descriptions of the many Cinedeck features and functions also see 10 0 FAQ amp Features on page 289 Symbols 4K UHD 188 A AES audio 139 MX back panel 61 RX3G back panel 50 ZX back panel 67 AMP protocol 232 242 244 TCP port 3811 242 Analog Audio 39 139 Analysis Tools 95 113 API SDK 232 See AMP protocol AS 02 See FAQ amp Features AS 11 See FAQ amp Features Assemble Edit 99 101 103 Audio 39
219. ems HBA is essentially a PCle extender enabling fast access to multiple terabytes of removable storage for Cinedeck recordings and also allowing the Dulce drive chassis to contain a network adapter to provide the Cinedeck with fast 8Gb or 10Gb network connections 10 47 Record Time For practical purposes record time on Cinedeck recorders is only limited by the size of the destination drive so for example when recording to a SAN or NAS record time could be calculated as days or weeks instead of minutes or hours All Cinedecks also support roll over recording utilizing two drives for a single recording Page 298 of 304 seJnjeeJ 9 OVS soJnjeo4 lt OVS FAQ gt Features cont 10 48 Redundant Files Each Cinedeck RX3G or MX input can be written as master and proxy file s and the decks can write redundant files per input encoder to multiple destinations providing the media and connection support the selected bit rate and I O needs For example a 4 channel MX can write a ProRes master and proxy file for each input giving you four primary masters and four primary proxies Activating redundant record provides four additional or secondary masters and four secondary proxies for a total of sixteen files seJnjeeJ 9 OVS 10 49 Redundant Power Cinedeck RX and newer decks are supported by redundant power sources with auto switching between power sources when one is disabled or removed o Cinedeck RX has two redundant DC input
220. ent operation and errors Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 244 of 304 9 0 Service amp Trouble 9 1 Best practices Not surprisingly modern recorders like the Cinedecks do not require much in the way of maintenance or particular care in handling compared to the needs of a tape machine with daily head cleaning transport alignment and regular replacement of parts which wear out like the heads drum and capstan but there are still things you can do to help assure good operation and successful recordings e Redundant Power When connecting the power to your systems it is always best to use power from two sources Although your deck has dual power supplies with internally controlled auto fail over having both power inputs connected to the same power circuit does nothing to prevent power loss when the circuit fails e Uninterruptible Power Supply Electronics are not terribly happy with fluctuating power or power loss so connect your gear using a voltage regulating UPS The regulation will smooth out the ups and downs of the voltage and the battery in the UPS can easily supply enough power to properly and cleanly power the system down so there are no issues e Connect With Power Off As with all electronic systems it is better to make all of the interconnections before powering the system on Connecting with all systems up and running generally does not cause issues however if there are ground di
221. equired file Select open or import There are a few important things to note Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 85 of 304 Settings exporting importing cont When importing lists such as scenes or sub scenes the import will overwrite any existing list items you currently have associated with that project 93 1934 Jes When opening LUT files it is recommended to first copy the required LUT files onto a drive which will always be available to the system The easiest is to use the default location c cinedeck LUT This is the LUT folder in the main c cinedeck install folder and is the location which will first open when you look for LUT files Cinedeck uses several specific file name extensions for Cinedeck specific files Be aware that there is always the possibility that other applications on your system will also use the same file extension This not an issue unless you accidentally tell Windows to always use some particular application for opening that file type In that case files may no longer automatically open in that other application For example if you were to tell Windows to always open txt files with Excell Notepad would no longer automatically be used The main file extensions used within the Cinedeck system are cdl Cinedeck EDL edit decision list plain comma delineated ASCII text file CMX 3600 EDLs can also be imported csv can be importe
222. er when playback is stopped Additionally scrub performance is better with I frame codecs than GoP codecs 7 2 Playback 433 PLAY HEAD 7 2 Playback Press open to access clip manager and playlists manager 434 OPEN CLIP single channel view p 211 See 7 3 Clip manager on page 215 and 7 4 Playlist manager on page 222 Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 212 of 304 Playback single channel view cont 435 TRANSPORT CONTROLS 7 2 Playback single channel view p 211 Pressing here opens a timecode keypad to enter a goto timecode This function is not available when multiple clips are loaded Tap or click step to activate buttons for moving frame by frame in forward and reverse Pressing here will move the playhead to the start of the loaded clip See note below By default rewind is 4x Press again to pause A long press displays additional slow and fast options Play in reverse Play forward When multiple clips or a playlist are loaded the mode and symbol changes Press cue prev to move the playhead to the previous clip Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Playback in single channel view includes an extended array of transport controls By default fast forward is 4x Press again to pause A long press displays additional slow and fast options Pressing here will move the pl
223. ersion 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 78 of 304 Keyboard shortcuts cont ControltR lt Renamecurrentprojet S Control Editproject metadata such as director and director of photography _ Cono Import current project o 4 4 4 ControltE Exporticurrentproject o AW Open user wildcards management ooo AG Y Open global wildcards management o 4 4 Controla path amp filename Lock current selected project templates Contro kU path amp filename Unlock current selected project templates IDE f f Project manager Delete selected project 92e1193UT Jes N D lt C O o o UN 3 O 5 et O et UN Arrow keys and mouse Navigate scenes list Scene list manager scroll wheel Del Delete selected scene o Control Createnewscene Control M i Edit scene metadata Controls mportscenes list O S Control E L scenes list o Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 79 of 304 Keyboard shortcuts cont AiteP 5 lt Open project manager main page AN _ Open path amp templates screen for folder and file naming AS Y jOpensenelistmanger Attu Open sub scenes list manager Ataw Open user wildcards manager I AG Open g
224. es before removing them The Cinedeck system should assure that recording data has been properly flushed out to the drives but be safe and eject the drives first and remember that each SSD drive carrier can have two drives so be sure to eject both For ejecting drives from the user interface see 450 manage disk on page 218 To eject drives using HotSwap see 5 5 3 HotSwap on page 84 n D O D go O E o D e Calculate Recording Time In advance of any recording it is important to assure there is enough space to store not only the planned session but it is also recommended to calculate at least 10 extra space For estimating the required storage the back of the manual has a listing of data rates for various codecs and qualities and you can use the calculator here 11 4 Storage calculator on page 350 Remember also that the recorder is not aware if you are writing multiple channels to the same physical destination drive so when you are calculating and observing remaining space and remaining time remember to divide by the number of channels being written to that destination For example if all four channels are writing to Drive H and the interface says there is 40 minutes remaining there is really only 10 minutes remaining Sso2i eJd 1seg e Secure Erase While SSDs are not technically effected by data fragmentation like spinning drives and you should absolutely not use a defragmentation utility o
225. es the same basic procedure the difference being that some variables or wildcards may not be available The upper template field is where you enter the wildcards and text which forms the name 93 1934 Jes Select wildcards using the wildcard shortcut buttons or directly type them in along with any other required text using the on screen or an attached USB keyboard You can also utilize Windows copy amp paste in the template field 233 CURRENT PROJECT P 129 template P I E 234 TEMPLATE P 129 NA 235 EXPANSION P 129 Project Scene Sub Input Input Encoder Proxy 236 WILDCARD Scene Name Label SHORTCUTS P 129 user 5 er 6 ser 7 ar 8 user 9 x S D 2 et 3 D gt QD O D 5 237 ON SCREEN KEYBOARD P 129 1O1ID Yled TP 2 239 SAVE amp CLOSE Where possible wildcard information is filled in but some data such as start P p 129 BUTTON P 129 BUTTON P 129 time code is not available until recording starts so will be displayed as the same variable entered in the above template Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 128 of 304 Project manager Path editor cont 233 CURRENT 5 193 Path editor Displays the project name you are currently editing PROJECT _ This is an editable field which displays the text template used to form the name you 234 TEMPLATE exei o RES are creating Any letter
226. ese limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against frequency interference in residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed or used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communication However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on The user is encouraged to try and correct the interference by one or more of the following measures Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna e Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver e Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which receiver is connected Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 29 of 304 1 5 Cinedeck Product Overview In the most basic sense Cinedecks are video production ingest and playout appliances They can initially be described as tape deck replacements in that you can drop one in place of a tape deck use the existing connec tions and put it to work but your Cinedeck s features and functions go far beyond what traditional tape decks have ever offered uononpodu Multi channel ingest and playback using the storage destinations native codecs and file types which best fit your workflow remain the core benefits of Cinedeck recorders however simplicity is key in todays deman
227. et D Ty h CU O D The main multi view screen which depending on the Cinedeck model and mode can be one two or 4 quadrants Asingle channel view e Multiple setup pages primarily accessed by tabs across the top of the setup screen TEN Ql es TSE e Aclip manager screen West ONT ws c e The playlist manager and associated playlist editor p ule dx If Some color generalizations Bright Orange items and bright orange bordered buttonslare active Bright aqueegreen items and bright aqua green bordered buttonslare Inactive but available e Yellow items are informational e Dim items and buttons are not available or not relevant resolution frame rate P PsF pixel format F NDI 1080i 59 94 PsF 4 2 2 YUV10 non drop start end uration 00 00 00 00 00 04 06 17 00 04 06 18 Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 75 of 304 Ul explained cont Beyond touching or clicking the Cinedeck user interface also makes use of long presses you might call these shift functions and screen hot spots Additionally there are a number of keyboard shortcuts and bar code readers can be utilized for data entry UN D mj 2 et D Ty h CU O D The most notable long press action is to stop a recording When a system is recording and setup with the default prefs configuration simply clicking stop will have no effect A long press of about 2 seconds i
228. et workflows Currently Cinedeck only recommend and support Samsung 840 Pro 850 Pro and EVO series SSD drives uonej ei1sur For recording and playback all Cinedecks can also utilize external USB and or eSATA and or network storage including NAS network attached storage and SAN storage area network systems requiring client software Additionally the Cinedeck operating system can be setup to support iSCSI file systems Cinedecks are Windows 7 Embedded based so fully support SMB shares and client software is often available for SAN installations Some Cinedeck recorders have an available PCIe slot for 8Gb 16Gb fiber or 10Gb Ethernet cards as well as direct attached storage such as the drive arrays from Dulce Systems D D O O e O o D UN m D a O UN Im porta Nt All external and network recording devices and plans should be extremely well tested before utilizing in a production environments Note Drive assemblies of the same model from the same manufacturer can differ in firmware and internal hardware used so successful tests are drive specific and as such do not guarantee successful recordings with other units Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 41 of 304 3 3 1 SSDs Dont skimp on drives to save a few cents The use of unsupported drives to save a little money per GB has a poor cost benefit ratio when what is at stake is generally the recording of
229. f your camera is not supported you can malso slave recording by using 353 input rec run TC on page 170 C Ro gt ct O CU ct O ct CU O Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 169 of 304 TC amp Automation tab cont 525 C amp 352 EDL Automation tab p 168 525 IC amp Automation tab p 168 353 INPUT REC RUN TC Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 When set to EDL the deck can record and stop based on the events in the selected EDL The selected trigger TC source is the timecode used to trigger the EDL events When a channel is set to RS 422 master mode RS 422 is available as a trigger In addition when in RS 422 mode EDL mode can drive a connected tape machine essentially operating as master in an auto conform session For additional EDL information see 5 25 2 EDL editor on page 176 Also see 354 preroll on page 171 When set to input rec run TC the deck will automatically record whenever the timecode source is incrementing This mode can be used with cameras and other devices when another mode such as external device via SDI is not possible but slave recording is desired A delay of a few frames can be introduced to help prevent false triggers In this example the deck will wait to see 4 frames of sequential timecode before starting a recording Page
230. feature may be noted as supported your specific system may not have that capability Feature descriptions can be found in 10 0 FAQ amp Features on page 289 Additionally as everyone knows specifications are subject to change without notice suoneoii edsg If there is a specific question feel free to contact us for clarification See Contacting Cinedeck on page 2 2 Channel HD SD 4 channel HD SD 4 channel HD SD 4 channel HD SD 2 Channel HD SD Description Master amp H 264 Master amp Proxy Master amp Proxy Master amp Proxy Master amp Proxy per Proxy per channel per channel per channel per channel channel Full Duplex Mix and Match Y Y Y Y Y encode Play TE 7x25 xlo J x175 A TXIL 22 JE x17 x22 TXU x22 17 8 x 21 6 x 25 5 cm 17 8 x 44 5 x 56 8 cm 17 5 x 43 x 56 cm 17 5 x 43 x 56 cm 17 5 x 43 x 56 cm 10 Ibs 39 Ibs 35 Ibs 33 Ibs 33 Ibs pe en ens Yes 1 or 2 decks Yes Yes Yes Ves Half width 4RU high Full width 4RU high Full width 4RU high Full width 4RU high Full width 4RU high Jog Shuttle Via external devices Via external devices Via external devices Via external devices Yes amp external Yes amp external No external touch No external touch No external touch 7 Touchscreen touchscreen support touchscreen support screen optional screen optional screen optional Apple ProRes Proxy LT Y Optional Y Optional Y Optional Normal HQ Avid DNxHD Y Optional Y
231. fferences or static electricity buildup they can have a negative effect on your electronic gear e Format SSDs Before Recording When you are starting a recording session it is best to work with cleanly formatted or preferably freshly initalized SSDs This is especially true for SSDs which have been moved between machines and operating systems as different operating systems leave residual traces which are not necessarily helpful Formatting can be easily and quickly done from the Cinedeck application see 9 7 Formating drives on page 259 SSDs can be reinitalized using the manufacturers secure erase application or not quite as good DiskPart from the Windows 7 or higher operating system See 9 11 Secure erase on page 266 and 9 6 Reinitializing SSDs on page 256 e Test recording Make a few test records at lease one short record and a long record before the actual session Its always best to confirm everything is working properly before the session begins And while it Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 245 of 304 n D O D go O E o D s 2 pead 1seg Best practices cont may be superstition there are users who feel it is also wise to make a short recording after the session ends It requires little effort so why not e Properly Eject Drives Use the eject function from clip manager or HotSwap from the Windows desktop to unmount driv
232. for plet the current channel allowing easy access for setting audio gt 2 O O m gt O Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 164 of 304 5 24 Video Burn Settings It is possible to apply several different character burn ins to files during recording The burns can be timecode system time file name etc To apply a character burn enable burns on the encoder page Press setup to access this screen for customizing the selection size color and position of the burn elements 92eJ193UT Jes Remember a burn in is a permanent part of the video and can not be removed 337 INPUT ID TAB P 166 lt o D O CO E UN D et a n P 166 344 ENCODER BURN 346 PROPERTIES 348 SAVE AND TIMECODE SOURCE PANEL AREA P 167 P 167 CLOSE P 167 P 167 Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 165 of 304 Video Burn Settings cont LN m 524 Video Burn Displays the relevant channel and encoder names to identify which recording the settings p 165 burn in is setup is associated to The video burn selection panel is a button grid 6 across and 4 down In all cases indicates a control is active and selected indicates settings that are active and dim aqua blue indicates settings that are off 5 24 Video Burn x san The first column contains on off toggles for
233. format codec timecode audio tracks etc A big difference is that instead of real time Wu blacking a file is fast For example it takes about six minutes to create a one hour ProRes blacked file Although the process is fast just like tape you can also have some pre blacked files on disk and simply copy one to your workspace Then just like with a blacked tape you use Cinedeck insert editing to fill in the blanks See 5 12 Create Black File on page 109 When building a show live to file there are three advantages to working with a pre striped file as compared to Pause amp Seek e With Pause amp Seek there is no pre roll You can easily count down to the start but baseband insert mode does pre roll like tape which will be very familiar to studio personnel e When using the pre striped file you can start and stop your work anytime while Pause amp Seek requires the deck to stay on and the file to remain open e Because the file already exists on disk play while insert record is available This allows full transport control for confidence play shuttle etc Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 103 of 304 I l w SRM e ase f UN D et UJ CU UN D O CU gt o Record Modes Insert Baseband cont Insert editing can be done between two Cinedeck channels source channel to record channel or with the Cinedeck connected to an external so
234. g stop for a few seconds Toggeling short press for record stop allows stopping a recording immediately Note ORANGE indicates an active item Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 182 of 304 Prefs tab cont Optional serial remote control can be enabled or disabled for each channel UN D m 2 et D i h CU O D Use the COM controls to enable disable and adjust the active port for the current channel 384 REMOTE 5 26 Prefs tab on CONTROL page 181 Click the bottom option to change the deck emulation mode which is how the Cinedeck presents itself to connected devices This setting is useful for example when connecting to an Avid as the Avid needs to think its connected to a specific deck type There are several SRW and BVW modes available qe SjaJg Note ORANGE indicates an active item The 444 output selector forces the video output from standard single link 1 5 3G to the selected mode 5 26 Prefs tab TAY TT 385 444 output RE Note ORANGE indicates an active item Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 183 of 304 Prefs tab cont To set the project to the default 1 and clear many settings press reset all settings to default To prevent users from easily or accidentally deleting data in clip manager turn on disable file delete and disk erase 5 26
235. ge monitoring and additionally provides the ability to make proxy recordings with the LUT applied 10 37 Master amp Proxy MX and ZX can record all four 2K HD SD inputs with the users choice of available master and a proxy codecs for example ProRes HQ and ProRes proxy or uncompressed with H 264 proxy while RX3G can record two sources with a user selected master and h 264 proxy codec 1 Workflow package selection determines codec availability on ZX o By sending the same signal to multiple channels all Cinedeck RX and newer recorders can be configured to record a source with two or more codecs of any sort such as uncompressed ProRes AVC Intra and JFIF 10 38 MOV Flexibility Cinedecks provide support for recording content as MOV files with a choice of standard interleaved audio pairs mono audio tracks or MOV wrapped video accompanied by audio encoded in separate WAV wave files 1 Optional on ZX 10 39 Non Cinedeck Clips Cinedecks can play content created on many systems such as Sony SxS Panasonic P2 GoPro and nanoFlash including the non standard nanoFlash XDcamHD 100 Playback of QuickTime files with mono audio channels and support for playback of QuickTime files generated by Avid and Final Cut editing systems is also supported 1 Workflow package selection determines codec availability on ZX o All Cinedecks can read solid state card media such as SxS and CF utilizing external readers o MX has SxS P2 and CF card re
236. gs will be copied to channels 2 3 and 4 If for example you also wanted to copy drive destinations from channel 1 you would press disk assignments to include them Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 142 of 304 Input tab cont It is not uncommon to route the source video through one or more processing systems before directing it to the recording Each step along the way can significantly delay the arrival of the video at the recorder In contrast the audio may not be processed at all This can result in a noticeable timing difference between the video 5 20 Inputtab and audio While technically a video issue correcting it requires delaying the audio 277 AUDIO DELAY p 138 UN D mj 2 et D Ty h CU O D The Cinedeck has the ability to independently delay each incoming audio channel by up to 999 milliseconds about one second The audio delay button opens an audio delay overview screen where each audio channel can be delayed Divide 1000 by your frame rate to determine the needed per frame millisecond delay See 5 20 1 Audio delay on page 144 D 278 Se 520Inputtab The sync lamp will be green when the Cinedeck detects an appropriate reference p 138 signal at the sync connection 279 SIGNAL The signal lamp will be green when the Cinedeck detects an appropriate input signal 280 AUTO DETECT ee When pressed the channel input will automatical
237. h deck It is recommended to connect a USB keyboard and mouse to make navigation within the Windows environment easier Exit from the Cinedeck user interface prefs menu exit application See 388 application on page 184 For those familiar with Windows systems open Device Manager and then locate and open Ports COM amp LPT For port details goto 8 2 RS 422 COM port setup on page 234 There are several ways to open Windows Computer Management and access Device Manager and Disk Management this is just one Io zz From the Windows desktop click on the Windows Explorer icon which should be just to the z right of the Windows Start menu at the lower left of the screen Esta E LUCRE iu mi I n If the icon is not there another easy way to open Windows Explorer is by B simultaneously pressing the Windows key and the E key The Windows key is next to the left Control key m y NUES Saar ee we WR boar E J E desktop windows explorer icon png Paint Home View Libraries Once Windows Explorer is open from the OO s n thes ET gt list at the left side of the screen right click QE ze 2 Libraries ary to see your Files and arrange them by Folder date and other properties Computer to open the properties menu E a N fu Documents Music Pictures Library Library K ie Library md Open in new window Click On Manage to open Comp
238. hen recording across a dedicated V LAN to an appropriate destination standard gigabit is fine for the normal compressed formats such as ProRes or DNxHD Conversely it goes without saying that you will nev er achieve the maximum theoretical throughput to any destination or device and recording an uncompressed HD stream across a standard gigabit network will not be successful however there are many more subtle vari ables when selecting an external destination such as pipe size network traffic multiuser and multi read write capability etc so thorough testing cannot be emphasized enough Cinedecks provide dual 1Gb LAN connections which can be teamed if your network supports that Some Cinedeck models also have an available PCIe slot and the option of installing a 10Gb Ethernet card 8 or 16Gb Fiber Channel card or direct attached storage adapter to support high bitrate sessions C 5 D O D O A x O O C O et O lt b gt lt D 2 Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 32 of 304 2 0 What s in the Box 2 1 Cinedeck RX3G Cinedeck RX3G is the solution for productions where space and weight are at a premium Taking its cue from fully loaded MX the rugged milled aluminum case is built to withstand environments that are on the move like OB vans or flight packs Weighing around 12lbs 5 5kg and measuring 4RU at half rack width RX3G brings tons of functionality in a small foo
239. hese ports can be used for connections between a Cinedeck and another computer workstation such as an Avid or FCP system eliminating the need for a RS 422 adapter One port per HD SD channel Each port can be used for remote control between a 3 5 RX3G back tape deck or other professional device and a Cinedeck channel The ports are bi pane p 2 directional allowing master mode for the Cinedeck to control attached devices or slave mode allowing external devices to control the Cinedeck 16 Monitor Our soem 3 pin XLR Line Level analog audio monitor output One output per channel The RX3G user interface can simultaneously be displayed on most DVI monitors You Serr may need to access the Windows Screen Resolution settings to properly configure your external display 14 RS 232 ports 15 RS 422 ports 17 DVI For GUI The RX3G user interface can simultaneously be displayed on most VGA monitors You panel p49 May need to access the Windows Screen Resolution settings to properly configure your external display 3 5 RX3G back BNC AES audio in and out connectors where each connection carrys two AES 19 AES IN amp Our panel p49 channels 3 5 RX3G back 18 VGA For GUI Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 50 of 304 RX3G back panel cont The RX3G timecode option provides three additional features Jam Sync Similar to a camera a tim
240. iew When recording the display will auto toggle between remaining space and PROXY SPACE TIME sqeen P59 approximate remaining time based on the selected encode bitrate Note the system is unaware if other channels are being written to the same destination drive so the available time estimate may need to be divided to accurately reflect remaining time Activates recording 122 RECORD BUTTON 8Multiview In Gang mode recording will be triggered on multiple channels screen p 88 In EDI record mode this button will display and load the first EDL event e Depending on the mode after recording starts the button name can change lt C ct lt p 2 Uu O Q D D 5 Besides off Gang record mode has two modes normal which simultaneously triggers Dn 5 8 Multi view all selected channels and staggered which triggers each selected channel separately screen p 88 after a user defined time delay This is primarily used when writing to spinning disc systems to allow the drive heads time to recover between I O requests RS 422 selects remote control modes between off master slave and VDCP slave 124 RS 422 5 8 Multi view RS 422 modes can be set independently for each channel BUTTON sceen p88 Select master mode to control a connected device from the Cinedeck Slave and VDCP slave allow external systems to control the selected channel SDI char toggles the character and information overlay output on and off
241. iles See Edit while record See also FAQ amp Features H H 264 312 Headphone 98 Histogram 95 HotSwap 84 I Image Create system image 288 Create USB key 284 Restore factory image 282 Update USB key 283 Import settings 85 IMX D10 312 Input tab 138 Insert Edit 103 Inserting drives 69 Interplay See FAQ amp Features J JFIF proxy 312 JPEG 2000 J2K 312 K Keyboard shortcuts 77 181 L Licenses 181 Live to File 103 LUT files 85 91 95 M Manage licenses 181 Master tab 145 Audio delay 144 Media Composer Cinedeck August 27 2015 14 28 Digital Cut 239 Mode 187 MPEG IMX 312 Multi view 75 87 88 Playback 206 Recording 197 MX Back panel 59 Control panel 54 Front panel 52 Generalinfo 34 MXF 312 O On screen keyboard 83 Opla MXF 312 OpAtom MXF 312 Output mode 181 Overview tab 115 P Partitions 249 Path editor 128 Path amp file names Pin outs RS 422 238 Playback 205 Multi view 206 Single channel view 211 touch transport 209 Playback While Recording Playlist editor 225 Playlist manager 75 222 Playlist settings 229 Play While Record 103 Powering on 82 On screen keyboard 83 Prefs tab 181 Project manager 119 Edit user wildcards 132 File name editor 130 Path 128 Path editor 128 Path amp file names 122 124 122 124 110 Scenes list 134 Sub scenes list 137 ProRes 312 Proxy tab 154 Q Quality bitrate 290 Data rates 339 Master 147 Proxy 155 Storage calculat
242. ilizes standard 9 pin serial data cables Complete VDCP documentation is available separately See Contacting Cinedeck on page 2 Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 243 of 304 O J3u02 1ouu u AIDA 8 7 Using VNC applications All Cinedecks can be controlled using standard VNC Virtual Network Computing remote access software Applications such as Teamviewer provide the full user interface at a remote workstation in the next room or miles away Most VNC applications provide direct point to point LAN access while Teamviewer also provides coordinated connections via their Internet server which can simplify installations especially for long distance remote sessions Because of this according to Teamviewer their application will always work if full Internet access is available which means there are no firewall issues As an alternative to the standard port 80 Teamviewer also evidently monitors port 443 Teamviewer also state it is also possible to open only port 5938 TCP on the outgoing side Data traffic should then be able to pass through on this port without any problems O J3u02 l1ouu u I Of course Teamviewer is not the only VNC application available Some other options are Tight VNC Ultra VNC and RealVNC C s O lt OQ CU 2 pa CU O Uu Note windows Remote Desktop Connection should never be used with the Cinedeck as it causes inconsist
243. ime code input to channels 1 and 2 for use with a house supplied LOOP ip timecode signal Signals which are input are passed to the out connector Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 61 of 304 E MX Back panel cont 2 UN et 2 Q zur O 80 LTC 3 amp A iN 327 ux Back panel LTC linear time code input to channels 3 and 4 for use with a house supplied LOOP ps3 timecode signal Signals which are input are passed to the out connector The MX user interface can simultaneously be displayed on most DVI or HDMI 8l DVI HDMI ron 3 MX Back panel ES NE monitors You may need to access the Windows Screen Resolution settings to GUI l properly configure your external display 82 ESATA ports MX has a total of four eSATA ports three on the rear panel one on the front panel joued Jpeg XN Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 62 of 304 3 8 ZX Front panel 2 UN et 2 Q zur O joued 1uoJ4 XZ 84 Door Lock P 64 P 64 85 Drive TRAYS P 64 BEHIND DOOR 86 Power BUTTON P 64 BEHIND DOOR 87 USB Port p 64 BEHIND DOOR Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 63 of 304 ZX Front panel cont 83 POWER AND 38ZX Front panel The right hand door covers the power rocker switch and provides access to the drive DRIVE A
244. in before the event in the Description Field below 9 This last dialog is simply a confirmation before the Time 12 29 2014 6 48 14 PM Eastern Standard Time Description Manual Cinedeck_Update process begins Drives gt 0 Press Finish to restore the system 10 The restore process will run System Restore IF vou have changed your Windows password recently we recommend Pre pa ri ng to restore Your sy stem that vou create a password reset disk Create a password reset disk System Restore needs to restart your computer to apply these changes Before you proceed save any open files and close all programs When the restore is complete the system will be Camel automatically restarted Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 279 of 304 9 16 Bluefish update All current Cinedeck systems utilize Bluefish cards for the primary video and AES inputs and outputs Firmware changes and updates for these systems require a separate installation 1 Connect a USB mouse and keyboard 2 Power on the Cinedeck and allow it to load fully Exit the Cinedeck application if it starts automatically e To exit press setup prefs exit application See 388 application on page 184 n D S lt O D go s O z o D 3 Cinedeck version 4 5 and newer comes with the Bluefish update installer in the c cinedeck redi
245. ination is full it switches to the second selected destination drive See redundant and rollover recording on page 31 5 21 Master tab 288 WRITE p 145 Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 150 of 304 Master tab cont At a minimum single see write above and a primary drive must be selected for Uu L E D an encode to be created This column can display many destination drives If your O D preferred destination is not visible additional drives can be moved into view with the selection up down arrows 289 PRIMARY 5 21 Master tab Alternatively you can select a drive with a preexisting folder structure and override p 135 the project folder path structure See 5 19 1 Path amp file names explained on page 122 To override project settings and manually select a drive and destination path Press project path override at the top of the drive list Navigate to the desired drive and folder Press save to return to the master encode setup page For redundant recording both primary and secondary destination drives must be selected If your preferred destination is not visible additional drives can be moved 290 SECONDARY sa MA into view with the selection up d d note that any drive already selected RUE p down arrows and note that any drive already selecte as the primary destination will not be available As with the primary files project path override is al
246. inedeck O D O D O 2 C iS O CU et D gt Uu et Q Gr O gt it Local Disk C E E loi x GO s Computer Local Disk C ka kl Search Local Disk C1 A Open Windows Organize J Open Include in library Share with Mew folder Bss o Mil amp Explore r Navigate to the f Pictures E Mame Date modified Tvpe Size 2 cAcinedeck folder and a a n Cinedeck 12 17 2014 11 53 AM File Folder open It Ml Computer k inetpub 8118 2012 12 38 PM File Folder a Local Disk C JL Intel Br 12012 1 19 PM File Folder E 55D 226 D A SOC arche BI2ZI2014 8 34 PM File Falder CS new FE 1L PerfLags 6 7 2012 3 56 PM File Folder cs PB Full F Program Files gnijz i4 5 52 AM ple Folder L data Yidaines 5 ai an Cinedeck Date modified 12 17 2014 11 53 AM 4 File Falder Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 273 of 304 Cinedeck Update installation cont Un D 2 m Cinedeck T d mi xl m gt Gal id p Im 5 Computer Local Disk C Cinedeck Kl Search Cinedeck D Qo Inedaeck TO Ide 4 m ERES locate HotSwap exe Organize w Open New folder E Hi O i Pictures E Name Date modified Type Size O 6 Press Control A BE Videos B ecitiist cal 8 2 2014 5 31 PM CDL File m to select all files I B PHE S212014 5 31 PM Text Document o Computer and then Press the i E m Dis
247. inedeck video preview DATA TOGGLES CLICK A SELECTOR TO TOGGLE DISPLAY INFORMATION ON OR OFF THE STATUS DISPLAY COLORS AND SIZES CAN BE ADJUSTED VIA THIS CONTROL PANEL STATUS INCLUDES THE CHANNEL IDENTIFIER AND ITS CURRENT STATUS TIMECODE INCLUDES InfShots mov I CURRENT TIMECODE WITH j DISPLAY STATUS REMAINING TIMECODE FUTURE FUNCTION TOGGLES FILE NAME DISPLAY TOGGLE TO DISPLAY USER ENTERED TEXT TEXT IS User entered text ENTERED BELOW C SE CU CU O D i O ct C UN O 3 N CU esto O STATUS INDICATES PLAY CHANNEL 1 PAUSED AND TIMECODE USER TEXT DISPLAY P1 lt PAUSE gt 00 07 58 00 TOGGLE DISPLAY OF MASTER amp PROXY AUDIO LEVELS CLICK TO OPEN ON SCREEN KEYBOARD TO HELP WITH ALIGNMENT TURN ON SNAP TO ACTIVATE AN INVISIBLE ALIGNMENT GRID WHICH DISPLAY ELEMENTS WILL SNAP TO WHEN MOVED Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 111 of 304 5 15 Overlay Customization TBA 5eJi 1l1ul Jes O lt D C lt O C n et O 3 N C ar O 5 Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 112 of 304 5 16 Video Analysis Tools Access to the video analysis tools is only available from the single channel view but the tools are available during record and playback Tools include waveform vectorscope histogram edge det
248. ini and 14 headphone jacks Dual headphone volume controls Internally MX provides four full duplex 3G channels with the full selection of master and proxy formats high bandwidth network capabilities and most of the available Cinedeck features In HD and SD mode MX records master and proxy for each channel With the 4K mode option MX simultaneously records 4K files HD master files HD proxy files and h 264 streamable files with or without LUT applied MX comes with Localized power cables A touch screen stylus One USB software installation disk Restore disk If you purchased accessories such as media drives or a rack kit with your Cinedeck they will be included in a separate box Please check to ensure that all expected contents are included In the event something is missing please immediately contact your reseller or Cinedeck Support See Contacting Cinedeck on page 2 Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 34 of 304 xog y ui S1euAM XIN 1299P9U1 Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 2 3 Cinedeck ZX ZX is a modular design based on MX Primarily for rack mount installations Cinedeck ZX lets you choose from a broad selection of software toolsets and hardware configurations to build a cost effective system that meets your specific ingest playback and transcoding needs As a result not all ZX systems have the same features but you
249. input allow spaces 393 USE OLD YUV 8 in file folder PESENE ne DRIVE MAPPING P 186 2 stereo pairs 4K or UHD dual link 1 5G 3G RAW 395 PD cave and 394 SAVE AND P x E s Support Helpdesk 1 646 642 6985 support cinedeck com Version 4 50 build 11789 Pre Release ias CLOSE P 186 396 SUPPORT INFO P 186 Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 181 of 304 Prefs tab cont 5 26 Prefs tab on The page selector tabs are always visible in the main setup area These can be clicked 382 PAGE TABS EI page 182 to provide direct access to each setup section The recording column adjust aspects of how a recorder starts and stops recordino UN D mj 2 et D Ty h CU O D When staggered record is off all ganged channels will be triggered simultaneously When on staggered record triggers recording and stopping sequentially based on the user defined delay The standard multi view and single channel view have separate record and stop buttons located at the top and bottom of the screen When single record stop button is active only a single button at 383 RECORDING the top is used and the available function of the button changes depending on the current activity qe sJ id Because many Cinedecks have touch screens which can accidentally be accessed the default setting is that stopping a recording requires pressin
250. io The input audio meters show real time activity for any channels receiving audio Note the yellow highlight at the top of the first audio pair this indicates the audio channels currently being monitored 5 23 Audio routing p 161 327 INPUT METERS These boxes represent each available record channel Each record channel can record any of the source audio channels Click the box to open this screen for selecting a source channel to be recorded 161 ONE M 5 23 Audio routing If audio delay has been set on the input page the amount of delay will be displayed 16D here See 277 audio delay on page 143 The presets menu allows easy selection of 2 4 6 8 12 or 16 channels to be recorded 328 SOURCE TO 5 23 Audio routing DESTINATION SELECTOR p 161 gt 2 O O m gt O When you select a preset the destinations are set as pairs in sequential order so incoming channel 1 is recorded on channel 1 incoming channel 2 is recorded on channel 2 and so on up to 32 channels or the maximum number of channels supported by the currently selected file wrapper 5 23 Audio routing p 161 330 PRESETS Additionally it is possible to copy the routing as already set by the related master or proxy encode and you can always manually change any of the destinations Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 162 of 304 Audio routing cont Audio chan
251. ion 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 275 of 304 Cinedeck Update installation cont Execute DX5etup exe silent Un D lt sala 8 Installing o Please wait while CinedeckRx3a is being installed T b O o D 12 The install will start 13 Depending on the nature of the update and the system you are updating dialog boxes for other driver installations such as this may appear xi Mulsoft Install yt R C C o O Would you like to install this device software Name Bluefish444 Australia Sound video and g 9 Publisher Bluefish Technologies Pty Ltd Always trust software From Bluefish Technologies Pty Ltd CinedeckRX3G Setup l 9 HE x 4 You should only install driver software from publishers you trust How can I decide which device l software is safe to install Installation Complete O D O D O 2 C gt O CU et D gt Uu et Q Gr O gt Pd E Setup was completed successfully Fy Show details 15 On first restart additional update notifications may appear Allow the firmware updates to run then restart again when prompted by the installer Mullsart Install System ve 46 Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 276 of 304 9 15 Using a Restore Point The Windows operating system can create a Restore Point the stored or memorized state of your system from a prev
252. ious time If you e Internet Explorer 64 bit A u gt C 9 qnoJ 79 e2lAJ8g inedeck i created a restore point you can use it to reset Documents your system back to that point Pictures Music 1 Connect a USB mouse and keyboard 2 Power on the Cinedeck e On RX exit the Cinedeck setup gt prefs exit application See 388 application on page 184 ES Open Control Pane Ay Manage Map network drive Devices and Disconnect network drive Default Prog Show on Desktop Rename Help and Sur properties L All Programs Search programs and files 2 Shut down gt 3 From the desktop select Start 4 Right click computer and select properties from the context menu System eS Ea Control Panel All Control Panel Items System I e Search Control Panel e Ag E O CU A D UN O D v O E ct P Control Panel Home View basic information about your computer Device Manager Windows edition 11 Pa d pc MA 5 In the properties dialog select System f System protection Copyright 2010 Microsoft Corporation All rights reserved D sy p Protection to open the System Protection tab in the System Properties dialog Service Pack 1 Hy Advanced system settings System Rating m Windows Experience Index Processor Intel R Core TM i7 3770 CPU 3 40GHz 3 40 GHz Installed memory RAM 8 0
253. isregard it qe xoJg Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 160 of 304 5 23 Audio routing Audio routing works the same for master and proxy files The only differences are the number of available audio source channels can change with the audio source and some file wrappers support fewer audio channels than others The upper meters indicate the sources and the row below the meters is used to select source channels to be assigned to a record channel UN D mj 2 et D i h CU O D 326 SOURCE AND 335 CHANNEL ENCODE DISPLAY TO P 164 TOGGLE P 164 P 162 gt SDI input2 Master ch1 16 G O ms 2 O 327 INPUT METERS P 162 334 ADDITIONAL CHANNELS TOGGLE P 164 328 SOURCE TO DESTINATION SELECTOR P 162 329 DELAY P 162 333 SAVE BACK 330 PRESETS P 162 331 coPv sETTINGS 332 UNDO P 163 ALL P 163 Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 161 of 304 Audio routing cont This text display indicates three things The audio source type SDI AES Analog 326 SOURCE AND 5 23 Audio routing The channel source ie input 1 input 2 etc 92e1193UT Jes ENCODE DISPLAY p 161 The currently selected encode receiving routing adjustments This case shows the audio routing for the first 16 channels of the master encode for input 2 which is using embedded SDI aud
254. k The file info region shows the format and file name for the current file If multiple files 422 FILE INFO multi view on l l page 206 or a playlist are loaded the display will change to reflect the file being played 423 OPEN T pack Press open to access clip manager and playlists manager multi view on E a i page 206 See 7 3 Clip manager on page 215 and 7 4 Playlist manager on page 222 Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 207 of 304 Playback multi view cont Playback in multi view includes a full array of transport controls egKe d Forward Loop Pressing By default Press to By default Pressing Press to Press to here will rewind is play Press fast here will activate set clear or move the 4x Press again to forward is move the continuous goto in and playhead again to pause 4x Press playhead looping out points to the pause A again to to the playback 424 TRANSPORT L start of the long press pause A end of the Long press CONTROLS page206 loaded clip displays long press loaded clip to select See note additional displays See note continuous below slow additional below ping pong and fast slow playback options and fast options Y D lt S D a A C lt D z When multiple clips or a playlist are loaded the goto buttons change their mode Press cue prev to move the
255. k C B GenericHelper dl 8121201434 5 31 PM Application extension Control key and Ca 550 226 D de HotSwap EXE 8 2 2014 5 31 PM Application click HotSwa pl exe ccs new E File description Safely HotSwap Hardware applet EAS to deselect it cs PE Full F Z rsIS Buffersize x86 re S RAS istration Entries tx data dainev5 z EE Date created 11 10 2009 4 01 PM u Size 105 KB 7 Press the Delete 136 items selected key to delete all of 5 Xn Show more details the selected files 8 Updates can be run from any local drive E Insert the USB drive x J X36 O D O D O 2 C iS O CU et D gt Uu et Q Gr O gt into one of the USB ports or locate Organize Open New Folder ict o FT the update file in e Documents a Name Date modified Type Siz a Music Explorer CinedeckSetupRx36_4 30 11211 exe 2 21 2014 11 59 PM Application Pictures i Videos 9 Double click the file to run the update E rM Computer and follow the Y Es Local Disk C prompts p 89 Network Z El KN Network E ARNON RAGAARNA Y AAA El y CinedeckSetupResG 4 30 11211 8xe Date modified 8 21 2014 11 59 PM 2 7 Application Size 166 MB Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 274 of 304 Cinedeck Update installation cont Open File Security Warning I X The publisher could not be verified Are you sure you want to run this software 10
256. ke After selecting an xml type xml path override can be selected to designate a specific destination folder for the xml files UN D mj 2 et D Ty h CU O D 319 Generate xm MSG xml generates an xml format for use by MSG NASA is a format for use at for NASA s Orion launch system AS 11 sidecar generates a AS 11 compatible xml Cinedeck xml generates a full generic xml with all data qe xoJg Record timecode offset provides an easy way to adjust or reset the incoming timecode but unlike generating new timecode the recorded timecode remains based on the source timecode keeping all of the breaks and changes For example your 320 USE RECORD TC 522Pproxytab Source may be arriving with timecode starting at 0 00 but because it is the fourth OFFSET p 134 in a set you want it to start at hour 4 With this setting you can apply a 4 hour offset Another example might be a source which was recorded with time of day in a different timezone and you want the timecode to reflect GMT or your local time zone Record timecode offset can be set independently for master and proxy encodes Like the name and label fields editable on the overview page encoder name reflects the encoder name variable or wild card displayed in the page tab bar The 321 ENCODER Name 522 Bres ap encoder name wild card can also be used in folder and file names The default names p 154 in 4 channel mode are master and proxy but as wi
257. ke your names more readable By default the Cinedeck system will allow spaces however it is recommended to turn that behavior off on the prefs setup page Turning allow spaces in file folder names off will force underscore characters into any names where you type a space See 5 26 Prefs tab on page 181 93 1934 Jes As noted above wildcards are the primary naming element The pop up below is available in project manager as a reminder and wildcards shortcut keys are available on the path and file name editing pages The default file name template is made up of 96P 96I 96E 96t project input encoder take number which for a project named Demo would generate a clip name such as Demo input3 master 009 Listed below are a few of the available wildcards with a more detailed description explaining what they represent and how they work P ied Contains the name of the project which the selected channel is assigned to and is automatically i pre populated when a channel is assigned to a project The default input names are inputl input2 etc Each channels input name wildcard can be l input independently renamed in project manager or on the overview page to better identify the channel source such as Cam01 VTR6 etc E encoder Default is master or proxy Each can be changed on the respective master or proxy encoder settings page so you might rename them to something more specific like DNx220 and DNx45 Jobeueuu pelold will get
258. king from left to right select resolution frame rate etc Select channel count to add audio channels You must use the TC calculator to set the timecode parameters for your blacked file Select a file location and give your new file a name Finally press generate file to create the black file 93 1934 Jes COLOR DEPTH CODEC AUDIO CHANNELS FILE LOCATION FRAME RATE FILE WRAPPER SAVE AS TIMECODE RESOLUTION ENCODE QUALITY CAIGUDATOR channel count 0 32 MOV stereo pairs DNxHD 4 2 2 YUV8 CY BQ D C et D 25 C Q sh SL D MOV WAV lar Normal MONO MPEG IMX generate file 00 58 30 00 sgag end TC a 4 BH B PER NTSCp b d x 32 00 00 In the timecode calculator you need to ied 79 set two parameters Set the start timecode and set either the end timecode or the duration You also have an option to select between drop or non drop frame timecode Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 109 of 304 5 13 Confidence Monitoring Whether for small inserts or complete programs an advantage of utilizing Insert Baseband mode for recording is that because the file already exists on disk the complete file is available to playback while recording This means for example after an insert recording is started on one channel the file can be opened in another channel and played This mode provides full transport control p
259. l p 222 Below the clip list are navigation arrows which become active for moving through lists which contain more entries than can be displayed on one screen Note playlist manager only shows media files recognized by the Cinedeck It is possible that folders contain other non media files which are not shown There are several list sorting controls located above the playlist in thumbs and list 7 4 Playlist View Press a sort name to sort the list by that data Press the same sorting name 462 SORT CONTROLS manager again to sort the list in reverse order p 222 The selected sort and sort direction is indicated by the green arrow list by name 74 Playlist Use select all and select none to select all or none of the playlists in the current 463 SELECT BUTTONS manager p 222 folder 74 Playlist Press play selected to load the selected playlist into the channel player and go back 464 PLAY SELECTED manager U l U l p 222 to the previous multi or single channel playback view 465 PLAY ALL IN ZA Playlist Select play all in folder to load all of the playlists in the current folder for playback manager i FOLDER p 222 and return to the previous multi or single channel playback view 466 EDIT SELECTED Ta VL Select a single playlist and press edit selected playlist to load the playlist Into the manager PLAYLIST p 222 playlist editor Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Versio
260. la and several image files with the complete Windows OS and Cinedeck software This USB should be kept accessible and updated in the event the system must be restored You should always copy any system updates to a folder on the USB key and it is a good idea to download updated image files a few times per year This is usually done after a major update ships See 9 18 Update a USB restore key on page 283 If the restore USB is damaged or misplaced a replacement can be purchased or you can download the files needed to create a new restore key See 9 19 Create USB restore key on page 284 9 qnoJ 79 31AJ9S Regular restores are recommended for facilities to clean machines which are rented out or are otherwise often not under their direct control Restoring is also useful for troubleshooting If a machine has an issue which cannot be quickly diagnosed it is often faster to restore than to search Generally if the problem persists after the restore it Is more serious and support should be contacted See Contacting Cinedeck on page 2 Before performing a full restore please save the log files dump files to a safe place and note any system changes you have made to your Cinedeck so you can recreate them after the restore 2 D Uu ect O D CU O ect O A lt 3 CU O D There are generally two steps perform the full base restore and then install the most recent version A Restore your Cinedeck 1 Shut the deck down
261. la image files for restoring a Cinedeck system New restore disks can be purchased or created as needed To create one two sets of files are required the latest OS drive image files for your Cinedeck model and the USB boot files These files can be downloaded separately so if you already have a recent set of image files all you need is the small boot files download If you need everything you can download the full restore zip Note that the image files are several gigabytes so should be downloaded with a proper FTP application such as Filezilla and when time is not of the essence For the FTP location of the restore disk updates for your system and the USB boot files contact Cinedeck See Contacting Cinedeck on page 2 9 qnoJ 79 e2lAJ8g Before starting you need a USB disk of at least 8GB Note some USB memory sticks will not be recognized at boot time at all so while not guaranteeing compatibility you should first test the USB disk with a Cinedeck 1 Shut the deck down and remove disconnect any media drives 2 Insert the new flash drive into a rear USB2 port and connect a keyboard to the rear USB ports 3 Power on the Cinedeck and For RX3G keep tapping the F7 key until you enter the startup menu For MX or ZX keep tapping the F8 key until you enter the startup menu You should see two or three drives listed the internal OS SSD and the USB flash drive which will usually be listed with its brand name and possibly again wi
262. lay forward fast rewind etc In the below example RX3G channel 1 is recording while channel 2 is playing the same file 93 1934 Jes Playback during insert can also be used during Avid Digital cut 3 4 Avid Digital Cut on page 239 For basic record and confidence playback for the channel which will be recording using Insert Baseband mode Set IC to gen on the master encode page Set record mode to insert or insert baseband For TC amp automation set record control to manual record TC trigger to gen and TC mode to free run Open the file which will be inserted into and start the recording e That same file can be loaded into another channel and played back O O 5 o D gt C D lt O 5 O gt O RECORDING AND PLAYBACK THE SAME FILE LOADED FOR Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 110 of 304 5 14 Character Out Customization Access for customizing the character overlay output can be found via the SDI character character out buttons on the multi and single channel view Character output can be customized for each channel independently From here you can add or remove metadata and system information from the overlay Data display blocks can be dragged with a mouse to any area on the screen 93 1934 Jes Note The character overlay output is displayed both on the SDI output of the selected channel and the C
263. lay for viewing video and manipulating the user interface All Cinedecks can have an external display attached for viewing video and manipulating the system RX and newer recorders can be configured to use an HID compatible external touch display Page 301 of 304 seJnjeeJ 9 OVS soJnjeo4 lt OVS FAQ gt Features cont 10 62 Transcoding The full duplex independent channel control of Cinedeck RXB and newer recorders allows selecting content to play and simultaneously encode in any other format in real time For example some uncompressed source content on a RXB could be transcoded in real time to AVC Intra 10 63 Upcoming Features o FIFO Loop Record Time Delay o Expanded transcoding o Advanced scheduling o Watermarking 10 64 Updates Cinedeck recorders are expressly designed to be enhanced with new features and functions extending the life and relevance of the systems Cinedeck delivers several major updates each year o Updates come as exe files which are generally about 250MB downloadable and usually take about two minutes to apply o Each Cinedeck ships with a system restore disc to use for resetting the deck back to a complete clean factory state The re imaging process takes about 10 minutes o Some optional and upcoming features may require the purchase of additional licenses o Cinedecks are designed from the ground up to allow system and interface customizations as well as completely custom OEM prod
264. leaning removing all partition information This is followed by initializing the drive creating a new volume and formatting it w gt First you need to determine the disk number for the drive you want to reinitialize One way to discover 2 this information is via Disk Management See 9 5 Initializing new drives on page 251 to open Disk Management LO n Computer Management Le fe mew In Disk Management Ele Action View Help locate the drives di es 2 HE mx ea mu Computer Management Local Volume needing maintenance in the list at the Type File System Status Capacity Fr Actions Layout a TL System Tools c C Simple Basic NTFS Healthy Boot Page File Primary Partition 27 34 GB 5 Disk Management H p Task Scheduler C s PB Full D Simple Basic NTFS Healthy Primary Partition 119 24 GB 11 3 Event Viewer Ca Samsung 426 G Simple Basic NTFS Healthy Primary Partition 23847 GB 20 More Actions gt rl 9 ht an d n ote th elr 1 Shared Folders Cs SSD 226 F Simple Basic NTFS Healthy Primary Partition 11924 GB 55 1 1 g Local Users and Groups System Reserved Simple Basic NTFS Healthy System Active Primary Partition 100 MB 74 res pective d rive numbers Disk 2 which is mounted as DA will be used in this Performance Ey Device Manager 4 c 4 5 Storage lt Disk Management Disk 1 usa uau b cq8 lt 5
265. lete all in folder to delete all of the clips in the current folder rewrap selected is an upcoming feature 7 3 Clip manager 0524115 452 MANAGE CLIPS transcode selected is an upcoming feature Use copy to to copy the selected clips to another destination Use rename to rename a selected clip 73 Clip manager Press the select all button to select all of the clips in the current folder Press the select none button to deselect all of the clips in the current folder Page 220 of 304 egKe d Jabeuew di 5 Clip manager cont Cinedecks have a simple non linear editing interface playlist manager for compiling clips and sub clips into a single virtual container for playout Press here to add selected clips to a new or existing playlist Note that all clips must be the same frame rate and color bit depth to be included in the same playlist See 7 4 Playlist manager on page 222 If you choose new playlist from selected Select the drive where you want to save the playlist Select the file name field right of the file name label and enter a file name Dr 73 Clip manager Press save and close and press OK Playlist manager opens and you can navigate to the location where the playlist was saved and open it in the playlist editor or play it out If you choose add to existing playlist Select the drive where the destination playlist is saved and navigat
266. lobal wildcards management I 4 4 4 4 uis Opens EDL Editor NOT Sitch naming to next scene name P Switch naming to previous scene name CiN Switch naming to next sub scenename C Ctrl P Switch naming to previous sub scenename o CRY Inementnamingtonextrolnumbe rC Ctrl Shift R Increment naming to previous roll number Ctrl D Deletelastrecorded clip on all channels Soo Goto Setup F8 Start recording on all channels _________________ Cu r Stop recording on all channels 4 AL 203 Open list manager for user list 1 2 or 3 respectively 5eJi 1l1ul Jes N D lt C O o o UN 3 O 5 et O et UN manager Control D A Select no clips FP NE Scan selected drive or folder for media Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 80 of 304 Keyboard shortcuts cont Left arrow or key Step backwards one frame Left arrow long press Play 1x speed backwards Right arrow or key Step forwards one frame I Right arrow long press PlayIxspeedforwards 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Shifte StepbackwardslOframes Shift gt Y Step forwards 10 frames i semi colon GoTo start of clip o aposrophe jGolfoendofdip
267. lt O a Services and Applications Basic Samsung 426 G 238 47 GB 238 47 GB NTFS Online Healthy Primary Partition exam p e 1 PB Full D ary Partition prs 110 GB usually CA and noted as Primar Unallocated dA the boot partition System Res C 28 55 GB 100 MB NTF 27 34 GB NTFS Healthy Sys Healthy Boot Pags nallocated Bil Primary partition Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 256 of 304 Reinitializing SSDs cont 1 After locating the disk numbers DiskPart exe can be Programs 1 used to remove the existing partition from a disk El diskpart exe DiskPart is a Windows command line program which can be run from within Windows 9 qnoJ 79 31AJ9S Type diskpart exe into the search field at the bottom j of the Windows Start Menu and the program will appear in the file list above Press Enter to start the program See mare results diskpard x Shutdown D ct 2 N 5 UN UN UO UN E C Windows system32 diskpart exe Microsoft DiskPart version 6 1 7661 Copyright C 1999 2008 Microsoft Corporation On computer CINEDECK PC DISKPARTS list disk At the command line type list disk without the Disk fH Status i quotes and press Enter Online GB 1129 M DiskPart will list all of the disks currently available to the Windows system by disk number
268. luding loading clips into selected channels for playback Cinedeck MCC utilizes the AMP protocol from Grass Valley which is a well documented enhancement of the Odetics command set The AMP API can be used for complete management and control of multiple Cinedecks from other systems such as those for media asset management See 8 5 AMP protocol on page 242 For additional information about using AMP or Cinedeck MCC contact Cinedeck support See Contacting Cinedeck on page 2 For use with KVM systems Cinedeck recorders have USB and every deck has at least two types of monitor ports VGA DVI HDMI Display port See the specifics for each deck in 3 0 Installation on page 37 VNC applications such as Teamviewer and Real VNC offer an excellent way to gain full access to the complete user interface from the next room or the next country See 8 7 Using VNC applications on page 244 USB control panels such as X Keys can be used and on a more basic level a USB mouse an keyboard can be connected For RS 422 specifics see the next few pages Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 232 of 304 O J3u02 0W Y Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 8 1 Device Manager To assure proper RS 422 connectivity and performance the COM port settings should be confirmed The procedure for all decks is the same however the settings are a bit different for eac
269. ly be configured for the source qe indu Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 143 of 304 9 20 1 Audio delay Each incoming audio channel can be independent delayed by up to 999 milliseconds about one second Clicking on the delay display below each channel opens the audio delay interface Click the arrows to increment or type the required delay in the ms field UN D mj 2 et D Ty h CU O D inputt_audio delay AUDIO INPUTS qe 1ndul CHANNEL DELAY DISPLAY Lollo Lelle olle Lelo Lello ele elle ello INCREMENT MS DELAY FIELD ARROWS audio input dela y ms 1000 divided by your frame rate determines the per frame millisecond delay Delay Frame 23 98 41 70141785 41 66666667 3 50 e op olpny 29 97 33 36670003 33 33333333 59 94 16 68335002 60 1666666667 Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 144 of 304 5 21 Master tab The master page is where you set all of the master file encode parameters such as codec wrapper timecode source etc To do so it is very important to understand the difference between the codec the quality or bit rate and the wrapper See 10 1 FAQ gt Features on page 289 Generally you make selections starting at the left as each selection can have a filtering effect on the available options See the screen shots on this and the next p
270. marks of their respective companies 1 3 Safety Information CY O is lt O zu et CU 5 o eU CU ar D 3 CU y 2 LT WARNING Take care of your Cinedeck as you would cameras and other sensitive electronic equipment Take care especially to keep water and moisture away from the unit Getting your Cinedeck wet will void the warranty and UBA 2 69 11 68 15 ole WARNING Your Cinedeck needs ventilation for safe operation 15165 ext block the front or rear of the unit as this will restrict airflow causing it to overheat potentially damaging the unit and voiding the warranty Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 28 of 304 1 4 FCC and CE Information Caution The Federal Communications Commission warns the user that changes or modifications to the unit not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment uononpodiu FCC Class B Statement rhis equipment has been tested and found to comply with limits for Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of Federal Communications Commission FCC rules CC and CE Complia nce Statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits of the European Council Directive on the approximation of the law of the member states related to electromagnetic compatibility 89 336 EEC according to EN 55022 Class B uoneuuoju JD pue 523 Th
271. me templates p 124 221 save amp CLOSE 3132 fae fie Pressing save and close confirms any changes closes the project setup screens and name templates BUTTON p 124 returns to the main setup area Along with the many system provided wildcards or variables users can also create six of their own project based wildcards for regularly used data such as a show number name templates or program ID User wildcards have a title or name which is displayed in the wildcard Jobeueuu pelold 222 EDIT USER 5 19 2 Path amp file WILDCARDS o es l pia list and an expansion the actual data associated to the name which is inserted into a name at record time See 5 19 5 Edit user amp global wildcards on page 132 Opens a pop up window with a list of wildcards or variables Especially useful if you have opted in prefs to not use the on screen keyboard 223 SHOW 5 19 2 Path amp file name templates WILDCARDS p 124 224 RESET TO See Pressing here will reset all of the path and file naming templates to the standard name templates I DEFAULTS p 124 layout and wildcard selections Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 126 of 304 UU CU ct 2 go D J CU j D c D pel CU c D WY Project manager Path amp file name templates cont Displays the current name template for the tape or reel ID Click here to customize 2 19 2 Path amp fl
272. metadata cont The Cinedeck metadata is DPP compatible If changes or additions to the initially created metadata are required after recording is completed the content can be edited with the DPP Metadata Application DESCRIPTIVE mS METADATA CAN BE IMPORTED EXPORTED AND EDITED USING AN ON SCREEN OR USB KEYBOARD VIDEO METADATA PARAMETERS CAN BE ADJUSTED WITH THE VARIOUS ON SCREEN SELECTOR BUTTONS UN D mj 2 et D Ty h CU O D TIMECODE PART time code AUDIO METADATA METADATA CAN E PARAMETERS CAN BE IMPORTED s timecode SOM BE ADJUSTED WITH EXPORTED AND naro 10 00 00 00 73 THE VARIOUS ON ENTERED USING ation SCREEN SELECTOR ejepejau ddd THE ON SCREEN 00 00 00 00 Ld L BUTTONS THERE IS CALCULATOR ALSO A COMMENT FIELD FOR USER ENTERED DATA ACCESSIBILITY access service THE LAST PAGE IS aditional info SERVICES CAN BE L FOR ADDITIONAL NOTATED USING Y an MISCELLANEOUS THE VARIOUS ON wa METADATA SCREEN SELECTOR BUTTONS Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 193 of 304 5 29 Signal Generator tab Cinedecks with the signal generator are able to output various test patters and audio signals for testing downstream connections Click enable to turn on signal generator output for the selected channel and then set the required output settings ENABEL DISABLE 4 2 2 YUV10 VIDEO AND AUDIO OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS Cined
273. n 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 223 of 304 Playlist manager cont Select manage playlists to perform tasks such as deleting Destructive functions will be grayed out and unavailable if disable file delete and disk erase is enabled on the prefs page See 386 prefs on page 184 egKe d If the expected playlist is not shown select scan for playlists to rescan the current folder for playlists and add them to the media database To delete the selected playlist press delete T ce 7 4 Playlist To edit the selected playlist press edit selected playlist Access to manager EI eu i PLAVLISTS ns editing a playlist is also availble on the main screen RU C lt cr S 5 O O D sS Use rename selected playlist to rename the selected playlist y 468 LIST VIEW eee Press the thumbs list toggle to switch the playlists manager view between thumbnail TOGGLE p 222 view and the more detailed list view 74 Playlist This menu is for future use 469 EXPORT manager p 222 74 Playlist Select back to close playlists manager and return the the previous single or multi 470 BACK manager p 222 channel view Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 224 of 304 7 4 1 Playlist editor The playlist editor is a basic non linear editing interface designed primarily to create simple compilations of clips and sub clips for play
274. n USB Serial Converter This device uses the default Wr suc settings as shown below Manufacturer FTDI Location B 3 Its pe r secon General Port Settings Driver Details on USB Serial Converter Data bits 1 Bits per second ETS Parity Databits 2 rj Stop bits Parity None y Stop bits 1 y Elow control Noe y Flow control Advanced Restore Defaults Advanced Settings for COM8 i COM port Number E Cancel USB Transfer Sizes Select lower settings to correct performance problems at low baud rates And for all decks under Advanced the COM port Select higher settings For Faster performance number needs to be 8 Receive Bytes T y Transmit Bytes 4096 Y T h E U S b Tra D sfe j S IZ S gt fo r Re c e Ive a n d fra n S m it diem settings to correct response problems a AS should both be 4096 bytes Srl rte Latency Timer msec 16 Y Cancel If Power Off Event On Surprise Removal Timeouts Set RTS On Close T h B M h d b 1 6 Disable Modem Ctrl At Startup e atency timer should be set to 16ms Pe Minimum Write Timeout msec lo Selective Suspend Idle Timeout msec 5 The Minimum Read amp Write Timeouts should both be set to O Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Cancel Defaults LN NM M M M MX 4 Page 237 of 304 O J3u02 0W Y
275. n a SSD drive SSDs do have their own peculiar issues which can develop over time issues which can be enhanced when SSDs are moved between machines and especially when they are moved between operating systems If you find that a SSD is not performing well even after a format there are two things you can do delete the partition and re create and format the partition See 9 6 Reinitializing SSDs on page 256 or really the best things is to use the SSD manufacturers secure erase application Secure erase essentially resets the drive clearing all memory and partition data For details on Samsung s Secure Erase see 9 11 Secure erase on page 266 For additional information about secure erase see the SSD manufacturers website System Reset If your recorder is acting erratically there are a few things you can do to get back on track 1 Presuming the Cinedeck interface is accessible the first and fastest is to go to the prefs page and select reset all settings to default Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 246 of 304 Best practices cont 2 If setup and or prefs is not accessible from the Windows desktop navigate to C Cinedeck and delete prefs ini This removes some basic system parameters and forces the system to rewrite the prefs file 3 If deleting prefs ini is not helpful navigate again to C Cinedeck and delete the following files cinedeck db prefs ini Also dele
276. n and get to that video and audio content Again it is important to know in advance what the preferred workflow is 10 4 What is bitrate quality Bit rate is the rate at which data is being used to capture content and can be expressed in several ways Mbit s megabits per second and MB s megabytes per second are the most common Generally a higher bit rate will mean higher quality but because of compression it is absolutely possible to achieve the same visual quality at different data rates It should also be noted that most video compression schemes are lossy meaning that enough visual data is thrown away in the compression process to visually degrade the image There are also some codecs like JPEG 2000 which offer a mathematically lossless quality meaning that when compared to an original uncompressed version of the same image there is no mathematical difference between the two There are many opinions as to what quality level is acceptable but it comes down to balancing factors like visual quality performance and storage space which is why it is again critical to know what the requirements are 1 To convert megabits per second to megabytes per second multiply by 125 10 5 4K amp RAW Cinedeck MX and ZX support 4K YUV 4096x2160 and UHDTV 1 YUV 3840x2160 recording while simultaneously writing HD master files proxy files and streamable H 264 files all with associated metadata and the file naming you choose to smooth the proce
277. n is only around 14MB sec far less than the sustained file transfer speed of a modern 7200RPM spinning disk the physical head will be incredibly stressed as it attempts to keep up with updating 40 individual files in real time pushing it close to or over the edge D D O O e O o D UN m j D a O UN e External hard disk performance is also heavily dependent on the hardware controller and its firmware Some manufacturers controllers are much better than others at handling the kind of sustained data rates and file system overhead required for video recording Thus the same physical hard drive in two different enclosures may perform with very different results RAID arrays can mitigate I O and throughput issues by spreading file writes across two or more physical drives so if experimenting with external drives a RAID can be a better approach however extensive testing is still required Hard drive enclosure manufacturers also change the specifications and internal components of their products without necessarily making such changes obvious with a change in product model name or in the product documentation In short Model X may have different hardware controllers firmware drive interfaces and drives depending on when or where it was manufactured or simply by component availability at the time In practice this means that two of the same drive may not have the same performance despite outward appearances VIVS 3
278. nd Windows system limitations Jobeueuu pelold It can be technically argued to be a slightly different character count but for our purposes the Windows operating system effectively restricts the total path and file name to a maximum of 255 characters after the drive letter ie XNa maximumWof 255 charactersvand system charactersNncluding name and file extension It is recommended to always use an auto incrementing element in your file name such as take number to assure that each clip gets a unique name during your recording session Duplicate names will not overwrite existing content however they will prevent recording The default naming template includes an incrementing take number For readability and future manageability it is a good practice to keep the folder and file length as short as is practical by using abbreviations and phonetics while still maintaining a very human readable name Careful use of upper and lower case characters can also help Additionally it is recommended to not use spaces in file or folder names Spaces in folder and file names can make them incompatible with computer systems which may a et Sj Qo gt D 5 D 3 D UN D x pol 5 D o Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 122 of 304 Project manager Path amp file names explained cont at some point interact with your content in the future Using underscore and hyphen can help ma
279. nded for disks larger than 278 or disks used on Itanium based computers Cancel lolx Fie Action View Help esi 5 ct N 5 Te 5 D 2 o lt D UN Ae Computer Management Local volume Layout Type File System Status Capacity Free Space Actions El System Tools C C Simple Basic NTFS Healthy Boot Page File Primary Partition 27 34 GB 7 93 GB Disk Management T Task Scheduler C s System Reserved Simple Basic NTFS Healthy System Active Primary Partition 100MB X 74 MB E EN Event Viewer More Actions K If the dialog did not display but the drive is listed on the right as Unknown you can manually open the initialize dialog by right El ga Shared Folders A Local Users and Groups amp 8 Performance y Device Manager E 3 Storage 29 Disk Management E 7 Services and Applications A M II H L Disk 0 clicking Unknown and 7 system Res HT tat JU 1100 MB NTFS 27 34 GB NTFS 1 10 GB se ecti n g In itia IZe D IS k t Online Healthy Syst Healthy Boot Page File Primary F pem p Disk 1 Unknown Initialize Disk 476 94 GB Not Initialized Offline Properties B Unallocateo Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 252 of 304
280. ndicator will light green when an external a black burst or tri level sync reference signal is detected E 5 9 Single channel The sync settings are available on the input page of the setup screen For normal view p33 operation sync is set to auto In auto mode internal reference is used unless the external signal is detected See 273 sync on page 141 2 S TE 5 9 Single channel The signal indicator will light green when the system detects and is set properly to view p93 match an incoming signal Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 97 of 304 5 10 Headphone Monitor Controls The headphone monitor control panel is used to select the channel pair being monitored and adjust left and right audio levels 93 1934 Jes RESET ALL FADERS ADJUSTABLE CHANNEL NEXT lt gt PREVIOUS CLOSE BUTTON CHANNEL IDENTIFIER TO UNITY FADERS CHANNEL SELECTOR S O1JUOD JOHUO N SUOYAPLa9H T IIIIIIIIII IIIIZTWI IIIAII IIIIIIIAIIITIIIIIII il li IIIOOIIzIIIIII IIA I I IIIIIIIIIIIIZI I IIIUIIOIIOII Ili I IIII II IIWIIIOII IIIIIIIAII II I I IIIIUUIIIIUIOII II III lIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIzI II I IIIIIIIIIIZI IOIIIIzI OGIIIIII II O IIIIIRII II 0I UTI T lilii W HH E E E GG x i i mT III III WW EE E GHI OIIIIIIIIIIIIIIAI IIIIHIIIIIIIIWIDIIIWI IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII II es gt lt a ca ame d c
281. nected Press auto detect This will provide initial input settings You can then make fine adjustments such as selecting 10bit if you know you have 10bit source and select your audio source SDI AES Analog See the specific control descriptions for details UN D mj 2 et D Ty h CU O D 263 RES 264 fps 265 266 267 268 269 270 SIGNAL 271 FRAME RESOLUTION FRAME RATE FORMAT TRANSPORT SOURCE AUDIO PREVIEW LOSS BEHAVIOR DROP BEHAVIOR PES P 139 P 139 P 139 P 139 P 139 P 139 P 140 P 140 P 141 TOGGLE P 141 T 273 SYNC I 262 PAGE TABS P 139 T H ma ma qe1 1ndul 280 AUTO DETECT earn copy to other P 143 channels CLOSE P 141 P 143 P 143 DELAY P 143 OTHER CHANNELS SETTINGS FROM P 142 P 142 Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 138 of 304 Input tab cont Doo Nae TAGE 5 20 Input tab The page selector tabs are always visible in the main setup area These can be clicked p 158 to provide direct access to each setup section You can view and select the input resolution in this vertical listing When you selected auto detect the input resolution should have been detected and a green lamp 263 RES RESOLUTION de S should be illuminated at the bottom of the screen If not confirm that there is actually a signal and that the BNC c
282. nedeck website V1VS9 9 4SN Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 44 of 304 3 3 3 Network Storage Recording to a SAN or other network based solution requires adequate infrastructure and staff with the IT knowledge and experience with each system to configure and maintain it properly Your Cinedeck supports 1Gb networking and some Cinedecks can be configured with a Fibre Channel or 10Gb Ethernet host adapter for use with higher speed networks uonej ei1sur SAN based recording can be extremely efficient and cost effective especially for long form multi camera shows with tight editing deadlines or in a facility where direct access to recorded media is required Because the various Cinedeck platforms are Windows 7 based generally very little setup is required on the Cinedeck side for operation with a SAN The network environment and any SAN client software needs to be installed and configured properly by an IT professional There are some important issues to keep in mind 1 recording over a network can create a large single point of failure 2 network topology and 3rd party software SAN clients and managers add additional levels of maintenance support D D O O 2 O o D UN m j D a O UN The list grows constantly however some NAS and SAN solution manufacturers whose products are known to be used with Cinedeck products include Avid ISIS Drobo Facilis TerraBlock
283. nel routing can be selected and set independently for each channel and for each encode To simplify setting audio for multiple channels its is possible to copy setting to or from selected channels 92e1193UT Jes the audio settings from this page to other channels 5 23 Audio routing 331 COPY SETTINGS p 161 gt 2 O O m gt O from to copy audio settings from another channel to the current channel 332 UNDO ALL Undo all cancels all changes and returns to the encode page 333 SAVE BACK Save Back saves all changes and returns to the encode page Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 163 of 304 Audio routing cont This control switches between the first 16 channels and the second 16 channels of 334 ADDITIONAL audio which can be encoded While SDI only supports 16 channels some files can CHANNELS TOGGLE support up to 32 audio tracks hence the router gives you direct access for managing all 32 tracks 93 1934 Jes The channel toggle next ch prev is available on all main setup pages Clicking the 335 CHANNEL 5 23 Audio routing right or left arrow allows easy switching to the next or previous channel The input TOGGLE p 161 master and proxy tab names reflect the change displaying the names associated to the selected channel 3348 quam 523 Audio routing Switch to is a toggle which provides direct access to either the master or the proxy
284. neous Event On Surprise Removal e C COM 11 MX ZX CH 3 Minimum Read Timeout msec Set RTS On Close e D COM 12 MX ZX CH 4 Minimum Write Timeout rnsec Disable Modem Ctrl At Startup 7 it DN N N l AO O lt is O Uu D ect c For all decks the USB Transfer Sizes for Receive and Transmit should both be 4096 bytes alde pres Note Some early MX units had RS 422 ports installed in a different sequence If the COM ports for ch2 and ch3 are not working try The BM latency timer should y another port as they may be mounted as in the right diagram be set to 5ms however if there are performance issues with the connected device the value can be COM9 CH1 COM10 CH2 COM9 CH1 COM11 CH3 reduced gt s RS422 RS422 Lastly the Minimum Read amp Write Timeouts should both be set to 500 COM11 CH3 COM12 CH4 COM10 CH2 COM12 CH4 Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 236 of 304 RS 422 COM port setup cont Additionally all Cinedecks manufactured after November 2014 utilize a newer zl General Port Settings Driver Details multi mode RS 422 control board allowing the RS 422 ports to be bidirectional _ USB Serial Port COMS The properties for one of the USB Serial Ports listed in Device Manager will not indicate a letter location such as A or B It will still show the manufacturer as FTDI but the location is o
285. ng is in use all selected channels will stop Primarily the encode overview region shows from left to right the current file name settings for the master and proxy and if activated the current file name settings for the redundant copy master and proxy The overview displays codec and input settings for the master and proxy encodes and in several columns indicates audio The number of audio channels being recorded a d If delay is active for one or more audio channels LUT If a file is being recorded with a color LUT applied E ISL EE Brn If a character burn is being applied to the video slate If slate information is included in the clip disk The size of the destination disc remain The remaining space on the destination disc And when recording the area between slate and disk opens up to reveal a data rate display for each encode Additionally when touched or clicked the left region of the encode overview displays the destination folder path for each file The play button will load and play the most recently recorded clip If nothing is in 157 PLAY 5 9 Single channel the last play memory pressing play will go directly to the clip manager If a clip is 4ew p 3 loaded for playback the play button is renamed open and when pressed will open 156 ENCODE zi e D O D qu ES p z OVERVIEW the clip manager Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 20
286. ng as the machine is still under a current warranty 10 68 Wrappers Cinedeck uses Avid Op Atom MXF and MOV wrappers in combination with the most common use of the appropriate codec i e DNxHD can be wrapped as MXF OpAtom for true Avid native integration but many of the codec options available on every Cinedeck provide a choice of wrappers including 1 Workflow package selection determines wrapper availability on ZX o Avid MXF Op Atom o MXF Op 1A AS 02 AS 11 DPP compliant o MOV Interleaved Mono or MOV video with separate WAVE audio o AVI o MP4 10 69 XML data Each recording session can be accompanied by clip specific xml files The completed xml files contain clip specific metadata which can be imported into asset managements systems and the like The destination folder can also be selected for the xml files Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 303 of 304 seJnjeeJ 9 OVS soJnjeo4 lt OVS 10 2 This Page intentionally left blank Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 seJnjeeJ 9 OVS Page 304 of 304 11 0 Specifications 11 1 Basic specifications Cinedecks have similar specifications and a broad virtually identical feature set but there are some differences in capability and feature availability This is particularly true for the modular ZX which can be purchased with a customized feature selection So although a
287. nitially show the start and end timecodes of the loaded clip clips WT 418 IN our multi view on or playlist When an in point and or out point have been set those timecodes are page 206 O displayed gt To TEE 7 1 Playback The Cinedeck interface supports touch and mouse drag transport actions on the x ene multi view on video preview part of the screen Above the touch transport button is activated paged noted by the border See 7 1 1 Playback touch transport on page 209 Although named differently than P amp M on the standby view the file button lt also toggles the on screen overlay of the audio channels in this case the audio Z 71 Playback Channels present in the loaded file 420 FILE multi view on When this overlay is active it is possible to select a different channel pair for monitoring A long press opens the audio monitor control screen where the headphone level can be adjusted monitored channel pair can be selected and a custom monitor mix can be setup The orange inverted triangle play head marker is always located at the currently 71 Playback displayed video frame The play head can be clicked and dragged to scrub the video 421 PLAY HEAD multi view on Note that if play mode is active audio can be heard during scrubbing but scrub EE performance is better when playback is stopped Additionally scrub performance is better with I frame codecs than GoP codecs 71 Playbac
288. nnels and staggered which triggers each selected channel separately view p 93 after a user defined time delay This is primarily used when writing to spinning disc systems to allow the drive heads time to recover between I O requests LUT accesses on off toggle and setup buttons for selecting an on screen color LUT 148 LUT E oe arie E ae LUT files can be loaded from any connected drive When active this preview LUT has no effect on recorded video Char out toggles the character and information overlay output on and off for the user 146 RECORD 147 GANG zi e D O D qu ES p z 5 9 Single channel Interface video display and the SDI out A long press provides access to setup which ew p93 opens a setup screen for customizing the character output See 5 14 Character Out Customization on page 111 The overlays button accesses on off toggle buttons and settings for on screen ad overlays aspect ratio borders aspect ratio letterbox shading safe area borders grids 149 CHAR OUT 150 OVERLAYS ven and crosshairs See 5 15 Overlay Customization on page 112 The analysis button accesses on off toggle buttons and settings for the on screen video tools waveform vectorscope histogram clipping edge detect and setup for the clipping level The waveform display can be switched between a 0 255 c i EE T digital scale 20 120 IRE scale and a 0 100 percentage scale The waveform and histogram
289. nnels for the selected source The boxes below each channel indicate the destination tracks Click a box below the channel 1 meter to select a source track for channel 1 and so on For more detail see 5 23 Audio routing on page 161 309 TIMECODE Displays the timecode selected on the master page 154 i 310 SEGMENT 322 royta Displays the segment mode selected on the master page Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 156 of 304 Proxy tab cont There are several options for writing media files Single writes the selected encode to a single destination drive 522Prxytab Redundant writes the selected encode to two drives simultaneously p 129 e Rollover writes the selected encode to the first selected drive and when that destination is full it switches to the second selected destination drive See redundant and rollover recording on page 31 At a minimum single see write above and a primary drive must be selected for an encode to be created This column can display many destination drives If your preferred destination is not visible additional drives can be moved into view with the selection up down arrows 522 Proxy tab Alternatively you can optionally select a drive with a preexisting folder structure and p 159 override the folder path structure designed in 5 19 1 Path amp file names explained on page 122 in the project manager To select
290. nter to save and return to the previous screen and Escape to cancel changes and return to the previous screen remain available across most screens A D lt C O o o UN 3 O 5 et O et UN Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 77 of 304 Keyboard shortcuts cont Control K Toggle the display of the keyboard shortcuts overview screen Alt K Toggles between using the on screen keyboard or direct field typing for data entry areas such as creating file names Control Enter ws Toggles showing or hiding the mouse cursor Toogles the user interface window mode Normally the Cinedec interface Alt Enter runs full screen pressing Alt Enter puts the interface into a standard MS Windows re sizable frame Me eo a Directly selects the active and visible channel by number The numbers y above the S LSU keys or the numeric keypad can be used 92e1193UT Jes Hab i Selects displays the next channel U I I 4 4 Ra G channel Fo Sitch all channels to playback mode Foo Toggle gang mode normal On Off for all channels Fa C Switch all channels to preview EtoEmode C oo FA Toggle gang mode staggered On Off for all channels Enter Save any changes and return to the previous screen Escape Cancel any changes and return to the previous screen N D lt C O o o UN 3 O 5 et O C et UN Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck V
291. ock UI p 56 48 cH 1 ON Am P 56 51 cH 4 p 56 52 FULL MINI FULL SCRN P 56 53 LOOP PING PONG P 56 47 LED INDICATORS P 55 lt 46 sHIFT P 55 54 BACK P 56 gt O 45 REWIND P 55 55 PAUSE P 56 J 44 RECORD P 55 56 FORWARD FAST P 57 5 D 43 REVERSE PLAY P 55 57 PLAY P 57 42 FRAME 1 58 FRAME 1 LOAD CLIP P 55 LOAD PL P 57 41 PREV CLIP p 55 xn ED lt gt lt 40 set IN P 55 x 60 set our P 57 e SET IN SET OUT J 39 SELECT OPEN P 55 G 7 5 38 JOG SHUTTLE D KNOB P 55 Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 54 of 304 MX front panel MX control panel cont The MX jog shuttle knob has two rotating parts an inner disc with finger dent which can be a continuously rotated and an outer ring which moves about ninety degrees in each direction from the middle parked position M pane encase View video frames slowly frame by frame by rotating the inner jog disc clockwise and ka counter clockwise Clockwise rotations move forward in time Shuttle forward and reverse to 20x speed by rotating the outer ring clockwise and counter clockwise Rotating in a clockwise direction moves forward in time 39 SELECT OPEN pane on age A dual function button When shift is pressed first opens selected clip or playlist 2 UN et 2 Q zur O
292. of 304 9 3 Important drive information Im porta Nt Most issues that arise during recording are media related Improper formatting including incorrect file system or cache settings use of drives on other file systems before recording eg offloading media on a Mac formatting on a system other than Windows7 and improper removal of the drives after recording can all affect the state and performance of drives and negatively impact recording 9 qnoJ 79 31AJ9S Local SSD disks must be 1 MBR volumes partitioned on a Windows 7 or newer system 2 Formatted as NTFS or EXFAT 3 Formatted as a single volume And for Samsung SSDs Windows disk caching settings must be set to on 3 O S et CU ect o zd lt D O EN 3 CU zi O If you are primarily a Mac user don t panic Aesthetic differences aside the Windows Explorer is very similar to Mac Finder they both do exactly the same thing The Windows Disk Management Console is similar to the Mac Disk Utility they both do the same thing In fact the paradigms are all the same since the people in Bellingham do their best to imitate the people in Cupertino and vice versa The only real difference is appearance If you get stuck because something doesn t look exactly like the pictures don t panic we are here to help See Contacting Cinedeck on page 2 Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 249 of 304
293. oller by PI Engineering www xkeys com Shuttle Xpress and ShuttlePro V2 by Contour Designs www contourdesigns com Logitech R800 remote www logitech com RS 422 Device controllers include DNF ST100 and ST400 and those by JLCooper Lance Design etc X Keys XK 12 LoarrecH R800 _ DNF ST300 Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 73 of 304 S lI1OSS 2D2V sjaued o43u05 5 0 User Interface 5 1 Ul Introduction The Cinedeck user interface is uniquely designed to provide ease of access and operation for professional and novice alike After connecting and powering on your Cinedeck there are generally just three things you must do before you can make a recording Set the input to match your source this is generally done using auto detect on the input setup page Select a master and optionally proxy codec with wrapper and e Designate a file destination drive both of which are accomplished on the master and proxy setup pages 93 1934 Jes Of course Cinedeck systems go far beyond simply recording Those operators who have traditional video workflow experience combined with an understanding of the IT aspects of modern video technology such as codecs wrappers and network access will have no problem navigating and setting up a Cinedeck however it is useful to have a basic understanding of the system c E ect O O C C ct O gt The user interface i
294. onnection is good For situations where you do not yet have an active source you can manually select the appropriate resolution 264 EPS FRAME RATE 220Inputtab Cinedecks support all standard video frame rates and as with resolution this too p 138 should have been detected by auto detect The format or color bit depth can be adjusted as needed however do keep in mind UN D m 2 et D i h o O D 5 20 Inputtab that not all codecs support all bit depths For example although your video source 265 FORMAT p 138 may be 10bit if you plan to encode XDCAM HD this must remain as 8bit as XDCAM HD is an 8bot only codec qe indu The input type or signal transport should also have been detected and will normally 266 TRANSPORT er EE EU WE be SDI however this too can be adjusted to your specific needs and different settings will be available in different modes Displays the local input number based on the system mode ie 1 5g Dual Link etc Audio source can be switched between off SDI AES and on some systems Analog 268 AUDIO 5 20 Inputtab Cinedecks support up to 16 channels of embedded SDI audio 8 AES channels p 138 for each video pair and analog audio can be sourced from the rear mounted motherboard line level mini jack or a Focusrite 212 Analog gt USB adapter Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 139 of 304 Input tab cont The preview
295. or 350 R Recording 196 4K UHD 188 Multi view 197 Single channel view 200 Record Mode 94 99 Insert Baseband 94 Normal 94 Pause 94 99 Pause amp Seek in File 94 101 103 Remote control 181 232 Reset system 181 282 Restart 181 Restore factory image 282 RS 422 50 232 233 234 RS 422 pin outs 238 RS 422 timecode 149 RX3G Back panel eSATA Front panel Intro 33 Power button RS 422 S Sample EDL Scenes list Scopes 93 Secure erase 49 48 50 47 48 50 180 134 266 Settings import amp export 85 Setup 75 99 101 103 105 108 113 114 Page 352 of 353 x pul Input tab 138 Master tab 145 Audio delay 144 Audio routing Overview tab 115 Path amp file name Project manager Proxy tab 154 Audio routing Shortcuts 77 Shutdown 181 Signal Generator 194 Single channel view Playback 211 Recording 200 SSDs Caching settings Ejecting 69 Error Checking 264 Formating 259 HotSwap 84 Initializing 251 Installing 250 Secure erase 266 Staggered record 181 Stop record 181 Storage Calculator 350 General info 41 Network 45 SSDs 42 USB amp eSATA 43 Sub scenes list 137 161 124 119 161 75 93 260 Super out See Character overlay System mode 187 T TC amp Automation tab EDL editor 176 TC offsets 175 TC offsets 175 TCP port 3811 242 Timecode 165 168 Timecode via RS 422 Cinedeck August 27 2015 14 28 165 168 149 Touchscreen calibration
296. ording Otherwise it will ignore STOP the dropped frame and continue When orange last on loss indicates that if the input signal is lost recording will continue qe M9SIAJ9AQ Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 118 of 304 9 19 Project manager Cinedecks are project centric meaning that settings are auto saved to a project which is associated to one or more channels Multiple channels which require the same settings would normally be associated with a single project while channels requiring unique settings would be associated to their own independent projects 93 1934 Jes In other words if all four channels of a deck are associated to the same project and you change the codec on one channel the codec for the other three channels is simultaneously changed To change settings for just a single channel that channel would need to be associated to its own project Project Manager is accessed from the overview page Is where the basics are taken care of 204 PAGE TABS project P 120 manager P 120 Demo x S D 2 et 3 D gt QD O D 5 209 LABEL P 120 208 NAME P 120 KONG pre UU E ERE 214 PROJECT LIST new project Ctri N SCROLL P 121 rename project Ctrl R 213 APPLY BUTTON P 121 206 MANAGE PROJECTS manage project not configured Hes EN TAR SI rojects metadata bus BUTTON P 120 proj BEI BUTTON P 1
297. ose to accept changes and return to the playlist editor RU C lt cr S 5 O O D sS sbunes 1si e d Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 230 of 304 7 9 7 9 1 This Page intentionally left blank Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 egKe d Page 231 of 304 8 0 Remote control Cinedecks can be remote controlled using a broad variety of systems RS 422 Cinedeck MCC AMP commands over IP KVM VNC and via USB devices Please note however that TIT M iC Le CR PST 4 vo ECC To Tz Te rT 8 J I Marei M TN TET BITE UTE CIT Ed It causes inconsistent operation and errors RS 422 is supported in slave and master mode e When in master mode the Cinedeck can take full control of other devices using Sony BVW SRW commands such as tape machines and the user interface provides a full set of status indicators e In Slave mode the Cinedeck accepts standard commands and specifically the Cinedeck responds as a Sony SRW 5500 or BVW 75 See the next pages for COM port setup and 384 remote control on page 183 Cinedeck MCC multi channel controller is a Windows based application which can be connected to up to 24 channels of Cinedeck From the remote interface you can setup all aspects of a channel including project settings push settings to multiple channels control any selected channels for recording and playback inc
298. ote workstation in the next room or miles away o Cinedeck RX can be driven using several different USB control devices while MX has a built in tactile control panel o All Cinedecks can have an external data display USB mouse and keyboard attached so a common setup is to connect the decks into a KVM switcher for central control of multiple machines note The KVM system must provide DDM Dynamic Device Mapping which maintains the connection to all connected devices regardless of the active device soJnjeo4 lt OVS Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 299 of 304 Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 FAQ gt Features cont 10 51 Roll over Recording All Cinedecks support roll over recording where two media identical or dissimilar can be designated and combined as primary and secondary record destinations significantly increasing record time 10 52 Scene Names All Cinedeck versions have some support for scene names however from version 4 5 scene names can be created in advance and easily edited and cycled through to quickly respond to on set production requirements 10 53 Scheduling Cinedeck RX and newer decks support the scheduling of multiple recording events up to twenty four hours in advance allowing unattended activation on a channel by channel basis using the EDL function Enhanced multi event date amp time sche
299. ou can exit from the application using this menu as b T 12 33PM E th toe m well y A C Q c 12 30 2014 n Samsung Magician E X e ee Selecting Yes means that the software will not be able to Samsung Magician is removed From Startup Live update alarms x S s ri s s n automatically notify you when SSD firmware updates are available but unless your system is always connected to the Internet that Information will not be available anyway ee Startup You can always manually run the software to check for updates and Exil if desired in the future you can again opt to have the software a s 12 35pm automatically start by running the program and again opening the 22 m C Q EU 12 30 2014 System Tray context menu and selecting Run at Startup Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 268 of 304 9 12 Updates Updating the Cinedeck is very easy and takes about two minutes Download the update installer which will be about 250MB in size to a convenient location such as the Desktop Contact Cinedeck for the current file location See Contacting Cinedeck on page 2 It is always wise to save a copy of the file on your computer or server as well as in an updates folder located on the USB restore key which came with your Cinedeck It is optional but also recommended to create a system restore point A Restore Point is a stored or memorized state of your syst
300. out Additionally the playlist editor is used for performing insert edits into existing media files egKe d 472 473 CLIP 474 cup 475 CLIP 476 CLIP PREVIEW POSITION TIMECODE NAME THUMBNAIL TIMECODE P 226 p 226 P 226 P 226 P 226 471 EDITOR VIEW p 226 477 cup THUMBNAIL SCROLL P 226 RU C lt cr S 5 O O D s FUTURE FEATURES FUTURE FEATURES 489 PLAYLIST SETTINGS OVERVIEW 1080i 59 94 PsF 4 2 2 YUV10 non drop off off off AAA P 228 478 PLAYLIST 00 00 00 00 00 04 06 17 00 04 06 18 N A 488 OUTPUT TIMECODE P 226 ASS r r I T 1 Ir i 23 98 as 591 479 MANAGE pope IK P p 228 move selected ASSETS P 227 1O1Ip 1s e d ie 480 PLAvusr 481 EDIT 482 DUPLICATE 483 MOVE 484 TIMECODE 485 486 487 SAVE NES SETTINGS SELECTED CLIP SELECTED SELECTED DISPLAY EXPORT CANCEL AND CLOSE P 227 EZ P 227 P 227 P 228 P 228 p 228 P 228 Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 225 of 304 Playlist manager Playlist editor cont The edit view selector button displays the name of the playlist currently loaded into 471 EDITOR VIEW SITE editor SI EN the playlist editor and acts as a toggle button in conjunction with the preview button to switch between editing and playback preview screens The preview button activates a single channel
301. p 62 G 81 DVIHDMI for GUL 000 0 62 e 82 eSATA ports s 62 S 3 8 ZX Front panel 63 5 83 Power and drive access door 64 84 Door lock 2 2 2 len 64 85 Drive trayS elles 64 86 Power button 2 222222 a 64 87 USB Dort ociosa ano a 64 3 9 ZX Back panel i i o ll o o a 65 88 Video in 3 amp 4 2 ee 66 89 Video out 384 0 ll llle n 66 90 Aux out 3 4 222r 66 91 LTC 3 amp 4 in lloop 66 92 Video in 162 es 66 93 Video out 162 2 22 ll 66 94 Aux out 172 LLa a 66 95 LTC 1 amp 2 in lloop 66 96 Reference in182 a a 66 97 Reference in3 amp 4 0 a 66 98 monitor at aaa a 66 Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Table of Contents 7 of 304 99 RS 422 ports oes 66 100 Master timecode in 8 QU 67 101 Redundant power a ee ee ne 67 102 Power supply alarm ignore 000055 e 67 103 AES in amp out 1 76 67 104 USB2porfs _ leen 67 105 Gb ethernet oo ees 67 m 106 USB3ports 67 G 107 Analoglinein 67 e 1
302. p me m mpmj e Jef NTSC SD NTSC SD so e mw s m faje NTSC SD sop we sls s ea JY NTSC SD _ NTSC SD soup Moe CEE ME NET SES UE NTSC SD 5 s fate e wo fetal NTSC SD Anamorphic 5 ww aw v pes a pa NTSC SD Anamorphic NTSC SD VC 5 PN 23 98P Cineform Cinedeck August 27 2015 14 28 Page 335 of 350 C O Qu D O UN 2 z CU oO 5 D UN Codecs amp wrappers cont suoneoii edsg NTSC SD VC 5 i NTSC SD VC 5 Eire 23 98P Cineform NTSC SD VC 5 Filmscan 1 23 98P Cineform NTSC SD VC 5 Filmscan 2 23 98P Cineform NTSC SD VC 5 Kevi 23 98P Cineform ial Peso meme WW W me L ay Cg oo me gg gms faf f se ree fa oe e Moo me q CO ges faf f f se me aa oa ie me tat af me faf f Ew Tate fej AO IRA ME sl CE HC CI CE O AC CI N ed E RAE MA i Cinedeck August 27 2015 14 28 Page 336 of 350 C O o D O UN Qo Z E CU D 5 D UN Codecs amp wrappers cont suoneoii edsg Moo wm als m Jom faja fo e lea e O qo EP ww ate sem Tafa J loe Eb eee JJ A E A EP ww a s mmm fafa TOM DE pe e oe Tr Uis mo Ww m qms jog joo as om jw wi m a j j el af o oo om CO CO wm ow j E set Ja oe ful allow faf e e e fet f 59
303. pAtom Op1a or MOV you can take two clips a source and a destination and perform a frame accurate insert edit writing the source into the destination a process which will often be more efficient than recreating the entire original destination file 10 32 Interplay Check in When utilizing Op1a and MOV file wrapping Cinedeck RX and newer recorded content can easily be checked into an Avid Interplay environment using Medway from Marquis Broadcast Medway can automatically check content in or users can manually select specific clips or sub clips to process 10 33 IRIG Timecode Cinedeck recorders RX and newer can accept an external IRIG B timecode input and display the data on screen and optionally burn the data into the recorded video while recording the data with the incoming source 1 Optional on RX amp ZX 10 34 IT amp Connectivity Cinedecks can have a variety of IT connections including USB2 USB3 eSATA VGA DVI HDMI Ethernet and Display Port MX and ZX also include a PCle slot for optional 8Gb and 10Gb networking adapter cards and direct attached storage All ports are not available on all decks 10 35 Jam Sync The ability to momentarily apply a running timecode source to a deck have it remembered and used as the record timecode 1 Optional on RX amp ZX 10 36 LUTs Cinedeck RX and newer recorders provide support for 1D and 3D LUTS Look Up Tables which are particularly applicable to RAW and S Log reco
304. pernova card 7 Click Update at the right of the screen to start the install and note that the Exit button becomes gray and unavailable during the update process 8 The progress bars at the bottom will slowly move right during the update 9 When the update has completed the Exit button will again be available Fully shut the system down and restart to complete the install BlueFirrmwargl le dz Card Info Card Select serial Number Fw Type Fw Version 108 New Firmware Fw Type Supernova S 2120 Fw Versian 123 Progress Current Step Total BlueFirmwareUpdate V1 0 0 15 Card Info Card Select Serial Number Fw Type Fw Version New Firmware Fw Type Supernova 5 2i2o Fw Version 123 Progress Current Step Total Options Exit After updating the firmware the machine must be powered down to take effect Shutdown after update Options After updating the firmware the machine must be powered down to take effect Remember rhe system must be fully powered off and restarted after these firmware updates Page 281 of 304 Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 n D S lt O D go s O o D ojepdn usijan g 9 17 Restore factory image Cinedecks run Windows 7 embedded from a separate SSD system drive Each system ships with a USB restore disk This Linux bootable disk includes Clonezil
305. playhead to the previous clip Press cue next to move the playhead to the next clip 7 1 Playback Pressing back returns the interface to the previous standby mode 425 BACK multi view on page 206 Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 208 of 304 7 1 1 Playback touch transport When the touch transport button at the upper right is pressed to toggle touch control on a momentary overlay is displayed which shows the available on screen touch functions and the grid area where they are active egKe d TAP OR CLICK TO TOGGLE TOUCH TRANSPORT MODE ON AND OFF TAP OR CLICK THIS TOP AREA OF THE SCREEN TO MOVE FORWARD FRAME BY FRAME TAP OR CLICK THIS TOP AREA OF THE SCREEN TO MOVE FRAME BY FRAME IN REVERSE MAIA 13 NUU oeg e d TAP CLICK OR DRAG IN THIS MIDDLE AREA TO USE VARIABLE SPEED FORWARD PLAY TAP CLICK OR DRAG IN THIS MIDDLE AREA TO USE VARIABLE SPEED REVERSE PLAY TAP CLICK OR PRESS THIS LOWER AREA TO FORWARD SHUTTLE RELEASE TO PAUSE TAP CLICK OR PRESS IN THIS LOWER AREA TO REVERSE SHUTTLE RELEASE TO PAUSE Y CU lt CU O ct O C O D ct DY CU gt Uu 5 O Ey ct Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 209 of 304 7 1 2 egKe d This P
306. proceeded by the 96 symbol is a wildcard or variable which will be filled in when recording is activated The expansion display shows the full name as described by the template above DAG I CANGON 5 193 Path editor Where possible wildcard information is filled in but some data such as start time code is not available until recording starts so will be displayed as the same variable entered in the above template The wildcard shortcut buttons provide easy access to the various record time wildcards Press a button and the appropriate variable is inserted into your template at the current cursor position The on screen keyboard can be used with a mouse or by presses when a touch screen is available It works in a similar fashion to a standard USB keyboard with the following exceptions 237 ON SCREEN 5 19 3 Path editor The del key functions as backspace deleting characters to the left of the cursor KEYBOARD p 128 The clear key deletes all text in the current field The shift key functions as a shift lock toggle On is all caps Off is all lower case Depending on the preference set on the prefs setup page space bar will place a underscore character in place of a space 238 CANCEL BUTTON Cancel any changes and return to the previous screen E p 93 1934 Jes 236 WILDCARD 5 19 3 Path editor SHORTCUTS zm x S D 2 et 3 D gt QD O D gt 239 SAVE amp CLOSE 5 19 3 Path editor Pressing save an
307. r regardless of the selected event 5 25 2 EDL editor 376 INSERT AFTER BAG I 93 1934 Jes o SCROLL onpage 1 6 arrows can be used to move up and down through the list onpage 176 of the event onpage 176 of the event on page 1 6 when the character color is l C Ro gt ct O CU ct O ct CU O JOUP3 133 Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 179 of 304 5 25 3 Sample EDL Cinedeck EDLs are basic ASCII comma delineated files Each line in a EDL file represents a single event Each event element is separated from its neighbor by a comma No leading or trailing commas or spaces should be used and no commas should be used within any text Additionally the file must end with a blank line Each event line has a start timecode an end timecode and optionally can have a master file name and a prox file name For events which do not have ames included he active project naming templates wil be used o You can use the Cinedeck built in editor for creating and editing EDLs See 5 25 2 EDL editor on page 176 or any plain text editor such as notepad in Windows 92e1193UT Jes The sample EDL below has 5 events the last of which also has the optional file names included NOTE THE TIMES IN THIS EDL CY gt ct O CU O 2 ct CU ARE DROP FRAME INDICATED BY O THE SEMICOLONS 13 55 00 10 13 55 30 00 USE COLONS AS THE
308. r indicator cues 203 413 encode overview a lll 203 414 stop button _ 0 203 OL ecards ae ea RE 204 7 0 PlaypacK 205 7 1 Playback multi view ee 206 415 multi view toggle a 207 416 start end llle 207 417 elapsed time 2 222 lll 207 418 in out Tre se x44255 o 43 2 53 ee as 207 Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Table of Contents 21 of 304 419 touch transport a 207 420 Tile oo ceo E SSSTO 353 9259 eee RA 207 421 play head 207 422 file info llle 207 YA 207 424 transport controls eee ee ee 208 425 back ee 208 m 7 1 1 Playback touch transport o 209 G TT 210 E 7 2 Playback single channel view llle 211 S 426 multi view toggle 212 5 427 dur aa 212 428 SO earn RE vui AA ee aes 212 429 elapsed time 222 212 430 end oe ey ee oh ee eR heehee ts eee ee eh Sede Ge 212 431 TOM res u S 2 E red fanaa Ne 212 432 Hile 212 433 play head 212 434 open Cl 212 435 transport controls 213 436 edit points 22222 lll 214 437 back 1 1 a 214 438 file nfo
309. rate quality on page 29 Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 155 of 304 Proxy tab cont Last of the encode selections is the wrapper and again Cinedecks support those most commonly used in production workflows Again it is better to confirm the requirements with whomever will be editing but some generalizations can be made me If you are working in an Avid post environment you would normally select Avid MXF as these files are wrapped in Avid s OpAtom MXF If you are working in Final Cut you will normally want MOV wrapped files If you are working in an Adobe environment MOV is also very common For more information see 10 2 What is a codec on page 289 UN D m 2 et D Ty h o O D 307 WRAPPER This matrix view displays the number of audio channels selected for recording and indicates the source and destination audio channels If the matrix is gray the audio source selection on the input page is off qe xoJg While SDI only supports 16 channels some files can support up to 32 audio tracks hence the encode settings give you direct access for creating those tracks These tracks can be inserted into at a later point using Cinedeck s Insert Edit 5 22 Proxy tab Click the matrix to open and adjust audio track selections and routing p 154 308 AUDIO Basically the upper meters in the router matrix editor show the incoming audio cha
310. rd in order to access the desktop or start the Cinedeck application If a password is required contact your engineering or IT staff responsible for your production systems If no keyboard is available UN D mj 2 et D i h CU O D see 5 5 1 On screen keyboard on page lt O All Cinedeck desktops look similar and from here many C K PRX of the standard ra Windows programs such as Windows Explorer are available If you need to setup network connections it is best to do so before starting the Cinedeck application Ersan c PERE Lm 0 27 2014 bui To start the Cinedeck from the desktop locate and double click the Cinedeck short cut Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 82 of 304 9 9 Desktop details 5 5 1 On screen keyboard Your system may have additional options but all systems include several useful links on the desktop First if you have a touch screen system and are stuck at the Windows login without a USB keyboard on hand 92e1193UT Jes Click the Ease of Access icon found at the lower left of the Windows log in screen Ease of Access Make your computer easier to use Press the SPACEBAR to select the highlighted option m E Hear text on screen read aloud Narrator E Make items on the screen larger Magnifier ES pp 1 See more contrast in colors High Contrast sjieyap doy seq
311. rding o Traditional video cameras process the video signal all the way through the camera path from the sensor s to the BNC output or recording The very nature of that processing throws data away and permanently alters the images in order to fit certain specifications and limitations which put heavy restrictions on the ability to modify the images later o Cameras that output a RAW or S Log signal are delivering images with reduced pre processing to realize the highest quality images possible and allow much greater flexibility in post production but the native camera output looks flat and lifeless o ALUT is a filter generally created in a color grading application which is loaded and applied to an image to alter and refine its appearance in terms of color contrast etc Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 296 of 304 seJnjeeJ 9 OVS soJnjeo4 lt OVS Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 FAQ gt Features cont o With Cinedeck the on board display can have a non destructive real time LUT loaded and applied to the images so the viewers Director Producer etc will have a pretty good idea of what they are really working with Additionally software versions after 4 3 support recording of proxy and H 264 files with a LUT applied to the recorded image o The 4K release allows the LUT to be optionally applied to the SDI output for video villa
312. re the burn in should reflect a different time than the embedded timecode Also file wrappers like MP4 do not support timecode so selecting the timecode burn source allows MP4 files to contain a viewable timecode 5 24 Video B 345 USER TEXT Settings p 165 Not Active 346 PROPERTIES 524 Video Bum This screen region will be populated by one of several properties panels selected in PANEL AREA settings p 165 the video burn control panel at the upper left 347 CANCEL Cancel any changes and return to the previous screen 5 24 Video Burn Pressing save and close confirms any changes closes the burn setup screen and 348 SAVE AND CLOSE Settings p 165 returns to the previous encoder setup screen lt o D O CO E s UN D et a O UN Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 167 of 304 5 25 TC amp Automation tab Timecode and automation includes settings for the internal timecode generator various record trigger controls including EDL management and fine timecode offsets for each timecode source In free run the internal timecode generator can start with a user defined preset or it can be initiated by the Windows clock and follow local time or UTC GMT Record run timecode can be traditional contiguous timecode or when set to per take automatically restart at the user defined time often used for drama scenes where matching timecode can be useful P 1
313. recording 51 cH4 panel on page i 54 can be triggered and all transport controls are active for this channel 92 HIRE MIN FULL 21 MX control A dual function button E E E E a panel on page Pressing this button or pressing shift and then pressing this button toggles the user interface between multi channel view and single channel view z A dual function button gt lt oc ms 361 MX contro Pressing loop toggles loop playback mode on and off Loop playback plays a file a MP panel on page files or playlist continuously in the selected play direction 3 Pressing shift and then loop toggles ping pong playback on and off Ping pong G playback plays the loaded file files or playlist continuously from start to end to start Ga 5 61 MX control Goes back to the previous screen 54 BACK panel on page D 54 ee emm 5 6 1 MX control Pause stops playback but keeps the file loaded D5 PAUSE panel on page 54 Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 56 of 304 MX front panel MX control panel cont 3 6 1 MX control Fast forwards the loaded file at 20x 56 FORWARD FAST panel on page 54 3 6 1 MX control Plays the current file forward at 1x speed 57 PLAY panel on page 54 A dual function button 2 UN et 2 Q zur O 58 FRAME 1 36 1 MX control In play mode frame 1 moves playback of the current file forward one frame at a pane on p
314. reen 121 REDUNDANT PROXY SPACE TIME C 90 b 116 PROXY SPACE m TIME P 89 120 start amp 2 ELAPSED TIME ma 115 SIGNAL INDICATOR P 90 gt p 89 y 119 REDUNDANT O 114 MASTER SPACE MASTER SPACE TIME 2 TIME P 89 P 90 P 89 SOURCE P 89 112 REMOTE 117 TIMECODE 122 RECORD INDICATOR P 89 p 89 BUTTON P 90 111 SiNGLE viEW TOGGLE P 89 123 GANG BUTTON P 90 124 RS 422 BUTTON P 90 125 SDI cHAR BUTTON P 90 135 M BUTTON p 92 lt C ct lt p 2 UN O m D D 5 arra ea Ara phi bak 134 P BUTTON p 92 133 BACKGROUND BG BUTTON P 91 126 UI OVERLAYS amp LUT BUTTON P 91 127 sETUP BUTTON P 91 130 PLAY BUTTON x P 91 128 STOP BUTTON 129 ENCODE OVERVIEW P 91 P 91 Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 88 of 304 132 AUDIO METERS P 91 131 ERROR LOG BUTTON P 91 Multi view screen cont The single view toggle switches the user interface between multi view and single 111 SINGLE view 5 8 Multiview channel view Additional information and tools such as waveform and vectorscope are 93 1934 Jes TOGGLE screen p 88 available in single channel view Additionally because of the increased screen space setting up on screen overlays such as aspect ratio is easier in single view 112 REMOTE 5 8 Multiview Th
315. s required to stop the recording This eliminates accidental stops particularly with touch screen systems There are other long press functions which will be noted throughout the manual Screen hot spots are areas of a screen which when touched will direct the operator directly to the related setup area or which display additional information Both will be detailed more fully in this manual but as an example touching the file information at the bottom of this screen changes the display from showing the selected master and proxy encode details and file names to the folder path and duration Touching that area again will toggle to show the current project name scene and sub scene names p ule dx If If your facility uses bar codes and for example are transferring tapes to files an appropriate HID compatible bar code reader can be used to enter data into selected fields such as file name directly from the bar code information Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 76 of 304 5 3 Keyboard shortcuts The Cinedeck user interface can be driven to a great extent using shortcut key presses on an attached USB keyboard Press control plus K Control K to open this on screen listing of available shortcuts 92e1193UT Jes As can be seen from this screen the available shortcuts are different based on the operating mode and visible screen but some general shortcuts such as E
316. s an optional additional 16 channels of AES which can be activated in an upcoming release for a total of 32 AES inputs 10 7 Analog Audio For legacy analog audio situations probably the best and often lowest cost solution is to use an analog to digital AES adapter There are many on the market but one example is the AJA ADA4 4 Channel A D amp D A Converter Cinedeck RX and newer decks also support the Scarlett 2i2 USB audio interface from Focusrite which provides two mic line balanced XLR TRS audio inputs through high quality preamplifiers For scratch audio tracks RX can also accept two channels of unbalanced audio via the rear line level mini jack connection Additional USB audio adapters with different input choices are being considered for inclusion in the future 10 8 Analysis Tools Cinedeck RX and newer decks provide digital peak audio meters adjustable monitor levels and monitor channel selection as well as a complete set of video analysis tools including Waveform Vector scope Histogram 1 1 pixel picture zoom Adjustable video peak detect Focus assist User selectable aspect ratio safe area and grid overlays 10 9 Audio Delay Version 4 3 includes audio delay in milliseconds which can be added per channel to SDI AES and Analog audio sources Each channel can be delayed up to 999 milliseconds O O O O O O O Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 291 of 304 seJnj
317. s and is supplied with two AC gt DC power supplies o MX and ZX have two redundant AC power supplies o MX and ZX will sound an audible alarm when only one power supply is active 10 50 Remote Control Cinedecks RX and newer provide many options for remote control 1 RS 422 is optional on ZX o All RX and newer decks allow independent RS422 control of each channel o RX and newer decks can be the master or slave in a RS422 relationship allowing control in either direction With Cinedeck as master over a tape machine the user is presented with a full array of controls and status indicators from the slave deck Recordings can be made on either machine e using the Cinedeck as the source or as the recorder Insert edits can be made from the Cinedeck to the tape deck As slave a Cinedeck can be controlled from a partner machine or via a separate control panel note Cinedeck models pre Dec 2014 with RS 422 support require a RS 422 crossover cable for master mode Slave mode requires a straight through RS 422 cable o Cinedecks utilize the Grass Valley AMP protocol for control over IP by external devices such as asset management systems and switchers o Upto 24 channels of RX and or MX can be simultaneously managed using the IP AMP protocol based Cinedeck MCC multi machine control interface o All Cinedecks can be controlled using standard VNC remote access software such as Teamviewer which provide the full user interface at a rem
318. s designed to be used by touchscreen or with a mouse A USB keyboard is also very helpful for data entry and system operation Operation is the same whether you are using the built in display or an external display with a mouse Most important is that Cinedecks are project centric meaning that for setup everything you do is related to a project which is associated to one or more channels For example if all four channels of a MX are associated to the same project and you change the channel 3 codec from AVC Intra to ProRes all four channels are switched to ProRes Conversely if all four channels need different codecs you assign each channel to its own project The other important aspect is that while there is a default naming convention Cinedecks impose virtually no limitations on folder and file naming To streamline setup names which are editable such as project and input are represented as wildcards variables which can be easily integrated into your folder and file naming structure along with various run time date and time elements A good understanding of the Project window which is accessed via the main overview screen is key to acquiring files which fit your desired workflow Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 74 of 304 5 2 Ul explained Cinedecks utilize a GUI Graphical user interface which consists of several joe 87 00 00 52 25 basic areas UN D mj 2
319. s for growing files is available in release 4 3 with the MOV and Op1A wrappers and is being refined In Adobe Premiere XDCamHD can be recorded to a destination which is accessible by the edit system and content can be imported refreshed and edited while recording is still underway Similarly Final Cut Pro can access MOV files while recording is still occurring to accessible storage The editing of live recordings is currently only supported when external edit systems are used and is not supported by AMA Avid Media Access Support for editing of live recordings by the Cinedeck playlist manager will be added in a future release 1 Optional on ZX 10 29 H 264 Cinedecks provide the capability to encode h 264 at bitrates and frame sizes appropriate for viewing on iPhone iPad full screen and others From version 4 3 RX and newer models offer streamable H 264 files as well 1 Optional on ZX 10 30 I Frame amp GoP Cinedeck RX and newer decks support I Frame recording as Uncompressed DNxHD ProRes and more as well as Cinedecks support Long GOP recording with XDCamHD and h 264 at various bit rates Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 295 of 304 seJnjeeJ 9 OVS soJnjeo4 lt OVS FAQ gt Features cont 10 31 Insert Editing Simple partial video and or audio replacement of content in an existing file similar to a traditional tape to tape insert edit For files wrapped as mxf O
320. s mounted in dual drive removable and hot swap pable carriers or sleds You have the option of utilizing one or more internal drives as needed for your particular Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 30 of 304 Cinedeck Product Overview cont production and the available desktop and installable docks with SATA connectivity give you instant high speed access to your content Of course additional drive carriers or sleds are available and installing drives in the sleds is simply a matter of a few screws uononpodu Before going further with the many other storage options it is important to understand Cinedecks redundant and rollover record capability For each input Cinedeck can not only write a Master and a Proxy the file writes can be redundant meaning two copies of each file can be written wherever you need them And by redundant we don t mean a copy we mean two concurrent and totally separate file writes of each file By leveraging this redundant capability you can for example have a safe copy in the machine and a network copy instantly available for editing or a customer take away copy as soon as Stop is pressed The options are virtually limitless Additionally all Cinedecks support roll over recording where two media identical or dissimilar can be designated and combined as primary and secondary record destinations significantly increasing record time So as di
321. s possible about the nature of the problem and the setup involved including Cinedeck model Cinedeck software version Prefs page the relevant log files C cinedeck logs Cinedeck settings such as codec wrapper storage in use and all related equipment being used source camera settings audio embedders timecode source etc If you are using an esoteric piece of equipment in the signal chain it is critical that we know so we can make a correct diagnosis Is it plugged In Often the simplest things can make life difficult Always check the basics Are power cabling and signal paths all confirmed to be good Page 2 of 304 Table of Contents Cinedeck User Guide Contacting Cinedeck 2 Table of Contents Cinedeck User Guide 3 c 1 0 Introduction 27 E 1 1 About This Manual i sssi ns ns ns ns nis nis ns ns nisa 27 el 1 2 Copyright and Trademarks llle 28 B 1 3 Safety Information iilii i ll liliis 28 1 4 FCC and CE Information 29 1 5 Cinedeck Product OVervieW 30 2 0 What s in the BOX 33 2 1 Cinedeck RX3G il ol ss 33 2 2 CinedeckMX 34 2 3 Cinedeck ZX 35 2 4 Features 36 2 4 1 Hardware 36 2 4 2 Software sr 36 LAA ESE REYES ES 36 3
322. s such as cameras eliminating the need to have a separate timecode generator for example in a fly pack type of configuration IRIG B Timecode support Allows MX to receive a IRIG B timecode source from an external IRIG B timecode generator not included and use that timecode data internally as a replacement for standard SMPTE timecode P USB On 37 MX Back panel Standard USB2 ports It is recommended to use a USB2 port when restoring a system Za from the USB system key T CE ENE 7 MX Back panel Two standard Gb Ethernet ports Ports can be teamed in networks which support ee teamed connections 2 UN et 2 Q zur O joued Jpeg XN ud 74 USB3 ports 37 MX Back panel Standard USB3 data ports It is recommended to use USB2 ports when restoring a p 32 system from the USB restore key 75 AES IN amp OUT 37 vx Back panel 8 AES channels per channel pair Each BNC connection carries two AES channels 1 16 p gt H 9 ack panel AN unbalanced analog line level audio input which can be used for recording stereo Zo Ao a lt a een ee J P 9 scratch audio 77 OPTIONAL 37 MX Back panel PCle slot for installation of a 10Gb Ethernet card 8 or 16Gb Fiber Channel card NETWORK pos or direct attached storage adapter ih E 78 AES IN amp OUT 37 ux Back panel An additional 16 AES channels can optionally be addressed via D sub connectors 17 32 EEE 79 LTC 1 amp 2 iN 37 wx Back panel LTC linear t
323. scussed SSD drives are recommended for internal recording C 5 D O D O A x O O C O et O lt b gt lt D 2 Each Cinedeck also has a multitude of USB and SATA connections allowing the use of direct attached storage so for example recordings can be made to USB2 or USB3 drives as well as external eSATA devices such as RAID arrays Network recording is one of the most important Cinedeck features Cinedecks run on Windows7 embedded One of the advantages to being on a Windows platform is Cinedeck can leverage the internal networking capability and where appropriate 3rd party support for Windows so if you have a SAN system which provides a Windows client that client can be run on the Cinedeck allowing direct to SAN recording with all of the advantages of being a true SAN client Whether it is Avid ISIS Harmonic MediaGrid Facilis Terablock or any number of other storage solutions the ad vantages and efficiencies realized for multi cam and other edit hungry productions by providing instant access Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 31 of 304 Cinedeck Product Overview cont to new content can easily be measured in real and significant cost savings Especially when recording to external destinations it is important to understand bitrate and bandwidth and to thoroughly test your environment before deploying your workflow on a production uononpodu In general w
324. se Secure Erase to protect your privacy by quickly and permanently destroying all stored data so that data recovery is impossible This feature will also create a new encryption key and restore your SSD to its factory defaults D lt x m Samsung Qo After the firmware Magician Secure Erase x O C o D the left A Warning You CANNOT recover erased data Before performing a Secure Erase it is recommended that you back up your data first Performance Benchmark Samsung SSD 840 PRO Series The right screen M again CO ntains disk Performance Optimization E Primary Partition 0 gt Start 3 E Y Firmware Update A details including wh eth er th ey are The attached SSD is in a frozen state froze n E OS Optimization amp proceed please refer to the Heigl remedy this problem mm Over Provisioning D Create a bootable USB drive Create a bootable CD DVD O To create the c Select a USB drive Browse D bootable secure x erase drive insert 0 S L UN either a USB drive RAPID Mode D h e h Note In order to create a bootable USB or CD DVD disk existing data on the attached W IC Ca n be era sed Data Security USB or CD DVD disk may be deleted If the USB is already made bootable using Magician existing data will be retained If necessary please backup the wMore a blank CD or a blank DVD SAMSUNG SSD 830 Series Based on the drive inserted create either a bootable USB or bootable CD DV
325. separate power supply that allows the device ta e i Tas s Face Ire ney IUe ae sore Ie EL MR er Aus dd oA a qa E e llusi its Buffer I case of power failure Mare information about wrte caching settings device cos Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 261 of 304 9 9 Changing drive letters For environments with control over drives it can sometimes be helpful to predetermine the drive letters assigned by Windows Again there are several ways to access the dialog for assigning drive letters one way is to open Disk Management in Computer Management See 8 1 Device Manager on page 233 Right click the drive for which a drive letter should be assigned and select Change Drive letter and path 9 qnoJ 79 31AJ9S ES Computer Management E k z x File Action wiew Help a ei x Er gt O SE Computer Management Local Volume Layout Type File System status capacity Free Space Actions El ii System Tools CCS cr Simple Basic NTFS Healthy Boot Page File Primary Partition 27 34 GB 7 93 GB l Disk Management El 0 Task Scheduler C wSamsung 512 Simple Basic NTFS Healthy Primary Partition 476 9 4756 83 GB EH Event Viewer System Reserved Simple Basic NTFS Healthy System Active Primary Partition 100 MB 74 MB More Actions d gz Shared Folders El d Local Users and Groups E Si Performance s Device Manager E
326. setting drives two distinctly different functions 1 It forces the Cinedeck user interface video preview to format the displayed image with a particular aspect ratio 2 When recording it sets a flag in the recorded file to tell systems such as editors that the content is actually that aspect ratio 269 5 20 Input tab Both of these are particularly useful when working with SD video that is UN D mj 2 et D i h CU O D 16x9 and not 4x3 It is also possible that during a session the video input will be lost This is also most commonly caused by external factors such as a broken cable power being lost at the source equipment unstable on uncontrolled satellite sources and so on You can also select the behavior in the case of lost video The recording can be stopped which might be used in a monitored siltation where 270 SIGNAL LOSS 5 20 Input tab there are many incoming lines and only a few source devices BEHAVIOR p 138 More common however would be to force the recording to continue so images will immediately be recorded when the picture is restored In this case you can select to record black while there is no source or to record a freeze frame of the last good captured frame The recommended setting is black to make it clear to any observer that there is no useful signal being recorded qe indu Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 140 of 304 Input tab
327. sing from use of SSDs other than the Samsung drives listed sass Supported SSDs Samsung 840 Pro series excellent price capacity Samsung 850 Pro series highest performance longest warranty Samsung EVO best price capacity Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 42 of 304 3 3 2 USB amp eSATA The use of external hard drives should be undertaken with extreme caution for a few reasons e Traditional spinning disks are extremely poor at recording video especially more than one stream at a time and disk speed tests like those from Black Magic and AJA are largely meaningless since they only test raw throughput to one file for a relatively short period uolej e1su Spinning hard disks have a physical head that moves around the platter when writing a file If the drive is fragmented or more than one file is being written it must jump around constantly to keep updating the file s With a format like MXF OpAtom where there are many individual files being written for each clip the write head can very quickly become overwhelmed and be unable to update all the files quickly enough to keep up even if the individual data rates are low A good example is XDCAM HD OpAtom and a JFIF proxy each with 8ch of audio with a total data rate of about 60Mbps Two inputs with 20 files per input equals 40 files being written to the same drive Despite the fact that the total data rate being writte
328. so available for secondary files The channel toggle next ch prev is available on all main setup pages Clicking the 291 CHANNEL 521 Master tab right or left arrow allows easy switching to the next or previous channel The input TOGGLE p 133 master and proxy tab names reflect the change displaying the names associated to the selected channel qe Ja1selA Burn in is primarily used on proxy files though in some cases it is also possible to M TN 521 Master tab apply a character burn in to a master file p 145 For additional information see 5 24 Video Burn Settings on Remember a burn in is a permanent part of the video and can not be removed 293 CLOSED 521 Master tab This toggles capture of close caption data on and off CAPTIONS TR Closed caption data capture is only available for MOV wrapped encodes Some codecs available on the Cinedeck can be encoded as either VBR variable bit rate or CBR constant bit rate This can be an important selection so if available you 294 vBR ENABLE pij Should confirm with whomever will be editing or further processing the files when recording is complete This setting will only be visible when a VBR codec is selected See 10 4 What is bitrate quality on page 290 Endian type refers to the byte order of multi byte PCM audio samples Big means the 5 21 Master tab 5 21 Master tab 295 ENDIAN TYPE pias data is stored big end first little
329. some of your other equipment may use XLR connectors It is very simple to make up basic interconnect or adapter cables to go from XLR to BNC Coaxial cable should be used in place of twisted pair for these cables The theory is that although unbalanced the high density coaxial shield acts as a Faraday cage protecting the signals The pin connections are shown below Especially for longer distances balanced connections are recommended You may consider using XLR to BNC 110 ohm 75 ohm impedance matching transformer adapters similar to the Neutrik NADITBNC NADITBNC MX and Canare BCJ XJ TRB or other more specialized transmitter receiver modules uonej eisur Pin 2 gt BNC Center Pin Pin 1 Mot connected C O 2 D O cr 2 O lt O s on D O o Pin 3 gt BNC Sheild Male XLR Pin 2 gt BNC Center Pin m UN o Pin 1 Not ct O connected gt as J Female XLR Pin 3 gt BNC Sheild Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 40 of 304 3 3 Recording destinations All Cinedecks can write video and audio recordings as files to low cost and commonly available non proprietary 2 5 SSD SATA drives Cinedeck SSD drives are mounted in removable hot swappable dual drive cartridges or sleds RX and newer Additional sleds as well as portable and installable receiving chassis are available to enable easy sneaker n
330. ss of match back between the various files RX3G and newer decks will support ARRP and Canon RAW recording simultaneously combined with the same series of deliverable files HD master proxy and h 264 The HD deliverables can be created using any of the appropriate master and proxy codecs on the systems o MX supports one 4K YUV or one UHD YUV source or two RAW cameras and delivers 4K UHD or RAW files HD master files HD Proxy files Cinedeck USER GUIDE Ginette yepabieas ASS Gb AWN aS deavered live by a streaming server Page 290 of 304 o ZX240 and 45 support one 4K YUV or one UHD YUV source or two RAW cameras and deliver m AK TIUD ar RAW Plac seJnjeeJ 9 OVS soJnjeo4 lt OVS FAQ gt Features cont Streamable h 264 files which can be delivered live by a streaming server note In some instances internal recording of RAW or full 4K and UHD may require setting SSDs into a RAID configuration Additional information will be available with the 4K releases 1 Optional on all systems Support on ZX20 and RX3G is for 4K UHD playback only up to 30P 2 ZX40 and ZX45 ZX20 supports playback only of a single channel of 4K UHD up to 30P 3 Final development and release of raw recording is on hold 10 6 AES Audio RX3G and newer recorders can accept 8 AES audio channels per input pair with the ability to selectively toggle on amp off and map the destination channels All 8 can be received by both video inputs MX ha
331. ss to CURRENT SUB 5 18 Overview tab the sub scenes list associated with the active project for the selected channel where sub scenes can be selected and managed new sub scenes can be created sub scene lists can be imported and exported etc qe M9SIAJ9AQ CURRENT SCENE See 5 19 Project manager on page 119 Displays the tape reel ID variables and value for the selected channel and is a variable often used in folder and file names Clicking here takes you directly to the path amp file Tee Re DA SEEN T Ti names settings associated with the active project for the selected channel where the tape reel ID can be adjusted See 5 19 Project manager on page 119 Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 116 of 304 Overview tab cont Displays all of the input settinos for the selected channel Clicking the various data 5 18 Overview tab areas provides direct access to the relevant settings page ie touching resolution 190 INPUT SETTINGS UN D mj 2 et D i h CU O D switches to the input page where input settings can be adjusted and touching auto rec switches to TC amp automation 191 MASTER 518 Overview tab The master encoder region displays all of the settings related to the master encode ENCODER SETTINGS lb Clicking in this area switches to the master encode setup page The master file destinations section displays the sele
332. st P 217 sele olde clip playlis P 221 448 PLAY 449 FIND 450 451 MANAGE 452 453 454 455 ADD ALL IN FOLDER MEDIA MANAGE DISK FOLDER MANAGE CLIPS SELECT ALL SELECT NONE TO PLAYLIST p 217 P 217 p 218 P 219 p 220 p 220 p 220 P 221 Cinedecks maintain a sql database of media content New recordings are automatically added to the database Previously recorded content and files generated by other systems can be added to the database so they also are visible in clip manager See 449 find media on page 217 Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 215 of 304 egKe d Jabeuew di 5 Clip manager cont v C mran lt WAG ACR 7 3 Clip manager The page selector tabs are always visible in the clip manager area These can be o p 215 clicked to provide direct access to each section a The disk listing displays all of the media drives available to the Cinedeck Below the 441 DISK LIST 7 3 Clip manager p 215 disk list as with most lists are navigation arrows which become active for moving through lists which contain more entries than can be displayed on one screen The folder and sub folder columns work the same way and in conjunction with each other to allow better folder navigation and visibility Press a folder to select it 442 FOLDER G RE m Press up one level to move to a level higher in the folder hierarchic
333. st folder For older software contact Cinedeck for the current file location and download it to a convenient location such as the Desktop See Contacting Cinedeck on page 2 It is always wise to save a copy of the file on your computer or server as well as in an updates folder located on the USB restore key which came with your Cinedeck 4 Open Windows Explorer Navigate to the Bluefish download and unzip the contents to a convenient location such as the Desktop ojepdn usijan g 5 Locate the Supernova update exe file and double click it to start the install B Bluefish Update ml x eS C lt Bluefish Update ka 3 Search Bluefish Update E Organize w Open Share with New Folder IE w m dd i Pictures E Mame Date modified Type E H Videns s inc 12 30 2014 3 56 PM File Folder EL BE Computer lib 12 30 2014 3 56 PM File Folder E E Local Disk C d samples 12 30 2019 3 56 PM File Folder A A TE 10 23 PM Application Fl as RXSGRESTORE G EH Get Network 2 ReleaseNotes txt 5 22 2014 3 117 PM Text Dacumen _ SSS Ee s as BlueFirrmwarellpdate Supernova amp ndsPlus Date modified 7 3 2014 10 23 PM E mua Application Size 5 44 MB Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 280 of 304 Bluefish update cont Do not power off the system during firmware updates d 6 The New Firmware drop down list should indicate a Su
334. stination drive so the available time estimate may need to be divided to accurately reflect remaining time MEE The primary timecode display shows the current timecode which will be recorded Timecode source indicates where the timecode is coming from Possible sources lt C gt lt p 2 Uu O Q D D 5 5 8 Multi view 118 TIMECODESOURCE i554 pss include SDI serial digital embedded timecode GEN internal generated timecode LTC linear timecode fro external source Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 89 of 304 Multi view screen cont In standby mode redundant master space time displays the available space on the designated secondary destination drive 119 REDUNDANT 5 8 Multiviw When recording the display will auto toggle between remaining space and 92e1193UT Jes MASTER SPACE TIME screen p 88 approximate remaining time based on the selected encode bitrate Note the system is unaware if other channels are being written to the same destination drive so the available time estimate may need to be divided to accurately reflect remaining time 120 STARTSLELAPSED 5 8 Multiview Indicates the start timecode of the current recording and the elapsed time of the TIME screen p 88 current recording In standby mode redundant proxy space time displays the available space on the designated secondary destination drive 121 REDUNDANT 5 8Multiv
335. structure Cinedecks are connected using industry standard HD SD SDI cabling allowing the decks to be easily integrated in place of standard video recorders 10 13 Channel Overview Version 4 1 added a full Overview of the complete state of each channel on a system with the ability to import export and copy settings between channels 10 14 Character Overlay Cinedeck RX and newer decks provide control of character out as an overlay on the user interface and or the SDI video output and or as a burn in to the encoded video with fully adjustable position size and color o Channel overlays can be independently setup with different character styles sizes positions and colors o MX has dual outputs for each SD HD channel allowing simultaneous clean and character overlay output 1 Secondary outputs are optional on ZX 10 15 Closed Captioning Cinedecks support recording and playback of CC Closed Caption data with any codec wrapped as MOV A later release will include Closed Caption support with additional file wrappers 1 Optional on ZX Page 292 of 304 seJnjeeJ 9 OVS soJnjeo4 lt OVS FAQ gt Features cont 10 16 Codecs Supported Cinedeck RX3G and newer recorders currently support native SD and HD with the following codecs using a wide choice of bitrates quality settings and file wrappers Apple ProRes AVC Intra Avid DNxHD Avid JFIF VC 5 Cineform optional DPX DVCProHD H 264 streamable IM
336. successful recordings with other units 10 58 Telecine Control With the advanced control option each Cinedeck channel can be tethered with a Spirit Telecine Controller for film to file transfers The Spirit system takes RS 422 control of both the Cinedeck and the film scanner to manage the ingest process shuttle and cue the film and trigger recording of single clips multiple clips as well as single assemble edited clips containing multiple film segments 1 Optional on ZX 10 59 Timecode Cinedecks RX and newer provide internally generated timecode can accept embedded SDI timecode or external LTC and display the data on screen and optionally burn the data into the video of selected files while recording the data with the incoming source IRIG B timecode is also supported 1 IRIG support is optional on RX amp ZX Per channel pair timecode input is standard on ZX Master timecode input is optional on ZX 10 60 Timecode offset Cinedeck version 4 5 and newer supports several timecode offset options The main input timecode offset is used to change correct large timecode differences such as changing the hour of a source timecode from 1 00 00 00 hour to 7 00 00 00 or local time to GMT There are also several fine timecode offset adjustments which can be made to each timecode source to compensate for small latency issues when using the Cinedeck with other devices 10 61 Touch Display Many Cinedecks come standard with a 7 LCD touch disp
337. t 50 60p MX and ZX4O record two channels at 50 60p ZX45 can record four channels at 50 60P o 720p 50 59 94 60 o NTSC 23 98 59 94 Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 294 of 304 seJnjeeJ 9 OVS soJnjeo4 lt OVS FAQ gt Features cont o PAL 25 50 o MXand ZX support recording 4K YUV 4096x2160 and UHDTV 1 YUV 3840x2160 for example from a Sony F55 camera MX and ZX40 45 record one full 4K or UHDTV 1 channel RX3G and ZX20 support one channel of 4K UHDTV 1 playback only o RX3G and newer recorders will soon support ARRI and Canon 4K RAW formats RX3G records one RAW channel MX and ZX record two RAW channels 1 4K and UHDTV 1 YUV and RAW are optional 10 26 Gang Mode Cinedecks RX and newer running version 4 and later allow the user to easily gang together two or more internal channels from the user interface for simultaneously triggering record and playback To reduce the strain on spinning disc file systems these decks also support a user defined staggered gang allowing channels to be triggered sequentially with a specified time delay instead of simultaneously 10 27 GPS All Cinedecks accept data from an off the shelf Garmin model 18x GPS USB receiver and record the data with the incoming video and audio and or burn the data into the video image 10 28 Growing Files Also known as Edit while record Support on Cinedeck RX and newer deck
338. t an in point within the recorded content After the in point is selected resume can be pressed to continue recording from that in point This pause and seek process can be repeated many times Only when the final recording is complete is stop pressed to close the file 93 1934 Jes Remember Just like assemble edit on tape resuming a recording in Pause amp Seek mode after an in point is set will permanently replace all of the content after the in point with new content PAUSE GL SEEK IN FILE PAUSED PAUSE amp SEEK IN FILE RECORDING TRANSPORT CONTROLS ACTIVE IN POINT SET RESUMED FROM NEW IN POINT ON SCREEN EDIT POINT ORANGE CONTROLS PLAY Sepol N pio35 u TIMECODE SOURCE SELECTOR WHEN PAUSE IS ACTIVE THE TRANSPORT CONTROLS CAN BE USED TO PLAY THE FILE AND THE PLAY HEAD CAN BE DRAGGED TO SCRUB THE CLIP USE ON SCREEN BUTTONS OR KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS TO CONTROL TRANSPORT AND SET EDIT POINTS DIFFERENT WRAPPERS CAN HANDLE TIMECODE DIFFERENTLY MOST ONLY NOTATE THE STARTING TIMECODE AND THE DURATION OR TOTAL NUMBER OF FRAMES WHICH MEANS TIMECODE WILL NORMALLY BE CONTIGUOUS ACROSS EDITS MOV QUICKTIME INCLUDES A TIMECODE TRACK SO CAN CONTAIN NONCONTIGUOUS TIMECODE IF NONCONTIGUOUS SOURCE TIMECODE IS REQUIRED INSTEAD OF CONTIGUOUS RECORD TIMECODE SELECT INPUT FROM THE TIMECODE SELECTOR MENU 9 I4 u 9935 79 sned Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Pag
339. tant to understand that the input format has an impact on what encoding is available Not all codecs support all input types and frame rates so again it is important to know the full workflow See 10 1 FAQ gt Features on page 289 qe 1 Se WN It should be noted that Cinedecks support most commonly used codecs but not all Cinedeck systems have all codecs This is especially true for ZX which is a modular system often purchased with a limited set of codecs Additional workflow packages with additional codecs and wrappers are available Once you have selected your desired codec you usually need to select a quality level or bitrate This will not be the case for example if you select uncompressed as there is only one quality for uncompressed Cinedeck encoders use the most common designations for encode quality so you should find the options familiar Select the appropriate quality setting and move on to 283 QUALITY e Ms select a wrapper If the only information visible in this column is not available it is because the input you are using is not supported by the selected codec This is because not all codecs and wrappers support all input types and frame rates so again it is important to know the full workflow See 10 4 What is bitrate quality on page 29 Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 147 of 304 Master tab cont Last of the basic encode selections is th
340. te the folder C Cinedeck projects n D O D go O E o D If this last procedure allows you access you will first need to create a new project before continuing e Recall a Windows System Restore Point Automatic Restore Point creation is generally turned off on Cinedecks but if you manually created a Restore Point for example after an update you can use it to reset your system back to that point e System Restore If the the above described reset or Restore Point recall do not resolve the problem and Cinedeck Support is unavailable the next step is to perform a full system restore from the USB restore disk See 9 17 Restore factory image on page 282 The system restore clears and rewrites the system drive with a fresh copy of the operating system and program files stored on the USB Before performing a full restore please save the most recent log files and dump files to a safe place and note any system changes you have made to your Cinedeck so you can recreate them after the restore So2i eJd 1599 Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 247 of 304 9 2 Touchscreen calibration On occasion the built in touch screens on MX and RX need to be re calibrated The issue will be apparent as you will have difficulty touching the control you need This is a normal occurrence but if it happens very regularly it can be a sign of a failing display system If the calibr
341. th UEFI and the brand name 5 Presuming the drive was listed it should work as a restore key C D Co et D E UN UJ D WY et O D D lt m RX3G V4 3 11148 72 r 5j CFG File EJ home Creating the RX USB restore key vs 4 amp CFG File The following should be done on a Windows PC or coll aan J home directly on the Cinedeck LK N de live e Extractthe contents of the zip file s to a I de syslinux convenient location such as the desktop Je utils e Format the 8GB USB as fat32 Use quick format L Clonezilla Live Version e If using the full restore zip for RX3G you will have __ COPYING 5 folders and 2 or 3 files similar to the image at the RX3G V4 3 11148 9 17 14 txt left Copy these over to the USB stick Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 284 of 304 Create USB restore key cont D lt 88 RX3G V4 3 11148 7z pz If you have separate zip files for the xpe full folder and A a CEG File the restore usb files copy the restore usb files folders Qo E home EE and files to the USB key E partimag ee Create a home folder on the USB key and inside the O P 3 Infa dmi txt E ope ful home folder create a partimag folder gt Info Ishw txt Info packages txt Navigate to home partimag on the USB stick and copy the xpe full folder to there e
342. th all the variables they can be changed to meet your specific requirements Click here to open an on screen keyboard to change the name Some codecs available on the Cinedeck can be encoded as either VBR variable bit rate or CBR constant bit rate This can be an important selection so if available you 322 VBR ENABLE E should confirm with whomever will be editing or further processing the files when recording is complete This setting will only be visible when a VBR codec is selected See 10 4 What is bitrate quality on page 290 Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 159 of 304 Proxy tab cont Endian type refers to the byte order of multi byte PCM audio samples Big means the 323 ENDIAN TYPE aek aR SE un data is stored big end first little the more common of the two means the data is stored little end first Unless you know big endian is needed leave this set to little When recording OpAtom which creates independent files for each video and audio UN D m 2 et D i h CU O D M MEG CUE gt hovia track you have the option of placing the clips in separate folders or of placing all the FOLDERS TE media in a single folder Each master and proxy encoder can be independently enabled or disabled as needed 325 ENCODER 2 22 Proxy tab a If there is no requirement for a particular master or proxy encode this is the way to tie d
343. the selected burn data 93 1934 Jes 338 VIDEO BURN 524 Video Bun Select the position button to open this properties panel POSITION E i iti 339 POSITIO Settings p 165 to place a burn into one of 9 screen positions lt o D O CO E s UN D et a n a Select safe to adjust the title safe position relative to the edge of the A 5 24 Video Burn 340 SAFE 96 Settings p 165 video image DA IBC Back Select size to adjust the font size for a burn Settings p 165 341 SIZE The text color of a burn can be adjusted by clicking the respective text button This opens a standard Windows color picker pop up 5 24 Video Burn Saye TET Settings p 165 Text also activates an opacity control in the properties panel Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 166 of 304 Video Burn Settings cont The background color of a burn can be adjusted by clicking the respective block button This opens a standard Windows color picker pop up 5 24 Video Burn 343 BLOCK Settings p 165 93 1934 Jes Pressing block also activates an opacity control in the properties panel This control allows specific selection of the timecode source to be used for the timecode burn in 344 ENCODER BURN 524 Video Bum The Cinedeck system can leverage multiple timecode sources and there are occasions TIMECODE SOURCE settings p 165 whe
344. the encode overview region shows one of three screens 1 The default view displays current input codec and file name settings for the master and proxy with the number of audio channels and character burn status 2 The second view displays the destination folder path and when recording multi view on the approximate encode data rate for the master and proxy 403 ENCODE sel Recording OVERVIEW 197 x are shown 3 The third view shows the current project name scene and sub scene names amp 1Recordng Pressing stop ends a current recording 404 STOP BUTTON multi view on Note that page 197 If gang is in use all selected channels will stop Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 199 of 304 6 2 Recording single channel view p s D O O gt 2 O P 201 P 201 410 RECORD BUTTON P 202 P 201 TOGGLE P 201 P 202 M IA ouueup Buis buipio as 412 FRAME BUFFER INDICATOR P 203 NN T_T 413 ENCODE OVERVIEW P 203 P 203 Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 200 of 304 Recording single channel view cont 6 2 Recordin I VI j i ivi j A05 RUIEN P The multi view toggle which switches the user interface between multi view and single O view on page remains active during recording 200 T This slider can be used to lock and unlock the display On MX it is s
345. the more common of the two means the data is stored little end first Unless you know big endian is needed leave this set to little Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 151 of 304 Master tab cont Each master and proxy encoder can be independently enabled or disabled as needed If there is no requirement for a particular master or proxy encode this is the way to disregard it When recording OpAtom which creates independent files for each video and audio track you have the option of placing all the files in a single folder or for 296 ENCODER ENABLE UN D mj 2 et D Ty h CU O D 297 USE MXF CLIP EMEN TEC FOLDERS p 145 organizational purposes placing the clips for each start stop in separate folders The default is to use a single folder Note that recording to separate folders also means loading clips separately for playback Like the name and label fields editable on the overview page encoder name reflects the encoder name variable or wild card displayed in the page tab bar The 521 Mastertab encoder name wild card can also be used in folder and file names The default names 298 ENCODER NAME 27457 in 4 channel mode are master and proxy but as with all the variables they can be changed to meet your specific requirements Click encoder name to open an on screen keyboard to change the name qe Ja1selA Record timecode offset
346. the next number System variables like take number or date cannot be edited 1 user User wildcards contain user generated text and are only available within a project They might d wildcard contain regularly used project based data such as a show number or directors name 2 global The global wildcards not shown above are user generated As the name indicates global xA U l U wildcard wildcards are available across all projects and might contain data like a facility ID or department Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 123 of 304 s O et E go gt D 3 O T This is a system generated automatic counter which increments based on system data in this case t pai clip names in the target folder Each new clip that uses the same name template as existing clips d D x E 2 E D Q 5 19 2 Path amp file name templates The path and file naming templates page is where you manage folder and file naming for your project It is important to note that the various lists scenes sub scenes and user lists 1 2 amp 3 are project based wildcard elements that can be included in your names They can then be toggled through during your recording session to quickly and accurately name specific content Note also that there are six additional global wildcards which are user generated and available across all projects USE SAME TEMPLATES P 127 P 127 93 1934 Jes P 127
347. the system from the USB however the active Clonezilla automation script needs to be changed For RX copy the xpe full folder from home partimag on the USB to a safe location on your computer For MX copy the MXRestore folder from the USB drive to a safe location on your computer Navigate to the syslinux folder on the USB For RX rename syslinux cfg to syslinux deploy cfg Rename syslinux save cfg to syslinux cfg For MX ZX rename syslinux cfg to syslinux deploy cfg Rename syslinux save cfg to syslinux cfg e For the MX USB delete the MXRestore folder e For the RX USB delete the xpe full folder from home partimag O D CU ect D UN lt UN et D gt gt CU O D As with a restore to create an image of the existing machine boot the system with the Restore USB 1 Shut the deck down and remove disconnect any media drives 2 Insert the USB flash drive into a rear USB2 port and connect a keyboard to the rear USB ports 3 Power on the Cinedeck and e For RX3G keep tapping the F7 key until you enter the startup menu For MX or ZX keep tapping the F8 key until you enter the startup menu 4 Select the non UEFT version of the USB 5 After the system boots you will be prompted to save the image to USB Type y for yes and press enter Actual OS size and drive speeds vary but it takes about 20 minutes to save a system image to USB After the image is saved you need to set the
348. this L Disk 1 Basic Samsung 512 7361 amsung 512 7361V D 476 94 GB 476 04 GB NTFS Online Healthy Primary Partition Note After this new drive initialization and formatting procedure you can if needed format drives from Windows Explorer using the procedure on the next pages however it is much easier to format your drives from within the Cinedeck application Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 255 of 304 9 6 Reinitializing SSDs For top performance SSDs used in Cinedeck recorders need particular care This is especially true if the disks are shuttled between Cinedecks and non Cinedeck systems such as Final Cut Pro edit systems Apple s operating system deals with disks differently than Windows which can result in a performance reduction and they leave behind files which are not helpful in the Windows environment Secure Erase factory resetting using the SSD manufacturers specific utility is the best method for restoring a SSD to peak performance For additional information about Secure Erase see 9 11 Secure erase on page 266 However the Secure Erase procedure can be somewhat cumbersome and time consuming The next best option is fully deleting the volume which will allow the Windows operating system to repartition and format the drive as if it were new n D D lt O D go O o D This reinitialization is a two step process The first step is c
349. till possible IOO LO single channel to toggle the channel view using the tactile control panel while on other systems view onpage nothing can be done until the screen is unlocked p s D O O gt 2 O 200 xm Touch and slide the control to the right to lock and unlock 6 2 Recording During recording this displays a running elapsed time of the current recording 407 single channel ELAPSED view on page 200 6 2 Recording During recording start indicates the timecode the recording started 408 single channel START view on page 200 6 2 Recording During recording end indicates the timecode the recording ends 409 single channel END view on page 200 MIA Guueup Buis Buipio3z5 u Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 201 of 304 Recording single channel view cont In normal mode once recording starts the record button disappears however if one of the special record modes is active the record button will be replaced by other record related buttons p s D O O gt 2 O When Increment segment mode or TC break segment mode are active the system will automatically close the current recording segments based on the Incoming timecode When break segment mode is active the operator can press this button to close the current recording segment 6 2 Recording 410 RECORD BUTTON nqa channel pause When pa
350. tings for the 129 ENCODE 5 8 Multi view master and proxy with the number of audio channels and character burn status OVERVIEW screen p 88 12 The second view displays the destination folder path and when recording the approximate encode data rate for the master and proxy are shown View three shows the current project and list names such as scene and sub scene The play button will load and play the most recently recorded clip If nothing is in 92e1193UT Jes 126 UI ovERLAvs amp 5 8 Multi view LUT BUTTON lt C gt lt p 2 Uu O s D D 5 oss oe 58Muliview the last play memory pressing play will go directly to the clip manager If a clip is screen p 88 loaded for playback the play button is renamed open and when pressed will open the clip manager Error log opens a sub menu with controls for 131 ERROR LOG 5 8 Multi view dismissing the most recent warning for the selected channel screen p 88 P BUTTON dismissing all warnings for the selected channel opening the log of recent errors dismissing all errors on all channels 5 8 Multi view The audio meters reflect the average audio levels for the selected channel pair 133 BACKGROUND 5 8 Multi view The bg button toggles a dark background on and off to better separate the on screen BG BUTTON screen p 88 audio meters from the underlying video Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14
351. tings is for non SSD disks Dk Cancel Dup 9u 10114 Apply Cancel 6 When complete a dialog similar to this will appear indicating if errors were found and fixed Checking Disk 55D 226 D Your device or disk was successfully scanned Mo problems were found on the device or disk IE is ready to use IF vau removed the device or disk before all Files were Fully written bo it parts of some Files might still be missing IF so go back to the source and recopy those Files to your device or disk v Sec details Close Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 265 of 304 9 11 Secure erase SSD drives are not like traditional spinning disks in that repartitioning does not fully clear the drives For SSDs its an issue of blocks vs pages known as Garbage Collection There is a lot of information on the web regarding SSD performance and secure erase but simply put secure erase will come as close as is technically possible to restoring an SSD to factory fresh condition While secure erase can be started from within Windows the SSD will often be in a frozen state which will prevent secure erase access from completing There are several possible procedures to get around this however the most effective method is to run the manufacturers secure erase from a bootable disk It is recommended that you create one in advance to have ready when you need it n D O
352. tions K Press Next Page 253 of 304 9 qnoJ 79 31AJ9S 5 ct 2 N 5 D a 3 lt D UN Initializing new drives cont After initializing the disk will be listed as Basic and Unallocated Right click the drive to open the new volume context menu and select New Simple Volume to start the New Simple Volume Wizard New Simple Volume Wizard x Specify Yolume Size Choose a volume size that is between the maximum and minimum sizes 9 qnoJ 79 e2lAJ8g Leave the volume settings as defaults and select Next Maximum disk space in MB 488384 Minimum disk space in MB 8 Simple volume size in MB EE Cinedeck drives should only contain one volume or partition Back Cancel New Simple Volume Wizard E x Assign Drive Letter or Path For easier access you can assign a drive letter or drive path to your partition Leave the drive letter settings as default unless you know what you Assign the following drive letter p are doing and prefer specifying a C Mount in the following empty NTFS folder drive letter 5 ct N 5 O 5 D 2 o lt D UN C Do not assign a drive letter or drive path Select Next lt Back Cancel New Simple Volume Wizard E x Format Partition To store data on this partition you must format it first Select the desired file system format exFAT or NTFS exFAT should only b
353. tive on the Cinedeck user interface video preview e for the selected channel and if so displays the LUT name 199 surn LUT 5 18 Overview tab Burn LUT indicates if a LUT is being used to color process the recorded proxy for the p 115 selected channel and if so displays the LUT name Copy to other channels allows copying channel independent settings such as audio channel selection and routing and file destination drive from the selected channel to one or more other channels 192 MASTER FILE DESTINATIONS 194 PROXY FILE 5 18 Overview tab DESTINATIONS p 115 qe M9SIAJ9AQ 195 NAME SORTE tab 197 PREVIEW sl 200 coPv TO OTHER 5 18 Overview tab p 115 CHANNELS Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 117 of 304 Overview tab cont 5 18 Overview tab Pressing save and close confirms any changes closes the setup screens and returns 201 SAVE AND CLOSE p 115 l l MAA to the previous multi or single channel view 5 18 Overview tab Segment mode indicates if one of the file segment modes is active for that channel and encode and if increment mode is selected displays the preset segment duration UN D 2 et D h CU O D 202 SEGMENT MODE The orange text in this area indicates what will occur if the system detects a dropped 203 DROP amp LOSS 5 18 Overview tab frame If drop stop is orange the system will stop rec
354. to the out connector For external reference Cinedecks will lock to either standard color burst black burst 96 REFERENCE IN 3 9 ZX Back panel Or Tri level sync In Auto mode if no external reference is available the deck will 182 9 09 default to internal sync or video input In dual link when referencing to incoming video reference can be selected from the A or B input For external reference Cinedecks will lock to either standard color burst black burst 97 REFERENCE IN 3 9 ZX Back panel Or Tri level sync In Auto mode if no external reference is available the deck will 384 19 821 default to internal sync or video input In dual link when referencing to incoming video reference can be selected from the A or B input E 3 9 ZX Back panel 3 5in XLR analog audio monitor output One output per channel 98 MONITOR OUT p 65 p g p put p One port per HD SD channel Each port can be used for remote control between a 99 RS 422 porrs 222XBack panel tape deck or other professional device and a Cinedeck channel The ports are bi joued Jpeg XZ 9 09 directional allowing master mode for the Cinedeck to control attached devices or slave mode allowing external devices to control the Cinedeck Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 66 of 304 ZX Back panel cont The master timecode input provides four functions Single timecode source When selected on the
355. tore is created and close all of the windows when the process finishes oen System Protection A E pm o The restore point was created successfully Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 272 of 304 9 14 Cinedeck Update installation Before YOu begin Remember that operators hate surprises If you are in the middle of a production and everything is working apply the logic of if it ain t broke don t fix it Wait until AFTER the show wraps to play with new things 9 qnoJ 79 31AJ9S Also You may want to preserve the old version of software The easiest way to do that is simply to make a copy of the cinedeck folder on a thumb drive and rename the folder to something like Cinedeck_45 13126 You can always copy this folder back as c cinedeck to roll back if needed 1 Connect a USB mouse and keyboard 2 Power on the Cinedeck and allow it to load fully Exit the Cinedeck application if it starts automatically e To exit press setup gt prefs exit application See 388 application on page 184 3 Download the update installer which will be about 250MB to a convenient location such as your USB drive Contact Cinedeck for the current file location See Contacting Cinedeck on page 2 It is always wise to save a copy of the installer file on your computer or server as well as in an updates folder located on the USB restore key which came with your C
356. tprint Built in to the front panel are User interface touch display which can be tilted e A eSATA and USB port Two removable drive trays each of which can hold two SATA drives e A headphone jack Internally RX3G provides two full duplex 3G channels a full selection of master formats accompanied by an H 264 proxy and most of the available Cinedeck features In HD and SD mode RX3G can record master and proxy for each channel With the 4K mode option RX3G can play a single channel of 4K RX3G comes with Two AC to DC power supplies with localized power cables A touch screen stylus One USB software installation disk Restore disk If you purchased accessories such as media drives or a rack kit with your Cinedeck they will be included in a separate box Please check to ensure that all expected contents are included In the event something is missing please immediately contact your reseller or Cinedeck Support See Contacting Cinedeck on page 2 Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 33 of 304 xog y ui S JeYM DEXY A99p9UID 2 2 Cinedeck MX MX is the flagship four channel recorder Built in to the front panel are User interface touch display which can be tilted Solid state memory card readers for P2 SxS and compact flash A eSATA and USB ports A tactile jog shuttle control Touch panel controls Four removable drive trays each of which can hold two SATA drives Dual m
357. ttings and previous versions of Files Delete HP Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 271 of 304 Create a restore point cont System Properties EE x Computer Mame Hardware Advanced System Protection Remote T Use system protection to unda unwanted system changes and Pha restore previous versions of files what is system protection 9 qnoJ 79 31AJ9S System Restore You can undo system changes by reverting systen Restore Your computer to a previous restore pont Protection Settings 9 Available Drives Protection cg New E Ort a PB Full F Ort L Local Disk IC System On Configure restore settings manage disk space and delete restore points Create a restore point right now For the drives that create y have system protection turned on O s D C ect D CU S D Uu et O D AN O gt ect OK Cancel Apply 6 Atthe following dialog you can give this new restore point a user friendly name select Create Xi Note that when you open restore mode the date and time Create a restore point are automatically included with the information displayed Type a description to help you identify the restore point The current date and time are added automatically pum 7 Follow the prompts as the res
358. ucts Being customer and engineering oriented means the Cinedeck engineering team is always open to and interested in discussing specialized integration additional features and feature modifications o Extended hardware warranties with priority support and software maintenance including all major updates are available to extend factory warranty and support beyond the first year 10 65 UpRez HD to 4K Systems with the 4K UHD YUV option have the ability to directly uprez HD source inputs to UHDTV 1 and 2K source inputs to full 4K There are specialized real time scaling algorithms which provide excellent results for uprezzing cell style animation and live action video sources 1 Optional on MX amp ZX 10 66 VBR CBR encoding Some codecs such as H 264 and ProRes support both CBR constant bitrate and VBR variable bitrate encoding The Cinedeck interface allows selection of CBR or VBR on a per encode basis CBR can be especially important in the Cinedeck environment as the Cinedeck insert editing function requires using CBR encoded source and destination content Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 302 of 304 seJnjeeJ 9 OVS soJnjeo4 lt OVS FAQ gt Features cont 10 67 Warranty All Cinedeck recorders come with a first year bumper to bumper warranty which includes support and full hardware and software coverage Additional years of support can be purchased anytime as lo
359. urce such as a VTR or edit system remote player source to Cinedeck recorder 3 In both situations the target file that will A receive the insert is opened on the Cinedeck LEES 93 1934 Jes ee Se ma s r r hee m Oe oe s lt Whether working channel to channel or from a separate machine the operator can control the source via RS 422 using the controls provided on the master Cinedeck target channel interface In the case of a non linear system like Media Composer editing can be controlled entirely from the Digital Cut tool exactly as it would be with a tape machine except you are writing to files instead of tape s po p402e8y Note An important aspect of editing with the Cinedeck is the timecode offset For all scenarios see 358 Special timecode modes on page 173 CH 1 SETUP AS PLAYER CH 2 SETUP AS RECORDER SDI 01 00 58 08 assem PE input pret remote 01 00 58 08 UN D Yyj et UJ CU UN D O CU gt o Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 104 of 304 5 11 5 Insert Baseband Master Insert editing can be controlled in single channel view or multichannel view there are a few important things to remember e Assign your Cinedeck channels to separate projects particularly the master and confirm project settings e While any transport controls can be used for playing shuttling etc edit points for the source should be
360. use is active pressing this button stops the encoding process view on page 200 but the file remains open until stop is pressed For EDL recording the button will change states depending on the current activity MIA Guueup Buis Buipio3z5 u load edl means preroll indicates next stop means next start means an EDL is in ready EDL mode is active a file is recording the system is but recording has The system is The system is waiting for the next not been activated waiting for the first waiting for a stop event start time Press to start event trigger 62 Recording Gang mode is also in effect for stopping a recording If staggered mode is in use ingle ch 411 GANG BUTTON view on page Stopping each channel also happens sequentially one by one after the user defined 200 time delay Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 202 of 304 Recording single channel view cont The frame buffer indicator provides very useful real time details on recording and drive performance The top row indicates the master encode The second row indicates the proxy encode p s D O O gt 2 O The numbers to the left of the indicate frame buffer usage for encoding and will l be different for different codecs In this case the counter for the master is zero Low 412 FRAME BUFFER s s numbers like 0 or 1 are
361. used during production The metadata for sub scenes not user lists is primarily meant for slate burn in an upcoming feature for automatically adding a slate at the head of each clip recording for a user defined number of frames Each scene in a project can effectively have an unlimited number of sub scenes 92eJ193UT Jes USER LISTS 253 PAGE TABS P 135 sub scenes list sa a 254 CURRENT PROJECT DISPLAY p 135 255 SCENES sub2 LIST P 135 Jobeueuu pelold new sub scene Ctrl N L Demoshow scene 2 amp subi currently assigned to inputs rename sub scene Ctri R 261 SCENE LIST SCROLL P 136 256 MANAGE SCENES manage sub scene pe BUTTON P 135 sub scenes metadata no input 257 SCENE METADATA P 135 258 CHANNEL 259 CANCEL 260 SAVE amp CLOSE ASSIGNMENTS P 136 BUTTON P 136 BUTTON P 136 UN y Uu O D D Uu C Uu D Iss T ret n Note 257 scene metadata p 135 Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 137 of 304 5 20 Input tab The input page is the first real setup screen in the left to right setup sequence and the settings you change here are for all channels associated to the current project If you have all channels associated to the current project you will just do this once Otherwise you will perform these steps for each project To begin setup your cables should already be con
362. ut gt O v Super Out y available on l O secondary N Y Optional Optional Optional 3 Video Out HD 50 60P 1 Channel AK 50 60P 4 2 2 3D I I support Y Future Option Y Future Option Y Future Option Y Future Option Y Future Option Mid ON Y Future Option Y Future Option Y Future Option N support oe ae N Y Future Option Y Future Option Y Future Option N support 16 2 per BNC aval 8 2 per BNC 16 via breakout 16 2 per BNC 16 2 per BNC 16 2 per BNC Channels o Optional Embedded Q SDI Audio per 16 16 16 16 16 2 video in Analog Audio 2ch unbalanced 2ch unbalanced 2ch unbalanced 2ch unbalanced 2ch unbalanced on board via mini jack via mini jack via mini jack via mini jack via mini jack Cinedeck August 27 2015 14 28 Page 307 of 350 Basic specifications cont suoneoii edsg XLR Audio Headphone 1 mini 2 mini 2 Ya 1 mini 1 mini 1 mini Jack front mounted front mounted rear mounted rear mounted rear mounted processing Y except where Y except where Y except where Y except where Y except where restricted by codec restricted by codec restricted by codec restricted by codec restricted by codec wrapper wrapper wrapper wrapper wrapper 24bit audio encoding Analoa via USB 2ch balanced 2ch balanced 2ch balanced 2ch balanced 2ch balanced g via Scarlet 2i2 via Scarlet 212 via Scarlet 212 via Scarlet 212 via Scarlet 212 O T O A 5
363. ut are computationally challenging requiring significantly more processing power than others A codec like XDCAM HD has quite a low data rate but its LongGoP structure will Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 289 of 304 seJnjeeJ 9 OVS soJnjeo4 lt OVS FAQ gt Features cont not always render motion as well as some would like Just as important is that not every codec is supported by every video system so it really is critical to assure that the correct codec is selected for the planned workflow 10 3 What is a wrapper File wrappers are probably the most misunderstood of these three but simply put a wrapper is just a container which carries something Examples of wrappers are MOV MXF MP4 etc The container can be equated as the can which contains some soup and like a soup can the wrapper includes information identifying the ingredients or in the video world the essence So MyVideo mxf might contain a track of video and 4 tracks of audio Along with that essence will be information identifying what that video and audio essence actually is It could for example be XDCAM SOMbit video with 24bit PCM audio Of course there could be timecode data and a slew of other bits of information related to the contents Just like codecs not all systems support all file wrappers so while you might have use a codec which is supported if the wrapper is not supported the system has no way to dig i
364. uter Egg ut Map network drive E za Disconnect network drive f M a na a g e m e na t B Add a network location a EE Delete E EE Rename Properties E Local Disk C F a 550 226 D E ca Mew Volume E E a PB Full F zl 4 items Page 233 of 304 O J3u02 1ouu u Jobeue A 32IA Gq 8 2 RS 422 COM port setup Once Computer Manager is open See 8 1 Device Manager on page 233 from the list at the left select Device Manager and from the list which opens in the middle locate Ports COM amp LPT and click the to open the list of devices ES Computer Management File Action View Help Each deck has several USB amp ala HO H 0 COM ports The settings for Computer Management Local Actions El f System Tools TRP AEC Time Code device each port can be accessed i a Device Ma NOM CO Task Scheduler 0 785 Computer by right clicking and El d Event Viewer Ely Disk drives selecting properties from El zz Shared Folders e Display adapters h A Local Users and Groups Elda DVD CD ROM drives the context menu El 3 Performance 4 Human Interface Devices Device Manager Hag IDE ATA ATAPI controllers E Storage H Keyboards The standard RS 422 COM zm Disk Management Y D Mice and other pointing devices ports for RX3G are E Services and Applications A monitors RY Network adapters El Ports COM amp LPT COM 5 RX3G CH
365. vided into multiple sections The first two chapters after the table of contents which in PDF form employs hyperlinks are an introduction and overview of what comes with each machine The following chapters which include physical descriptions for each deck and user interface details make extensive use of captions for each control and connection Captions include a caption ID and page numbers directing the reader to descriptions and operational explanations When viewed as a PDF the captions employ hyperlinks to provide direct navigation to the relevant details Additionally Pressing ALT Left Arrow or AL T Right Arrow will navigate backwards and forwards through previously viewed pages Towards the end of the manual are several sections with specifications appendices of useful information and a section describing each feature and frequently asked questions Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 27 of 304 1 2 Copyright and Trademarks All trademarks are the property of their respective owners uononpoJiu Cinedeck is a trademark of Cine Design Group LLC ProRes is a trademark of Apple Computer Corporation Avid Media Composer is a trademark of Avid Technology Inc DNxHD is a trademark of Avid Technology Inc Windows is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation Premiere is a trademark of Adobe Corporation All other tradenames referenced are service marks trademarks or registered trade
366. which can provide full access to the Cinedeck from a simple start stop remote controller up to total asset management AMP connectivity is by RS 422 or TCP IP LAN based remote control using AMP requires TCP port 3811 to be open The Cinedeck MCC application multi machine controller utilizes AMP for communicating with the decks so also requires TCP port 3811 to be open The complete AMP documentation is available separately See Contacting Cinedeck on page 2 but for those interested in developing their own control interface some basic examples using the Putty Client or a similar telnet client are below e Telnet to port 3811 on the Cinedeck Setupa connection to channel 1 by sending the following CRAT0007204Vtr1 Replace the trailing 1 with 2 3 or 4 to open connection to other channels You should see an ACK response from the Cinedeck which is simply 1001 e Send the record command 20 02 CMDS00042002 The Cinedeck will ACK on response 1001 and start to record Send the stop command 20 00 CMDS00042000 e The Cinedeck will ACK 1001 and stop the recording Cinedeck USER GUIDE Cinedeck Version 4 5 13666 August 27 2015 14 28 Page 242 of 304 O J3u02 0W Y IO2O1O1d JINV 8 6 VDCP VDCP Video Disk Control Protocol is a serial communications protocol designed originally to control early hard disk recorders Originally developed by Louth Automation VDCP is an extension of Sony RS 422 and also ut
367. ystem changes by reverting pour computer to a previous restore point Protection Settings _ Protection Available Drives ca new E cs PB Sete Local Disk E System anfigure restore settings manage disk space Configure B rest ints T 2 E w ZE System Protection for Local Disk E x X Restore Settings Ta create a restore point first enable protection by selecting a drive and clicking Configure Cancel Ereate System Protection can keep copies of system settings and previous versions af Files Select what vau would like to be able to restore Restore system settings and previous versions of Files L Only restore previous versions of Files O s D C ect D CU S D Uu et O D E O gt ect C Turn off system protection 2 Under Restore Settings select the radio button Restore system settings and previous versions of files Diek Space Dese You can adjust the maximum disk space used For system protection As 3 Below under Disk Space Usage slide the Max Usage space Fills up older restore points will be deleted to make room For new gt Ones indicator to allow a minimum of between 2 and 3GB Current Usage O bytes Max Usage 4 Select OK SaasasssuankkuusasRARussARRRRARRaRauRARRRRRRRRRRRRRHARRRRRRSARRRA O 1095 2 73 GB 5 Select Create Delete all restore points this includes system se

Codecs & wrappers / cont

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Codecs &amp; wrappers / cont

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Codecs & wrappers / cont